FORD F-150 Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2020
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 202007 20200831140540
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Contacting Us
Contacting Us ..................................................19
Introduction
About This Publication .................................21
Using This Publication .................................22
Symbols Glossary
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle ................23
Data Privacy
Data Privacy ....................................................26
Service Data .....................................................27
Event Data ........................................................27
Settings Data ..................................................28
Connected Vehicle Data .............................28
Mobile Device Data .......................................29
Emergency Call System Data ...................29
Visual Search
Steering Wheel ..............................................30
Instrument Panel ............................................31
Vehicle Interior ................................................32
Front Exterior ..................................................33
Rear Exterior ....................................................34
Child Safety
Child Safety Precautions ............................35
Child Restraint Anchor Points ..................36
Child Restraints ..............................................38
Installing Child Restraints ..........................39
Booster Seats .................................................46
Child Safety Locks ........................................48
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Precautions ...................................49
Fastening and Unfastening the Seatbelts
..........................................................................50
Sensitive Locking Mode ...............................51
Automatic Locking Mode ............................51
Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy ....................................................52
Adjusting the Seatbelt Height ..................52
Adjusting the Seatbelt Length .................53
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................53
Checking the Seatbelts ...............................55
Seatbelt Extensions .....................................56
Personal Safety System™
What Is the Personal Safety System
...........................................................................57
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work ...............................................................57
Personal Safety System Components
...........................................................................57
Airbags
How Do the Front Airbags Work ..............58
How Do the Side Airbags Work ...............58
How Do the Knee Airbags Work ..............59
How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work
..........................................................................59
Airbag Precautions .......................................60
Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats .........................................61
Children and Airbags ....................................61
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........62
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......65
Disposing of Airbags ....................................66
Pedestrian Alert System
What Is the Pedestrian Alert System
...........................................................................67
911 Assist
What Is 911 Assist .........................................68
How Does 911 Assist Work ........................68
Emergency Call Requirements ................68
Emergency Call Limitations ......................69
1
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Control Limitations ......................70
Using the Remote Control .........................70
Opening and Closing the Flip Key ...........70
Removing the Key Blade ..............................71
Sounding the Panic Alarm ..........................71
Locating Your Vehicle ....................................71
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start ........72
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Flip Key .............................73
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
...........................................................................74
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start ........75
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Flip Key ............................76
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting .........................................77
MyKey™
What Is MyKey ................................................78
MyKey Settings ...............................................78
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start ................................................79
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Flip
Key .................................................................80
Programming a MyKey ...............................80
Clearing All MyKeys .....................................80
Checking MyKey System Status .............80
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems .......................................................80
MyKey – Troubleshooting ...........................81
Doors and Locks
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle ..........................................................84
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle ..........................................................84
Autounlock ......................................................85
Autolock ...........................................................85
Mislock ..............................................................85
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings .......86
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting
..........................................................................86
Keyless Entry
Locating the Keyless Entry Keypad ........87
Keyless Entry Limitations ...........................87
Master Access Code .....................................87
Keyless Entry Settings .................................87
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Remote Keyless Entry .............................88
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Keyless Entry Keypad ..............................89
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting ............89
Easy Entry and Exit
How Does Easy Entry and Exit Work
..........................................................................90
Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and
Off ..................................................................90
Tailgate - Vehicles With:
Manual Tailgate
Opening the Tailgate ....................................91
Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate ........91
Removing and Installing the Tailgate
...........................................................................91
Tailgate Step ...................................................92
Bed Extender ..................................................93
Tailgate Work Surface .................................95
Tailgate - Vehicles With:
Power Tailgate
Opening the Tailgate ...................................96
Closing the Tailgate .....................................96
Removing and Installing the Tailgate
...........................................................................97
Tailgate Step ..................................................98
Bed Extender ..................................................99
Tailgate Work Surface ................................101
Tailgate – Troubleshooting ......................102
2
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Tailgate - Vehicles With:
Remote Release Tailgate
Opening the Tailgate .................................104
Removing and Installing the Tailgate
........................................................................104
Tailgate Step .................................................105
Bed Extender ................................................106
Tailgate Work Surface ...............................108
Tailgate – Troubleshooting .....................109
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System ...........................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings .........112
Security – Troubleshooting .......................113
Power Running Boards
Power Running Board Precautions ........115
Power Running Board Settings ...............115
Power Running Board Kick Switch .........115
Deploying and Stowing the Power
Running Boards .........................................116
Power Running Boards –
Troubleshooting ........................................116
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................117
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................117
Resetting the Stopping Position -
Vehicles With: Power Adjustable
Steering Column .......................................118
Horn ...................................................................118
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off ..................................................118
Adjustable Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals ...................................119
Wipers and Washers
Wipers ..............................................................120
Autowipers .....................................................120
Checking the Wiper Blades .......................121
Replacing the Front Wiper Blades ..........121
Washers ...........................................................122
Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................122
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lighting Control ...........................124
Headlamps .....................................................124
Headlamps – Troubleshooting ..............124
Autolamps ......................................................125
Exterior Lamps ..............................................125
Exterior Zone Lighting .................................127
Automatic High Beam Control ...............128
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting ......................................130
Glare Free Lighting .......................................131
Glare Free Lighting – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................133
Adaptive Front Lighting .............................133
Interior Lighting
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On
and Off ........................................................135
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On
and Off ........................................................135
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On
and Off ........................................................135
Interior Lamp Function ..............................135
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
Brightness ..................................................136
Ambient Lighting .........................................136
Windows
Opening and Closing the Windows .......137
Window Bounce-Back ...............................137
Locking the Rear Window Controls ......138
3
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Opening and Closing the Sliding
Windows .....................................................138
Interior Mirror
Interior Mirror Precautions .......................139
Manually Dimming the Interior Mirror
.........................................................................139
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror .................139
Exterior Mirrors
Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors .................140
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Manual Folding Mirrors .............140
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Power Folding Mirrors ................140
Extending the Exterior Mirrors .................141
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror .................141
Moonroof
Opening and Closing the Sun Shade
.........................................................................142
Opening and Closing the Moonroof ......142
Venting the Moonroof ................................142
Moonroof Bounce-Back ............................143
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 4.2 Inch Screen .............................144
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 8 Inch Screen ................................145
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 12.3 Inch Screen ...........................146
What Is the Tachometer ...........................146
What Is the Speedometer .......................146
Fuel Gauge .....................................................146
What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge ...........................................................147
What Is the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
.........................................................................147
What Is the Transmission Fluid
Temperature Gauge ................................147
What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge .............147
What Is the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge
.........................................................................147
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Warning Lamps ........................................147
Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps ......148
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Indicators ....................................................149
Instrument Cluster Indicators .................149
Instrument Cluster Display
Using the Instrument Cluster Display
Controls ........................................................151
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch Screen ............151
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 8 Inch Screen ...............152
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen ..........152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen ..........................................................152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen .......................153
Customizing the Instrument Cluster
Display .........................................................153
Personalized Settings ................................153
Hybrid Display Information ......................154
What Is Brake Coach ..................................154
What Is the Trip Summary .......................154
Remote Start
What Is Remote Start ................................155
Remote Start Precautions .......................155
Remote Start Limitations .........................155
Enabling Remote Start ..............................155
Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle .........................................................155
Extending the Remote Start Duration
.........................................................................156
Remote Start Remote Control Indicators
.........................................................................156
Remote Start Settings ...............................156
4
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Automatic
Temperature Control
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....158
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Defrost On and Off ................158
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................159
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off .................................................................159
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off ........................................................159
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
.........................................................................159
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........159
Setting the Temperature ..........................159
Directing the Flow of Air ...........................160
Auto Mode .....................................................160
Climate Control Hints .................................161
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Manual Temperature
Control
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....163
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Defrost On and Off ................163
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................164
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off ........................................................164
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
.........................................................................164
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........164
Setting the Temperature ..........................164
Directing the Flow of Air ...........................164
Climate Control Hints ................................165
Interior Air Quality
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................166
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter .................166
Front Seats
Front Seat Precautions ..............................167
Sitting in the Correct Position .................167
Manual Seats ................................................168
Power Seats ...................................................170
Massage Seats ..............................................173
Heated Seats .................................................174
Ventilated Seats ...........................................174
Rear Seats
Manual Seats ................................................176
Heated Seats .................................................177
Rear Occupant Alert System
What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
.........................................................................179
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
System Work .............................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
.........................................................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
.........................................................................179
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off ..................................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
........................................................................180
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings ....................................................180
5
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Memory Function
What Is the Memory Function .................181
Memory Function Precautions ................181
Locating the Memory Function Buttons
..........................................................................181
Saving a Preset Position ............................181
Recalling a Preset Position .......................181
Garage Door Opener
What Is the Garage Door Opener ..........182
How Does the Garage Door Opener Work
.........................................................................182
Garage Door Opener Precautions .........182
Garage Door Opener Limitations ..........183
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to Your Hand-Held Transmitter .........183
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to Your Garage Door Opener Motor
.........................................................................184
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to Your Gate Opener Motor .................184
Clearing the Garage Door Opener .........185
Reprogramming the Garage Door Opener
.........................................................................185
Garage Door Opener Radio Frequencies
.........................................................................185
USB Ports
Locating the USB Ports ............................186
Playing Media Using the USB Port .......186
Charging a Device ........................................187
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet ........................188
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2kW ..................................................188
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2.4kW/7.2kW .................................189
Locating the Power Outlet ......................190
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2kW ..............................................................190
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2.4kW/7.2kW ..............................................191
What Is Utility Idle Mode - Vehicles With:
Flip Key .........................................................191
Switching Utility Idle On and Off -
Vehicles With: Flip Key ...........................191
What Is Generator Mode ..........................192
Switching Generator Mode On and Off
.........................................................................192
Resetting Ground Fault Detection ........192
Resetting the Circuit Breaker - Vehicles
With: 7.2kW ................................................193
Power Outlet – Troubleshooting ...........194
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
120V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet .........................197
Power Outlet Precautions ........................197
Power Outlet Limitations ..........................197
Locating the Power Outlet .......................197
Power Outlet Indicators ............................198
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
12V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet ........................199
Power Outlet Precautions .......................199
Locating the Power Outlet ......................199
Center Console Work Surface
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Column Shift ...........200
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Console Shift ............201
Center Console Work Surface –
Troubleshooting ......................................202
Wireless Accessory Charger
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger
........................................................................203
6
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions
........................................................................203
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger
........................................................................203
Charging a Wireless Device ....................203
Storage
Cup Holders ..................................................205
Glove Compartment .................................205
Under Seat Storage ...................................206
Glasses Holder ............................................208
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Precautions ..............................................209
Ignition Switch .............................................209
Push Button Ignition Switch ....................210
Starting the Engine .....................................210
Engine Block Heater ....................................213
Stopping the Engine ...................................214
Automatic Engine Stop ............................215
Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Position .......................................................216
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting .......................................216
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Information
What is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle ...........221
How Does a Hybrid Electric Vehicle Work
.........................................................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Driving
Characteristics ..........................................221
Low Engine Use Mode ................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information
Indicators ...................................................222
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Troubleshooting ......................................222
Auto-Start-Stop
What Is Auto-Start-Stop .........................224
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions ................224
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off
........................................................................224
Stopping the Engine ..................................224
Restarting the Engine ................................224
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators .....................224
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting
........................................................................225
Fuel and Refueling
Fuel and Refueling Precautions .............227
Fuel Quality ...................................................227
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel ...............232
Running Out of Fuel ...................................232
Refueling ........................................................233
Fuel Tank Capacity - Excluding: Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ..........................238
Fuel Tank Capacity - Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................239
Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting
........................................................................239
Diesel Particulate Filter
What Is the Diesel Particulate Filter .....240
How Does the Diesel Particulate Filter
Work ............................................................240
Diesel Particulate Filter Precautions
........................................................................240
Diesel Particulate Filter Requirements
.........................................................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration .............................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter –
Troubleshooting ......................................243
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System - Diesel
What Is the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System ..................................245
How Does the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Work ......................245
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Precautions ...............................................245
7
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Requirements ..........................................246
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Guidelines .................................................246
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank .............................................247
Checking the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Status ...................249
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification ............................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Troubleshooting .....................................249
Catalytic Converter
What Is the Catalytic Converter .............251
Catalytic Converter Precautions ............251
Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................251
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)
What Is the High Voltage Battery .........252
High Voltage Battery Precautions ........252
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission Precautions
........................................................................253
Automatic Transmission Positions ......253
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear ..............254
Manually Shifting Gears ...........................254
Temporary Neutral Mode ........................255
Using Progressive Range Selection ......256
Automatic Return to Park (P) ................256
Stowing the Selector Lever - Vehicles
With: Console Shift ................................256
Manual Park Release .................................257
Four-Wheel Drive
How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work ......260
Four-Wheel Drive Precautions ..............260
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations .................261
Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode ....262
Four-Wheel Drive Modes .........................263
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators ..................264
Four-Wheel Drive Driving Hints .............264
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting
........................................................................266
Electronic Locking Differential
What Is the Electronic Locking
Differential ................................................269
Electronic Locking Differential
Precautions ..............................................269
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x4 .............269
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x2 ...............271
Electronic Locking Differential Indicators
.........................................................................272
Electronic Locking Differential –
Troubleshooting ......................................272
Brakes
Brake Precautions .......................................273
Anti-Lock Braking System .......................273
Brake Over Accelerator .............................273
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir .......273
Checking the Brake Fluid ..........................273
Brake Fluid Specification .........................274
Brakes – Troubleshooting ........................274
Electric Parking Brake
What Is the Electric Parking Brake .......276
Applying the Electric Parking Brake ......276
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency ................................................276
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake ............................................................276
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake ...........................................276
Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning
.........................................................................277
8
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Charge .........................................................277
Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................277
Reverse Braking Assist
What Is Reverse Braking Assist .............279
How Does Reverse Braking Assist Work
........................................................................279
Reverse Braking Assist Precautions ......279
Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Off ................................................................280
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist .......280
Reverse Braking Assist Indicators ........280
Reverse Braking Assist –
Troubleshooting .....................................280
Hill Start Assist
What Is Hill Start Assist ...........................282
How Does Hill Start Assist Work ..........282
Hill Start Assist Precautions ...................282
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting ......282
Auto Hold
How Does Auto Hold Work .....................283
Switching Auto Hold On and Off ..........283
Using Auto Hold ..........................................283
Auto Hold Indicators ..................................283
Traction Control
What Is Traction Control .........................284
How Does Traction Control Work .........284
Switching Traction Control On and Off
........................................................................284
Traction Control Indicator .......................284
Traction Control – Troubleshooting .....285
Stability Control
How Does Stability Control Work ........286
Switching Stability Control On and Off
........................................................................287
Stability Control Indicator .......................288
Hill Descent Control
What Is Hill Descent Control ..................289
How Does Hill Descent Control Work
........................................................................289
Hill Descent Control Precautions .........289
Switching Hill Descent Control On and
Off ................................................................289
Setting the Hill Descent Speed .............289
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............289
Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................290
Active Drive Assist
What Is Active Drive Assist ......................291
How Does Active Drive Assist Work ......291
Active Drive Assist Precautions ..............291
Active Drive Assist Requirements .........292
Active Drive Assist Limitations ..............292
Active Drive Assist Settings ....................292
Switching Active Drive Assist On and Off
........................................................................292
Active Drive Assist Alerts .........................292
Active Drive Assist Automatic
Cancellation .............................................293
Active Drive Assist Indicators .................293
Active Drive Assist – Troubleshooting
........................................................................294
Steering
Electric Power Steering ............................295
Steering – Troubleshooting ....................296
Parking Aids
Parking Aid Precautions ...........................297
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................297
Front Parking Aid ........................................298
Side Parking Aid ..........................................299
9
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Parking Aid Indicators ..............................300
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting .............301
Rear View Camera
What Is the Rear View Camera .............302
Rear View Camera Precautions ............302
Locating the Rear View Camera ...........302
Rear View Camera Guide Lines .............302
Rear View Camera Settings ...................303
360 Degree Camera
What Is the 360 Degree Camera .........305
How Does the 360 Degree Camera Work
........................................................................305
360 Degree Camera Precautions ........305
360 Degree Camera Limitations ..........305
Locating the 360 Degree Cameras ......305
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines .........306
360 Degree Camera Settings ................307
Active Park Assist
What Is Active Park Assist ......................309
How Does Active Park Assist Work ......309
Active Park Assist Precautions .............309
Switching Active Park Assist On and Off
.......................................................................309
Entering a Parallel Parking Space .......309
Entering a Perpendicular Parking Space
.........................................................................310
Exiting a Parking Space ............................310
Active Park Assist – Troubleshooting
..........................................................................311
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ...............................313
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
.........................................................................313
Setting the Cruise Control Speed ..........313
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................314
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................314
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................314
Adaptive Cruise Control
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work ...................................315
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions
.........................................................................315
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations
.........................................................................316
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
and Off .........................................................317
Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic
Cancellation ..............................................318
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed ...........................................................318
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
.........................................................................319
Canceling the Set Speed .........................320
Resuming the Set Speed .........................320
Overriding the Set Speed ..........................321
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators .......321
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control ......................................321
Lane Centering .............................................322
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control ......324
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting ......................................325
Drive Mode Control
What Is Drive Mode Control ...................328
How Does Drive Mode Control Work
........................................................................328
Selecting a Drive Mode .............................328
Drive Modes ..................................................329
Drive Mode Control – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................331
Lane Keeping System
What Is the Lane Keeping System .......333
How Does the Lane Keeping System
Work ............................................................333
Lane Keeping System Precautions ......333
10
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Lane Keeping System Limitations ........333
Switching the Lane Keeping System On
and Off .......................................................334
Switching the Lane Keeping System
Mode ...........................................................334
Alert Mode .....................................................334
Aid Mode ........................................................335
Alert and Aid Mode ....................................335
Lane Keeping System Indicators ..........336
Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting
........................................................................337
Blind Spot Information
System
What Is Blind Spot Information System
.......................................................................340
How Does Blind Spot Information
System Work ...........................................340
Blind Spot Information System
Precautions ..............................................340
Blind Spot Information System
Limitations ................................................340
Blind Spot Information System
Requirements ..........................................340
Switching Blind Spot Information
System On and Off ...............................340
Locating the Blind Spot Information
System Sensors .......................................341
Blind Spot Information System With
Trailer Coverage .......................................341
Blind Spot Information System
Indicators ...................................................343
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting ......................................343
Cross Traffic Alert
What Is Cross Traffic Alert ......................344
How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work ......344
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions .............344
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations ...............344
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Off
........................................................................344
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors
........................................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer Coverage
........................................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators ..................345
Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting
........................................................................346
Pre-Collision Assist
What Is Pre-Collision Assist ....................347
How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work
........................................................................347
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions ...........347
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations ............348
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and
Off ................................................................349
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors
........................................................................349
Distance Indication ....................................350
Distance Alert ................................................351
Automatic Emergency Braking ...............351
Evasive Steering Assist .............................352
Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting
........................................................................353
Driver Alert
What Is Driver Alert ....................................355
How Does Driver Alert Work ...................355
Driver Alert Precautions ...........................355
Driver Alert Limitations .............................355
Switching Driver Alert On and Off ........355
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting ..............356
Speed Sign Recognition
What Is Speed Sign Recognition ...........357
How Does Speed Sign Recognition Work
........................................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition Precautions
........................................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition Limitations
........................................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition Indicators ......357
11
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Warning ........................................358
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Tolerance .....................................358
Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting .....................................358
Load Carrying
Load Carrying Precautions .....................360
Using a Slide-In Camper ...........................361
Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels ................................361
What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating
.........................................................................361
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.........................................................................361
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating ...........................................................361
Calculating Payload ...................................363
Calculating the Load Limit ......................363
Pickup Bed
Pickup Bed Precautions ...........................366
Pickup Bed Anchor Points ......................366
Tailgate Anchor Points .............................368
Pickup Bed Ramps ....................................368
Connecting a Trailer
Connecting a Trailer Precautions ...........371
Hitches .............................................................371
Connecting a Trailer ...................................372
Connecting a Trailer – Troubleshooting
........................................................................374
Towing a Trailer
Towing a Trailer Precautions ..................375
Trailer Brake Precautions .........................375
Towing a Trailer Limitations ....................375
Loading Your Trailer ...................................376
Trailer Towing Hints ...................................376
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft ...............................377
Towing Weights and Dimensions .........378
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting .....404
Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller
What Is the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller ..................................................405
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
Precautions ..............................................405
Using the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller ..................................................405
Adjusting the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller Mode .....................................406
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting ......................................407
Trailer Sway Control
How Does Trailer Sway Control Work
.......................................................................409
Trailer Sway Control Precautions ........409
Switching Trailer Sway Control On and
Off ...............................................................409
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Vehicles With: Pro Trailer
Backup Assist
What Is the Trailer Reversing Aid ..........410
How Does the Trailer Reversing Aid Work
........................................................................410
Trailer Reversing Aid Precautions .........410
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for
a Conventional Trailer ...........................410
Switching the Trailer Reversing Aid On
and Off ........................................................413
Using the Trailer Reversing Aid Controller
.........................................................................413
Using the Trailer Reverse Guidance
Views ............................................................414
Trailer Reversing Aid - Troubleshooting
.........................................................................416
12
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Vehicles With: Trailer
Reverse Guidance (TRG)
What Is the Trailer Reversing Aid .........420
How Does the Trailer Reversing Aid Work
........................................................................420
Trailer Reversing Aid Precautions ........420
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for
a Conventional Trailer ..........................420
Switching the Trailer Reversing Aid On
and Off ........................................................422
Using the Trailer Reverse Guidance
Views ...........................................................422
Trailer Reversing Aid - Troubleshooting
........................................................................424
Driving Hints
Off-Road Driving .........................................428
Cold Weather Precautions ......................430
Breaking-In ...................................................430
Driving Economically ................................430
Floor Mats .......................................................431
Snow Plowing - Vehicles
Without: Snow Plow Mode
Snow Plowing Precautions .....................432
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With:
Snow Plow Mode
Snow Plowing Precautions .....................433
Operating Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow .................................................433
Snowplow Mode .........................................434
Crash and Breakdown
Information
Roadside Assistance .................................436
High Voltage Battery Vehicle Precautions
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) .........437
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and
Off ................................................................438
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................438
Post-Crash Alert System ........................440
Automatic Crash Shutoff ........................440
Recovery Towing ........................................440
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................441
Towing Your Vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions .........443
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
4x4 ...............................................................443
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle - 4x2
........................................................................445
Emergency Towing ....................................445
Towing Your Vehicle – Troubleshooting
........................................................................445
Fuses
Fuse Precautions ........................................446
Under Hood Fuse Box ..............................446
Body Control Module Fuse Box ..............451
Identifying Fuse Types .............................454
Fuses – Troubleshooting .........................454
Maintenance
Maintenance Precautions .......................455
Opening and Closing the Hood .............455
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™
.......................................................................456
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L Diesel .....457
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L .................458
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™
.......................................................................459
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) .........................460
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L ..................461
Engine Oil ......................................................462
Checking the Coolant ...............................463
Engine Air Filter ............................................467
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap -
Diesel ..........................................................470
Changing the Fuel Filter - Diesel ............471
13
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Changing the Fuel Filter - Gasoline .......471
Changing the 12V Battery .........................471
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................473
Exterior Bulbs ...............................................474
Interior Bulbs ................................................483
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators ........483
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator .......483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.0L Diesel ............483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.3L ..........................484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator .......484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators ........484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................484
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Single Generator ....................................485
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Dual Generators .....................................485
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Products .....................................486
Cleaning the Exterior ................................486
Cleaning the Interior .................................488
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............490
Waxing Your Vehicle .................................490
Storing Your Vehicle
Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage ......492
Removing Your Vehicle From Storage
........................................................................493
Wheel and Tire Information
Locating the Tire label .............................494
Department of Transportation Uniform
Tire Quality Grades ...............................494
Information on the Tire Sidewall .........495
Glossary of Tire Terminology .................500
Tire Replacement Requirements ..........501
Using Snow Chains ....................................503
Tire Care
Checking the Tire Pressures ...................505
Inflating the Tires .......................................505
Inspecting the Tire for Wear ..................506
Inspecting the Tire for Damage ............506
Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems ......507
Tire Rotation .................................................507
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .......................................................509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Overview ...................................................509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Precautions ...............................................510
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Limitations .................................................510
Viewing the Tire Pressures ........................511
Resetting Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ..........................................................511
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting .......................................514
Changing a Road Wheel
Changing a Flat Tire ...................................516
Wheel Nuts ...................................................523
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™
........................................................................524
Engine Specifications - 3.0L Diesel ......525
Engine Specifications - 3.3L ...................526
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................527
Engine Specifications - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ..........................528
Engine Specifications - 5.0L ..................529
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .....530
14
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L Diesel .................531
Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L .............................532
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .....533
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................534
Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L .............................535
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
2.7L EcoBoost™ ......................................536
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.0L Diesel .................................................537
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.3L ..............................................................539
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L Ecoboost™ ......................................541
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L, Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
........................................................................543
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
5.0L ..............................................................545
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .......547
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.0L Diesel .................548
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.3L ...............................548
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ......549
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................550
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L ...............................550
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) .............551
Fuel Tank Capacity - Diesel ....................552
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ..........................553
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .......554
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.0L Diesel ..................555
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.3L ...............................556
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .......557
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................558
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L ...............................559
Washer Fluid Specification .....................559
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification ............................................560
Brake Fluid Specification ........................560
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Specification .............................................561
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification ............................................562
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification ............................................562
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number ..............564
Connected Vehicle
What Is a Connected Vehicle .................565
Connected Vehicle Requirements .......565
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............565
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................565
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network .....................................................565
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................566
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........569
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password ................................569
Audio System
Audio System Precautions ......................570
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
........................................................................570
Selecting the Audio Source ....................570
Playing or Pausing the Audio Source
........................................................................570
Adjusting the Volume ...............................570
15
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off
.........................................................................571
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off
.........................................................................571
Setting a Memory Preset ..........................571
Muting the Audio ..........................................571
Adjusting the Sound Settings .................571
Setting the Clock and Date ......................571
AM/FM Radio ................................................572
Switching the Display On and Off ........573
Digital Radio ..................................................573
Satellite Radio .............................................574
Audio System – Troubleshooting ..........577
Identifying the Audio Unit .......................580
Information and
Entertainment Display
Overview
Information and Entertainment Display
Precautions ...............................................581
Information and Entertainment Display
Limitations .................................................581
Status Bar ......................................................581
Feature Bar ...................................................582
Information On Demand Screen -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen .........582
Voice Interaction
What is Voice Interaction ........................583
Setting the Wake Word ............................583
Beginning a Voice Interaction ................583
Voice Interaction Examples ....................583
Phone
Phone Precautions ....................................585
Connecting Your Phone ...........................585
Phone Menu .................................................585
Making and Receiving a Phone Call .....586
Sending and Receiving a Text Message
........................................................................587
Switching Text Message Notification On
and Off .......................................................588
Bluetooth®
Connecting a Bluetooth® Device ........589
Playing Media Using Bluetooth® .........589
Apps
App Precautions .........................................590
App Requirements ....................................590
Accessing Apps ..........................................590
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device ..........590
Enabling Apps on an Android Device
.......................................................................590
Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off
.........................................................................591
Switching Android Auto On and Off .....591
Personal Profiles
How Do Personal Profiles Work ............592
Enabling or Disabling Personal Profiles
........................................................................592
Creating a Personal Profile .....................593
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Remote Control ...................................593
Navigation
Accessing Navigation ...............................594
Navigation Map Updates ........................594
Adjusting the Map ......................................594
Live Traffic .....................................................594
Setting a Destination ................................594
Waypoints .....................................................595
Route Guidance ..........................................595
Trailer Towing Navigation ........................596
Vehicle System Updates
Updating the Vehicle Systems Wirelessly
........................................................................597
Performing a Master Reset .....................598
16
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................599
Ford Protect
What Is Ford Protect ................................600
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......602
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........605
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Diesel ...........................609
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Gasoline .......................614
Customer Information
Rollover Warning .........................................618
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Program - United States of America
........................................................................618
The Mediation and Arbitration Program
- Canada .....................................................619
Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Manual ........................................................619
Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States .........................................................620
Reporting Safety Defects in Canada
.......................................................................620
Type Approvals ............................................622
California Proposition 65 - United States
of America .................................................641
Perchlorate ...................................................642
Replacement Parts Recommendation
........................................................................642
Mobile Communications Equipment
........................................................................642
End User License Agreement ................643
Emission Law - United States of America
.......................................................................668
Export Unique Options ............................669
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............670
17
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
18
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
If you require assistance or clarification on
policies or procedures, please contact the
customer relationship center.
United States
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
PO Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-888-658-6805
www.ford.com/help/contact/
Canada
Customer Relationship Center
Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
Facebook: FordServiceCA (English),
FordServiceQC (Francais)
Europe
Telephone: 02035644444
E-mail: UKCRC1@ford.com
Twitter: @forduk
Australia
Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
Private Mail Bag 5
Fairlane Business Park #3
Campbellfield, Victoria, 3061
Telephone: 13 3673 (FORD)
E-mail: foacust1@ford.com
New Zealand
Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
Private Bag 76912
Manukau City 2241
Telephone: 0800 367 369 (FORDNZ)
E-mail: fnzcust@ford.com
Asia Pacific
E-mail: expcac@ford.com
Caribbean, Central America and
Israel
Ford Motor Company
Ford Export Operations
Attention: Owner Relations
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, MI 48101
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
E-mail: expcac@ford.com
U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico
Ford Motor Company
Ford Export Operations
Attention: Owner Relations
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, MI 48101
Telephone: (800) 841-3673
E-mail: prcac@ford.com
Argentina
Telephone: 0800-888-3673
Brazil
www.ford.com.br
North Africa
E-mail: nafcrc@ford.com
Sub-Saharan Africa
E-mail: ssacrc@ford.com
19
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Contacting Us
Puerto Rico
Ford International Business Development,
Inc.
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, PR 00922-1957
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
Fax: (313) 390-0804
E-mail: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
Middle East
Ford Middle East Customer Relationship
Center
P.O. Box 21740
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: 80004441066
Toll-free number for the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi
Arabia: 800850078
Kuwait: 22280384
Local telephone number for Kuwait: +965
1 898900
Fax: +971 4 3327266
E-mail: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
South Korea
Telephone: +82-02-1600-6003
E-mail: infokr1@ford.com
Ford Credit - US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and
access to an account manager, visit
www.ford.com/finance.
20
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Contacting Us
ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle in order to benefit
from greater safety and pleasure from
driving it. Use this digital manual, that we
have also made available for your
continued use through the FordPass app
and your local Ford website to familiarize
yourself with the basics.
Note: To download the FordPass app, visit
your device's app store.
Note: To find the local Ford website, visit
https://corporate.ford.com/operations/
locations/global-links.html.
Note: Use and operate your vehicle in line
with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on all printed owner’s
information when selling this vehicle.
Our digital resources include a
comprehensive digital Owner’s Manual
that is dynamically created according to
the features on your vehicle by using the
vehicle identification number. See
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number (page 564). The digital Owner’s
Manual includes visual and full text search
functions so that you can quickly locate
the information you are looking for. It also
includes links to a number of how-to
videos created to help you understand
some of the advanced technologies on
your vehicle.
Features and Options
Note: This publication describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options that are not available
on the vehicle you have purchased.
Illustrations
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual could show features as used in
different models, some can appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Location of Components
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
21
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
USING THIS PUBLICATION
To quickly locate information about your
vehicle, use the word search within the
Owner's Manual application.
22
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR
VEHICLE
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E332905
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Electric Parking brake
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
23
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Symbols Glossary
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163171
Hill descent control
E332910
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
24
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Symbols Glossary
E132353
Windshield wash and wipe
25
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Symbols Glossary
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
We respect your privacy and are
committed to protecting it. The
information contained in this manual was
correct at the time of publication but as
technology rapidly changes, we
recommend that you visit the local Ford
website for the latest information.
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have data recording functionality and
the ability to permanently or temporarily
store data. This data could include
information on the condition and status of
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance
requirements, events and malfunctions.
The types of data that can be recorded are
described in this section. Some of the data
recorded is stored in event logs or error
logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or
through a legal process. Such information
could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system
components, for example fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
• Events or errors in essential systems,
for example headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in
combination with other information, for
example an accident report, damage to a
vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
be associated with a specific person.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this
data through a dedicated, protected
connection. We only collect and use data
to enable your use of our services to which
you have subscribed, with your consent or
where permitted by law. For additional
information, see the terms and conditions
of the services to which you have
subscribed.
For additional information about our
privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
website.
Services That Third Parties
Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy
information for any services equipped with
your vehicle or to which you subscribe. We
take no responsibility for services that third
parties provide.
Where equipped, SiriusXM with 360L may
use the modem. To disable, turn off the
SiriusXM 360L or Vehicle Connectivity
setting. See Enabling and Disabling the
Modem (page 565).
26
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
SERVICE DATA
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, for example, your contact information,
to offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, you consent that certain
diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries.
EVENT DATA
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened.
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
27
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (for example name, gender,
age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder.
Active Drive Assist Driver Facing
Camera Data (If Equipped)
If active drive assist is active in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, the system may record driver
attentiveness, based on the direction of
eyes and duration, and photographs of the
driver seat area.
Note: No data is recorded under normal
driving conditions.
SETTINGS DATA
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have the ability to store data based
on your personalized settings. The data is
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB
drive or digital music player. You can delete
some of this data and also choose whether
to share it through the services to which
you subscribe. See Enabling and
Disabling the Modem (page 565).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
The modem has a SIM. The
modem was enabled when your
vehicle was built and periodically
sends messages to stay connected to the
cell phone network, receive automatic
software updates and send vehicle-related
information to us, for example diagnostic
information. These messages could
include information that identifies your
vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
additional information, for example cell
phone network tower identification. For
additional information about our privacy
policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
refer to your local Ford website.
Note: The modem continues to send this
information unless you disable the modem
or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
data by changing the modem settings. See
Connected Vehicle (page 565).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
28
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
MOBILE DEVICE DATA
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can share your
vehicle data with mobile apps on your
device through the system. See App
Precautions (page 590).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes, for example, the vehicle
identification number of your vehicle, the
SYNC module serial number, odometer,
enabled apps, usage statistics and
debugging information. We retain it only
as long as necessary to provide the service,
to troubleshoot, for continuous
improvement and to offer you products
and services that may be of interest to you
according to your preferences and where
allowed by law.
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to
that cell phone. The cell phone profile
enables more mobile features and efficient
operation. The profile contains, for
example data from your phonebook, read
and unread text messages and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index
of supported media content. The system
also records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you use the
master reset function to erase the stored
information. See Connecting Your
Phone (page 585).
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our
privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has
connectivity technology, visit
www.FordConnected.com.
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
DATA (IF EQUIPPED)
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
or updates to the emergency call system
may also be capable of electronically or
verbally disclosing to emergency services
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
emergency services operators to provide
the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
29
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
STEERING WHEEL
E310594
A B
CF
DE
See Switching Lane Centering On and Off (page 323).A
See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 151).B
See Selecting a Radio Station (page 572).C
See Making and Receiving a Phone Call (page 586).D
See What is Voice Interaction (page 583).E
See Adjusting the Volume (page 570).F
30
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E328453
A
B
C E F
D
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 146). See Instrument Cluster
Overview (page 145). See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 144).
A
See Switching Traction Control On and Off (page 284).B
See Switching the 360 Degree Camera On and Off (page 307).C
See Switching Active Park Assist On and Off (page 309).D
See Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Off (page 438).E
See Switching Snowplow Mode On and Off (page 434).F
See Feature Bar (page 582).G
See Opening the Glove Compartment (page 205).H
See What Is the Power Outlet (page 199).I
See Identifying the Climate Control Unit (page 158). See Identifying the
Climate Control Unit (page 163).
J
See Identifying the Audio Unit (page 580).K
31
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 262).L
See Using the Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (page 405).M
VEHICLE INTERIOR
E320265
A B
CD
See Shifting Using the Buttons on the Selector Lever (page 254).A
See Using the Center Console Work Surface (page 200). See Using the
Center Console Work Surface (page 201).
B
See Folding the Seats (page 176).C
See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 167).D
32
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR
E320690
A B C
DE
F
See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 305).A
See What Is the Lane Keeping System (page 333).B
See Folding the Exterior Mirrors (page 140).C
See Deploying and Stowing the Power Running Boards (page 116).D
See Exterior Lighting Control (page 124).E
See Accessing the Front Towing Point (page 440).F
33
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR
E320171
A
B C
D
E
FG
See Locating the Power Outlet (page 190).A
See Tailgate Work Surface (page 101).B
See Accessing the Tailgate Step (page 98).C
See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 305).D
See Locating the Blind Spot Information System Sensors (page 341).E
See Locating the Rear Parking Aid Sensors (page 298).F
See Connecting a Trailer (page 372).G
34
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
CHILD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on
probable child height, age and weight
thresholds, or on the minimum
requirements of the law. We recommend
that you check with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly
install the child restraint in your vehicle
and that you consult your pediatrician to
make sure you have a child restraint
appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
area. Failure to properly restrain children
in child restraints made especially for
their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint
device is appropriate for your child's size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions and
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the instructions
and warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
35
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
When installing a child restraint with
seatbelts:
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child
restraint.
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the buckle.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the child
restraint, with the tongue between the
child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode.
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR
POINTS
What Are the Child Restraint
Anchor Points
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren)
Anchor points allow you to quickly and
safely install a child restraint.
Locating the Child Restraint Lower
Anchor Points (If Equipped)
Crew Cab
E308373
Super Cab
36
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E308385
E312604
The lower child restraint anchors are at the
rear section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat backrest.
Note: Regular Cab vehicles do not have
lower anchors.
Locating the Child Restraint Top
Tether Anchor Points
Regular Cab
E308389
Crew Cab
E308390
Super Cab
37
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E308396
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Restraint Position
Information
Install the child restraint tightly against the
vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint.
Rear Facing Child Restraints
Seatbelt Only
LATCH (Lower Anchors
Only)
Combined Weight of Child
and Child Restraint
XXUp to 65 lb (29 kg)
XOver 65 lb (29 kg)
Forward Facing Child Restraints
Seatbelt and LATCH
(Lower Anchors and
Top Tether Anchor)
Seatbelt and Top
Tether Anchor
LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Top
Tether Anchor)
Combined Weight of
Child and Child
Restraint
XXXUp to 65 lb (29 kg)
XXOver 65 lb (29 kg)
38
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Child Restraints Recommendation
Recommended Restraint TypeChild Size, Height, Weight, or Age
Use a child restraint (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
age four or younger).
Use a belt-positioning booster
seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly
fit in a child restraint (generally children who are
less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age
four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the
lap belt snug and low across the
hips, shoulder belt centered across
the shoulder and chest, and seat
backrest upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly
fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally chil-
dren who are at least 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater
than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
You are required by law to properly use
child restraints for infants and toddlers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster seats
until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your
local and state or provincial laws for
specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
When possible, properly restrain children
12 years of age and under in a rear seating
position of your vehicle. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in a front seating position.
When installing a rear facing child restraint,
adjust the vehicle seats to avoid
interference between the child restraint
and the vehicle seat in front of the child
restraint.
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Using Seatbelts
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
Note: The following does not apply to the
front center position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab vehicles.
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
39
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Perform the following steps when
installing a child restraint with seatbelts.
1. Position the child restraint in a seat
with a seatbelt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you did not
twist the belt webbing.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for that seating position until
the latch engages. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling
on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the seatbelt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This mode is also available on the
center seat of a Regular Cab. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The seatbelt clicks as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
40
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
7. Pull the seatbelt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle helps to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Seatbelts
WARNING: Always use both the
lap and shoulder portion of the seatbelt
in the center seating position.
Note: The following applies to the front
center position of Super Cab and Crew Cab
vehicles.
The seatbelt webbing below the tongue is
the lap portion of the seatbelt. The
webbing above the tongue is the shoulder
belt portion of the seatbelt.
1. Position the child restraint in the front
center seat.
41
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E162708
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142530
3. While holding both shoulder and lap
portions next to the tongue, route the
tongue and webbing through the child
restraint according to the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions. Make sure
you did not twist the belt webbing.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for that seating position until
the latch engages. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling
on it.
E142533
5. When pushing down with your knee on
the child restraint, pull up on the
shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap
belt portion of the seatbelt.
6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and
remove any slack in the belt to securely
tighten the child restraint in the vehicle.
7. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142534
42
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
8. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
The Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system has three
vehicle anchor points:
• Two lower anchors where the vehicle
seat backrest and seat cushion meet,
called the seat bight.
• One top tether anchor behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments. These attachments connect
to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to
attach the child restraint.
However, you can still use the seatbelt to
attach the child restraint if the lower
anchors are not used. For forward-facing
child restraints, you must also attach the
top tether strap to the proper top tether
anchor if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child restraint.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter
on attaching child restraints with tether
straps.
Installing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat
WARNING: The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 25.7 in
(652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center.
43
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
You cannot install a child restraint with
rigid LATCH attachments at the center
seating position. You can only use LATCH
compatible child restraints with
attachments on belt webbing at this
seating position provided that the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower
anchor if another child restraint is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm).
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
Combining the Seatbelt and Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child
Restraints
When used in combination, you may attach
either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower
anchors first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap
afterward, if it is included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child restraints
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child restraint and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in the vehicle.
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor. The tether strap
may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether
anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap just snug without lifting the front of
the child restraint. Keeping the child
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Once you have installed the child restraint
using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors
of the LATCH system, or both, you can
attach the top tether strap.
Attaching the Front Seat Tether
Strap
Regular Cab
E175295
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the back of the seat and under the
head restraint.
44
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts. Otherwise, route the tether
strap over the top of the seat backrest.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position. You may
need to pull the seat backrest forward
to access the tether anchors. Make sure
the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child restraint.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If you incorrectly clip the tether strap, the
child restraint may not be retained properly
in the event of a crash.
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
Attaching the Rear Seat Tether
Strap (If Equipped)
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E309318
There are three loops of webbing above
the back of the rear seat. Use these loops
as routing loops and anchor loops for up
to three child restraint tether straps.
For example, you can use the center loop
as a routing loop for a child restraint in the
center rear seat and as an anchoring loop
for child restraints installed in the
outermost rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if
the tether strap is hooked to the loop
directly behind the child restraint.
To provide a tight tether strap:
E309384
1. Route the vehicle tether loop between
the head restraint posts, then route the
child restraint tether strap through the
loop, forward of the head restraint.
2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether
anchor loop in the adjacent seating
position. If using the driver side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt for
the center seat. Put the tether strap
through the routing loop. The head
restraint support post holds the child
restraint tightly, but the head restraint
post is not strong enough to hold the
child restraint during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
45
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint and meet
the following criteria.
• Generally children who are less than
57 in (1.45 m) tall.
• Are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12).
• Are between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg).
Many state and provincial laws require that
children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer yes to all of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head,
as measured at the tops of the ears, above
the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating
position with a higher seat backrest or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high-back booster seat.
46
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E70710
• High-back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high-back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder.
The following drawings compare the ideal
fit to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close
to the neck and a shoulder belt that could
slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
E142596
E142597
47
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not use any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check
with the booster seat manufacturer's
instructions.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You cannot open the
rear doors from inside if you have put the
child safety locks on.
E238364
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of
each rear door. You must switch the child
safety lock separately on each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to switch the child
lock on and counterclockwise to switch it
off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key counterclockwise to switch
the child lock on and clockwise to switch
it off.
48
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
SEATBELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always
be properly restrained.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and
one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
belt under the arm. Never use a single
seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats
may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: If your vehicle is
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
seatbelts. All occupants of the vehicle
should properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• A shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, except driver seatbelt.
• Height adjusters at the front outermost
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
outermost and rear outermost seating
positions.
49
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
E71880
A seatbelt warning light and
chime.
E67017
Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. In side
crashes and rollovers, the pretensioners
will be activated when the Safety Canopy
is activated.
FASTENING AND
UNFASTENING THE
SEATBELTS
This applies to all seating positions, except
for the front center position of Super Cab
and Crew Cab.
E142587
1. Insert the seatbelt tongue into the
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch.
E142588
2. Press the button to release the
seatbelt.
Using the Seatbelt With Cinch
Tongue
This applies to the front center seating
position of Super Cab and Crew Cab.
The cinch tongue slides up and down the
seatbelt webbing when you stow the
seatbelt or when you put the seatbelts on.
When you buckle the seatbelt, the cinch
tongue allows you to shorten the lap
portion, but pinches the webbing to keep
the lap portion from getting longer. The
cinch tongue is designed to slip during a
crash, so wear the shoulder belt properly
and do not allow any slack in either the lap
or shoulder portions.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
1. Pull the seatbelt from the retractor so
that the shoulder belt portion of the
seatbelt crosses your shoulder and
chest.
2. Make sure the belt is not twisted. If the
belt is twisted, remove the twist.
50
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for your seating position until
you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the
seatbelt with a cinch tongue adjusts to
your movement. However, if you brake
hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives
an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
seatbelt locks and helps reduce your
forward movement.
SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE
What is Sensitive Locking Mode
Sensitive locking mode is a seatbelt
retractor feature that allows shoulder belt
length adjustment according to your
movements and locking in response to
vehicle movement.
How Does Sensitive Locking Mode
Work
If the driver suddenly brakes, turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact
of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the seatbelt retractor locks if
you pull the seatbelt webbing out too
quickly. If the retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract.
If the retractor does not unlock, pull the
seatbelt out slowly then feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position.
For rear seatbelts, recline the rear seat
backrest or push the seat backrest cushion
away from the seatbelt. Feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position.
AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE
What Is Automatic Locking Mode
This feature keeps the seatbelts
pre-locked. The belt still retracts to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt.
When to Use Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time you install a child
restraint in a front seating position in a
Regular Cab, Super Cab, Crew Cab or any
rear seating position of a Super Cab or
Crew Cab. The optional front seat center
seatbelt in the Super Cab and Crew Cab
has a cinch mechanism. Properly restrain
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seat whenever possible. See Child Safety
(page 35).
Note: Automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
Engaging Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
51
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
1. Fasten the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
Disengaging Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive locking mode.
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELTS
DURING PREGNANCY
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELT
HEIGHT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly
could reduce its effectiveness and
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E145664
1. Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
52
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELT
LENGTH
E162708
1. Pull some seatbelt webbing out of the
shoulder belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below the
tongue, grasp the metal tip of the
tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue up.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
SEATBELT REMINDER
How Does the Seatbelt Reminder
Work
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the seatbelt warning lamp
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system
switching on the Belt-Minder feature for
objects you place on the front passenger
seat, only the front seat passengers receive
warnings as determined by the front
passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to switch on.
53
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
ThenIf
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your seatbelts before you switch the igni-
tion on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after
you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and an
indicator tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6.0 mph (9.7 km/h) and
1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the
ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and an
indicator tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
The seatbelt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least
6.0 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
54
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Reminder Indicators
A warning lamp illuminates if the ignition
is on, a front seat is occupied and the
seatbelt has not been fastened.
E71880
The warning lamp illuminates
until you fasten your seatbelt.
Seatbelt Reminder Audible
Warnings
A warning tone sounds if the warning lamp
illuminates and your vehicle exceeds a
relatively low speed.
The warning tone sounds for up to five
minutes or until you fasten your seatbelt.
Switching the Seatbelt Reminder
On and Off
WARNING: While the system
allows you to deactivate it, this system
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others
who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch off independently. When
you perform this procedure for one seating
position, do not buckle the other position as
this cancels the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the seatbelt reminder. Also, if the
seatbelt reminder has been previously
disabled, it will be re-enabled during the use
of MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 78).
Read Steps 1 - 4 before proceeding with
the programming procedure.
Make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger
seatbelts are unfastened.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait about one minute until the
seatbelt warning light switches off.
After Step 2, wait an additional five
seconds before proceeding with Step
3. Once you start Step 3, you must
complete the procedure within 30
seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
seatbelt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light
switches on.
4. When the seatbelt warning light is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
This switches the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
This switches the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHECKING THE SEATBELTS
Check the seatbelts and child restraints
periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary.
Check all of the following seatbelt
assemblies after a crash.
• Retractors.
• Buckles.
• Front seatbelt buckle assemblies.
55
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
• Shoulder belt height adjusters.
• Shoulder belt guide on seat backrest.
• Child restraint LATCH and tether
anchors.
• Attaching hardware.
Read the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for additional inspection and
maintenance information specific to the
child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
checked and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning
Seatbelts (page 490).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into
the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
model year and seating position. The use
of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position
may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits
across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
extensions made by the original equipment
seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
56
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
WHAT IS THE PERSONAL
SAFETY SYSTEM
Personal Safety System
An advanced safety system that protects
occupants in frontal crashes.
HOW DOES THE PERSONAL
SAFETY SYSTEM WORK
This system provides an improved level of
frontal crash protection to front seat
occupants and is designed to reduce the
risk of airbag-related injuries. The system
analyzes occupant conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate
safety devices. During a crash, the
restraints control module may deploy the
seatbelt pretensioners, and one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbags based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, front
passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
57
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Personal Safety System™
HOW DO THE FRONT AIRBAGS
WORK
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
65).
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
Contact with a deploying airbag may cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing
loss is also a possibility as a result of the
noise associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
HOW DO THE SIDE AIRBAGS
WORK
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Accessory seat covers
not released by Ford could prevent the
deployment of the airbags and increase
the risk of injuries in a crash.
58
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of the seat backrests of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes or rollovers, the
airbags will be inflated. The airbag was
designed to inflate between the door panel
and occupant to further enhance the
protection provided to occupants in side
impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
65).
HOW DO THE KNEE AIRBAGS
WORK
Driver and passenger knee airbags are
under or within the instrument panel.
During a crash, the restraints control
module may activate the driver and
passenger knee airbags (individually or
both) based on crash severity and
respective occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
driver and passenger knee airbags may
deploy (individually or both) but the
corresponding front airbag may not
activate. It is important to be properly
seated and restrained to reduce the risk of
death or serious injury.
E67017
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 65).
HOW DOES THE SAFETY
CANOPY™ WORK
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
headliner at the siderail that may come
into contact with a deploying curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could
injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
59
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy inflates
between the side window area and
occupants to further enhance protection
provided in side impact crashes and
rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 65).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
AIRBAG PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag
module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
60
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
PROPERLY ADJUSTING THE
DRIVER AND FRONT
PASSENGER SEATS
WARNING: National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two
degrees from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat backrest, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.
CHILDREN AND AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
61
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a vehicle
without rear seats, properly restrain the
child in the center front seat unless doing
so would interfere with driving your vehicle.
This provides lap and shoulder belt
protection for all occupants, and airbag
protection for the adults. A child or infant
properly restrained in the center front seat
should not incur risk of serious injury from
the airbags.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
What Is the Front Passenger
Sensing System
This system detects a properly seated
occupant and determines if the front
passenger airbag should be enabled.
How Does the Front Passenger
Sensing System Work
The system uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which illuminates indicating that
the front passenger frontal airbag is either
enabled or disabled.
Note: When you first switch the ignition on,
the passenger airbag status indicator off
and on lamps illuminate for a short period
to confirm they are functional.
E181984
The indicator lamps are in the overhead
console.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable the front passenger
frontal airbag under these conditions:
• The front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
• A passenger takes their weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
system.
Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
62
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
status indicator illuminates the off
lamp.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the on lamp,
switch your vehicle off, remove the
child restraint from your vehicle and
reinstall the restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
status indicator illuminates the on
lamp.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
status indicator off lamp is illuminated, it
is possible that the person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch your vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat backrest in an
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart your vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This allows the system
to detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator off lamp remains
illuminated even after this, you should
advise the person to ride in the rear
seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit upright,
leaning against the seat backrest, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The listed conditions could cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat could appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
listed.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 65).
If the airbag readiness light is on, do the
following:
63
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Switch your vehicle off.
• Check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction if found.
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster remains illuminated,
there may be a problem due to the
front passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle in for service
immediately.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact your
Customer Relationship Center. See
Contacting Us (page 19).
Front Passenger Sensing System
Precautions
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Front Passenger Sensing System Indicators
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: IlluminatedEmpty
ON: Not Illuminated
DisabledOFF: IlluminatedChild
ON: Not Illuminated
EnabledOFF: Not IlluminatedAdult
ON: Illuminated
64
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors. These sensors provide
information to the restraints control
module which activates the following:
• Front seatbelt pretensioners.
• Driver airbag.
• Passenger airbag.
• Knee airbag(s).
• Seat mounted side airbags.
• Safety Canopy.
Based on the type of crash, the restraints
control module deploys the appropriate
safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or
stays on.
• You hear a series of five tones. The
tone pattern repeats periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced immediately.
Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a crash.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, seatbelt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The front airbags activate only in
frontal and near-frontal crashes. Front
airbags may activate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts if the crash
causes sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The seatbelt pretensioners activate in
frontal, near-frontal and side crashes,
and in rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) deploy based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
• The side airbags inflate in certain side
impact crashes or rollover events. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The Safety Canopy inflates in certain
side impact crashes or rollover events.
The Safety Canopy may activate in
other types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood
of rollover.
65
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
DISPOSING OF AIRBAGS
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
66
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
WHAT IS THE PEDESTRIAN
ALERT SYSTEM
Due to the quiet operation of hybrid and
electric vehicles at low speeds, the system
creates a subtle sound to alert pedestrians.
The system is on when your vehicle is
running and not in park (P). Some sound
may be audible in the passenger
compartment.
67
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pedestrian Alert System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST
911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that
can call for help.
For more information, visit
www.owner.ford.com .
HOW DOES 911 ASSIST WORK
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off. If a
connected cell phone sustains damage or
loses its connection to SYNC during a
crash, SYNC will search for and try to
connect to a previously paired cell phone.
SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides about 10 seconds to
cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the
call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
makes a successful call a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator. The
occupants in your vehicle are able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately because not all 911 systems
are capable of receiving this information
electronically.
During an emergency call the system
transmits vehicle data to the emergency
service.
EMERGENCY CALL
REQUIREMENTS
WARNING: Do not wait for 911
Assist to make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
five seconds of the crash, the system or
phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your
phone in a secure location in your vehicle
so it does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the
system will not dial for help which could
delay response time, potentially
increasing the risk of serious injury or
death after a crash.
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
68
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
911 Assist (If Equipped)
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is off and the phone is connected
to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
EMERGENCY CALL
LIMITATIONS
The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates
in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
911 is the emergency number. The following
are limitations of this feature:
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
69
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
911 Assist (If Equipped)
REMOTE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Make sure a valid remote control is within
5 ft (1.5 m) from the front door handles
and rear of vehicle.
The system may not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary
for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no
charge.
• There is interference causing issues
with the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to
metal objects or electronic devices, for
example keys or a cell phone.
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
Use your remote control to access various
vehicle systems.
Note: The buttons on your remote may vary
depending on the vehicle region or options.
Unlock
E138629
Press the button to unlock all
doors. See Unlocking and
Locking the Doors Using the
Remote Control (page 84).
Lock
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. See Unlocking and
Locking the Doors Using the
Remote Control (page 84).
Remote Start (If Equipped)
E138625
Press the button to remote start.
See Remotely Starting and
Stopping the Vehicle (page
155).
Tailgate (If Equipped)
E191530
Press the button to open the
tailgate. See Opening the
Tailgate Using the Remote
Control (page 104).
Panic Alarm (If Equipped)
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. See Sounding the
Panic Alarm (page 71).
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
FLIP KEY
Opening Your Flip Key
Press the round button on the remote
control to extend the flip key.
70
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E191532
Note: Inspect the key blade for debris.
Periodically clean with a brush.
Closing Your Flip Key
Press and hold the round button on the
remote control to fold the key blade when
not in use.
E191532
REMOVING THE KEY BLADE
E322866
Push the release button on your passive
key and pull the key blade out.
SOUNDING THE PANIC ALARM
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again, or switch the ignition on
to turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
LOCATING YOUR VEHICLE
E138623
Press the lock button twice
within three seconds. The turn
signal lamps flash.
Note: We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle.
71
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH
BUTTON START
WARNING: Keep batteries away
from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The remote control uses one coin-type
3-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E322866
1. Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
72
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E218402
3. Insert a screwdriver, and carefully
remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.
E107998
Dispose of old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local
authority about recycling old batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
remote control should operate normally.
CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY -
VEHICLES WITH: FLIP KEY
WARNING: Keep batteries away
from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Battery Replacement Procedure
The remote control uses one coin-type
3-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E191533
1. Insert a screwdriver, in the position
shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
73
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E151800
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
E107998
Dispose of old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local
authority about recycling old batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
remote control should operate normally.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
74
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
PUSH BUTTON START
General Information
You must have two previously
programmed remote controls inside your
vehicle and the new unprogrammed
remote controls readily accessible. Contact
an authorized dealer to have the spare
remote control programmed if two
previously programmed remotes are not
available. Make sure that your vehicle is
off before beginning this procedure. Make
sure that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Perform all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you perform
any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
Note: You can program a maximum of four
remote controls to your vehicle.
Note: If your programmed remote controls
are lost or stolen and you do not have an
extra coded remote, you need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Store
an extra programmed remote away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconvenience. Contact an authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement remotes.
Steps for Programming Your Spare
Remote Control
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with one of
the following center consoles.
Programming Backup Location
E312216
E269950
1. Place the first programmed remote in
the backup slot inside the center
console with your foot off the brake
pedal, press and release the push
button ignition switch.
2. Wait five seconds and then press and
release the push button ignition switch
again.
3. Remove the remote control.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed remote control in the
backup slot. Press and release the
push button ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press and
release the push button ignition switch
again. Keep the ignition on for at least
three seconds, but no more than 10
seconds.
6. Remove the remote control.
75
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
7. Place the unprogrammed remote
control in the backup slot and press
and release the push button ignition
switch.
Programming is now complete. With your
foot on the brake pedal, press the push
button ignition switch to verify the remote
control functions operate and your vehicle
starts with the new remote control.
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
FLIP KEY
General Information
You can program your own remote control
to your vehicle. This procedure programs
both the engine immobilizer keycode and
the remote entry portion of the remote
control to your vehicle.
Only use remote controls with an
integrated mechanical key.
You must have two previously
programmed coded remote controls and
the new un–programmed remote readily
accessible. Contact an authorized dealer
to have the spare remote control
programmed if the two previously
programmed coded remote controls are
not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
Steps for Programming Your Spare
Remote Control
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
un–programmed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds
until you hear the door locks cycle.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
The key starts the engine if programming
is successful. You can operate the keyless
remote entry system with the new remote
control with integrated key.
If programming was not successful, wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: You can program a maximum of six
coded remote controls to your vehicle.
76
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – TROUBLESHOOTING
Keys and Remote Controls – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Replace remote control battery.Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
77
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
WHAT IS MYKEY
MyKey
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits.
MYKEY SETTINGS
Non-Configurable MyKey Settings
Seatbelt Reminder or Belt-
Minder™
MyKey mutes the audio system until the
front seat passengers buckle the front seat
belts.
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
radio or a very basic audio system, then the
radio may not mute.
Satellite Radio (If Equipped)
Some Satellite radio channels have
restricted access to adult radio content.
Early Low Fuel
The low fuel level warning lamp turns on
earlier.
Driving and Parking Aids
You cannot configure settings for parking
aids, blind spot information system, and
cross traffic alert. These systems turn on
when the vehicle turns on, and you cannot
switch them off with a MyKey.
You cannot configure settings for
pre-collision assist and lane keeping. These
systems turn on when the vehicle turns on,
but you can switch them off with a MyKey.
A new destination in the navigation system
can only be set using voice commands
when using a MyKey, and with your vehicle
moving.
Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch
the lane departure warning feature off, but
this feature turns back on automatically
with every new key cycle.
Configurable MyKey Settings
You can configure the following settings
after creating a MyKey. See Creating a
MyKey (page 80).
Speed Limit
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a
safe speed considering posted speed
limits and prevailing road conditions. The
driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
You can set a speed limit for your vehicle.
Warning messages appear in the
information display and a tone sounds if
your vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed when using
a MyKey.
Speed Minder
You can set a speed reminder for your
vehicle. Warning messages appear in the
information display and a tone sounds if
your vehicle exceeds the set speed.
Audio System Volume Limit
The audio system maximum volume is
reduced. A message appears in the
information display if you attempt to
exceed the volume limit. Automatic
volume control turns off.
78
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
Emergency Assistance
If you set emergency assistance to always
on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
Do Not Disturb
If you set do not disturb to always on, you
cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
Note: If a phone is connected using Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto while driving with
a MyKey, the driver can receive phone calls
and text messages even if the do not disturb
restriction is on, and if the vehicle is
equipped with satellite radio, the adult
content is not restricted.
Traction Control
If you set traction control to always on, you
cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
CREATING A MYKEY -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH
BUTTON START
Vehicles with a center console shifter:
E312216
1. Remove the mat from the center
console cup holder.
2. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
3. Place the remote control in the backup
slot with the buttons facing toward the
front of the vehicle.
4. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
5. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
6. Press Vehicle Settings.
7. Press MyKey.
8. Press Create MyKey.
9. Press Yes.
Note: After you confirm the creation of a
MyKey, we recommend that you label this
key.
Vehicles with a column shifter.
E269950
1. Raise the front center seat storage lid.
2. Place the remote control in the backup
slot with the buttons facing toward the
front of the vehicle.
3. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
4. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
5. Press Vehicle Settings.
6. Press MyKey.
7. Press Create MyKey.
8. Press Yes.
Note: After you confirm the creation of a
MyKey, we recommend that you label this
key.
79
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
CREATING A MYKEY -
VEHICLES WITH: FLIP KEY
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Press Create MyKey.
6. Press Yes.
Note: After you confirm the creation of a
MyKey, we recommend that you label this
key.
PROGRAMMING A MYKEY
You can program any remote control to
become a restricted MyKey, but you must
leave one unmodified as an admin key.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Select a setting and press the OK
button.
6. Configure the setting
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear all MyKeys, you remove all
restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Press Clear All MyKeys.
6. Press Yes.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about the
distance traveled using a MyKey, and the
number of admin keys and MyKeys created
for your vehicle.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Press MyKey Information.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS (IF EQUIPPED)
MyKey is not compatible with unapproved,
aftermarket remote start systems. If you
choose to install a remote start system,
see an authorized dealer for an approved
remote start system.
80
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
MyKey – Information Messages - Vehicles With: Push Button Start
DescriptionMessage
Displays when trying to create a MyKey and the admin key is
not placed in the backup position. See Creating a MyKey
(page 79).
Place Key in Backup
Location
Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already
designated as a MyKey.
Key is Already a MyKey
Displays to confirm that the key is restricted after you switch
the ignition off.
This Key restricted at
Next Key Cycle. Label
Key as MyKey
81
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
MyKey – Information Messages - Vehicles With: Flip Key
DescriptionMessage
Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already
designated as a MyKey.
Key is Already a MyKey
Displays to confirm that the key is restricted after you switch
the ignition off.
This Key restricted at
Next Key Cycle. Label
Key as MyKey
82
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
MyKey – Frequently Asked
Questions - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
What is an admin key?
An admin key is a key that you have
not created as a MyKey. See Creating
a MyKey (page 79).
Why am I not able to create a MyKey?
You have not placed the admin key in
the backup position. See Creating a
MyKey (page 79). The key used to
switch the ignition on is not an admin
key. The key used to switch the ignition
on is the only admin key. There has to
be at least one admin key. You did not
switch the ignition off after creating
the last MyKey.
Why am I not able to program a MyKey?
The admin key is not inside your
vehicle. The key used to switch the
ignition on is not an admin key. You
have not created any MyKeys. See
Creating a MyKey (page 79).
Why am I not able to clear the MyKeys?
The admin key is not inside your
vehicle. The key used to switch the
ignition on is not an admin key. You
have not created any MyKeys. See
Creating a MyKey (page 79).
Why is the MyKey distance not
accumulating?
The key used to start the engine is an
admin key. An admin key and a MyKey
are inside your vehicle. You have not
created any MyKeys. See Creating a
MyKey (page 79). You have cleared
the MyKeys. See Clearing All
MyKeys (page 80).
Why am I not able to start the engine
with a MyKey?
An admin key and a MyKey are inside
your vehicle. The system recognizes
only the admin key when both are
present.
MyKey – Frequently Asked
Questions - Vehicles With: Flip Key
What is an admin key?
An admin key is a key that you have
not created as a MyKey. See Creating
a MyKey (page 80).
Why am I not able to create a MyKey?
The key used to switch the ignition on
is not an admin key. The key used to
switch the ignition on is the only admin
key. There has to be at least one admin
key.
Why am I not able to program a MyKey?
The key used to switch the ignition on
is not an admin key. You have not
created any MyKeys. See Creating a
MyKey (page 80).
Why am I not able to clear the MyKeys?
The key used to switch the ignition on
is not an admin key. You have not
created any MyKeys. See Creating a
MyKey (page 80).
Why is the MyKey distance not
accumulating?
The key used to start the engine is an
admin key. You have not created any
MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey
(page 80). You have cleared the
MyKeys. See Clearing All MyKeys
(page 80).
83
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
OPERATING THE DOORS
FROM OUTSIDE YOUR
VEHICLE
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Using the Remote Control (If Equipped)
You can only use the remote control when
your vehicle is stationary.
Unlocking the Doors
E267112
Press the button to unlock all
doors.
Locking the Doors
E267111
Press the button to lock all
doors. One short flash of the
turn signal lamps confirms that
your vehicle has locked.
Note: For more information on operating
the doors from outside your vehicle
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Using the Key Blade
If there is a power door lock fault you can
use the key blade to lock and unlock the
doors.
E333745
Lock.A
Unlock.B
OPERATING THE DOORS
FROM INSIDE YOUR VEHICLE
Individually Unlocking and Locking
the Doors Using the Locking
Button
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
84
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Opening the Doors From Inside
Your Vehicle - Crew Cab
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
AUTOUNLOCK (If Equipped)
What Is Autounlock
Autounlock is an unlocking feature that
unlocks the vehicle doors when your
vehicle comes to a stop.
Autounlock Requirements
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle is moving at a
speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to the accessory position.
Switching Autounlock On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Switch Autounlock on or off.
AUTOLOCK (If Equipped)
What Is Autolock
Autolock is a locking feature that locks
your vehicle doors when you start driving.
Autolock Requirements
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Switching Autolock On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Switch Autolock on or off.
MISLOCK (If Equipped)
What Is Mislock
Mislock is a locking feature that warns you
if your vehicle has not locked.
Mislock Limitations
When you press the lock button once, the
direction indicators do not flash if:
• Any door or the tailgate is open.
• The hood is open.
If you switch mislock off, the horn does not
sound if you press the lock button on the
remote control when a door is open.
Switching Mislock On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Switch Mislock Chirp on or off.
85
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
Door Ajar Audible Warning
Sounds when a door is not fully closed and
your vehicle is moving.
DOORS AND LOCKS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
E249859
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and remains on if
any door or the hood is open.
Doors and Locks – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays if a door is open. Fully close the door.Driver Door Ajar
Passenger Door Ajar
Rear Left Door Ajar
Rear Right Door Ajar
86
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
LOCATING THE KEYLESS
ENTRY KEYPAD (IF EQUIPPED)
The keypad is near the driver window and
illuminates when you touch it.
E190936
KEYLESS ENTRY LIMITATIONS
Make sure your remote control is within 3 ft
(1 m) from the front door handles and the
tailgate.
The system could not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary
for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no
charge.
• There is interference causing issues
with the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to
metal objects or electronic devices, for
example keys or a cell phone.
MASTER ACCESS CODE (If
Equipped)
What Is the Master Access Code
The master access code is a factory-set
five-digit entry code. You can operate the
keypad with the master access code at
any time. The master access code is on the
owner’s wallet card in the glove box and
is available from an authorized dealer.
KEYLESS ENTRY SETTINGS
Switching Keyless Entry On and
Off
1. Switch the ignition on using an original
key that has not been created as a
MyKey.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press Locks.
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function
You can enable two-stage unlocking
function allowing you to unlock only the
driver door when you touch the unlock
sensor.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking.
If you program the unlocking function so
that only the driver door unlocks, you can
unlock all of the other doors from inside
your vehicle using the power door lock
control. You can unlock individual doors
by pulling the interior door handles on
those doors.
87
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
Creating Personal Access Codes
To create your own personal access code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code one.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal access
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Clearing All Personal Access
Codes
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for a few seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
THE DOORS USING REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY
Unlocking the Doors
E333747
With your passive key within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on
the back of the door handle for a brief
period and then pull on the door handle to
unlock, being careful not to touch the lock
sensor at the same time or pull on the door
handle too quickly. The intelligent access
system requires a brief delay to
authenticate your intelligent access key.
Locking the Doors
E333746
With your passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of
your vehicle, touch the outer door handle
lock sensor for approximately one second
to lock, being careful to not touch the
unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
88
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
THE DOORS USING KEYLESS
ENTRY KEYPAD
Unlocking the Doors
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
• Press 3-4 within five seconds to unlock
all doors.
• Press 5-6 within five seconds to release
or open the tailgate, if available.
Locking the Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed.
Note: You do not need to enter the five digit
code first.
KEYLESS ENTRY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Keyless Entry – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why does the keypad not accept the
access code?
If you enter the access code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function
may not work. Slowly re-enter the
access code.
Why does the passive key not work?
The system deactivates passive keys
left inside your vehicle when you lock
it. You cannot switch the ignition on
using a deactivated passive key. Press
the unlock button on the remote
control to reactivate a passive key.
Why does the keypad not function?
The keypad goes into an anti-scan
mode if you enter a wrong code seven
times. The anti-scan mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the red
light flashes.
89
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
HOW DOES EASY ENTRY AND
EXIT WORK
Easy entry and exit moves the driver seat
rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) and the steering
column up when you switch the ignition
off. The driver seat and steering column
return to their previous positions when you
switch the ignition on.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.
SWITCHING EASY ENTRY AND
EXIT ON AND OFF
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Select Easy Entry/Exit.
If you press any adjustment or memory
button when in easy exit mode, the system
cancels the operation.
90
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Easy Entry and Exit (If Equipped)
OPENING THE TAILGATE
Opening the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
E333071
Pull up on the handle to release the
tailgate.
Note: You may need to unlock the tailgate
first.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
THE TAILGATE
E332901
Lock.A
Unlock.B
1. Insert the ignition key into the tailgate
lock.
2. Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate.
3. Turn it to the right to unlock the
tailgate.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING
THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure
cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does
not have power door locks.
E189556
1. Unlatch the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the power door locks in-line
connector. It is under the pickup box
on the right-hand side of the vehicle
near the spare tire.
3. Install a protective cap on the in-line
connector portion that remains under
the pickup box.
Note: A protective cap should be in the
glove compartment.
91
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and
the bumper and place it out of the way
under the pickup box.
5. Lower the tailgate.
E311529
6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
7. Disconnect the other cable.
Note: To avoid damaging the tailgate, you
may need assistance when removing. The
tailgate weighs approximately 97 lb (44 kg).
8. Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from the
horizontal position.
9. Lift the right-hand side off its hinge.
10. Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from
the horizontal position.
11. Remove the tailgate from the
left-hand side hinge by sliding it to
the right.
12. Install the tailgate in reverse order.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Accessing the Tailgate Step
Integrated Tailgate Step
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step pops out
slightly.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. To lock the handle in place, rotate the
handle up from the horizontal to the
vertical position until you hear a click.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears as worn or
damaged.
92
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
• Make sure you use the grab handle
when climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load below the total
maximum load of 350 lb (159 kg).
Stowing the Tailgate Step
1. Press the yellow button on the handle
to lower and then press the yellow
lever at the bottom of the handle to
unlock. Rotate the handle down from
the vertical to the horizontal position
and push it into the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Do not
drive with the step or grab handle open.
Note: The power tailgate cannot close if
the step is opened. A warning message
appears and a chime sounds. After stowing
step the power close function is restored.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Bed Extender Precautions
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the
tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
Using the Bed Extender
E311521
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
93
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
E311522
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
A
B
A
1 2
203
A
A
E311523
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E311524
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
E311520
5. Insert the latch rod into the tailgate
hole.
6. Engage both sides of the locking pins
into their holes in the pick-up box.
94
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
Grocery Mode
E311519
1. Follow steps 1-4.
2. Before engaging the locking pins, rotate
the panels away from the tailgate.
3. Engage both sides of the locking pins
into their holes in the pick-up box.
4. Close the tailgate.
TAILGATE WORK SURFACE (IF
EQUIPPED)
The tailgate work surface is a durable and
functional surface on the inside portion of
your tailgate you can use to perform
various tasks.
To use the tailgate work surface, fold down
the tailgate.
E308677
Tablet stand.A
Tool inset.B
Clamp pocket.C
Standard and metric ruler.D
Cup holder.E
Tailgate anchors.F
E336605
The tailgate work surface contains clamp
pockets that allows you to secure work
material.
Note: When you have finished using the
tailgate work surface, make sure you remove
all of your belongings, then close the
tailgate.
95
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
OPENING THE TAILGATE
Opening the Tailgate From Inside
Your Vehicle
The vehicle must be in park (P) to operate
the power tailgate.
E308661
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
Note: A tone sounds while the tailgate
opens.
Note: The tailgate stops and reverses if it
detects an obstruction when opening.
Note: An alert sounds if the electronic
tailgate is disabled.
Opening the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
Note: If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the tailgate
unlocks when you press the tailgate release
button.
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the
tailgate handle.
Opening the Tailgate Using the
Remote Control
E191530
Press the remote control button
twice within three seconds.
CLOSING THE TAILGATE
Closing the Tailgate From Inside
Your Vehicle
E308661
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
Note: The tailgate stops and reverses if it
detects an obstruction when closing.
Closing the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
You can close the power tailgate by:
• Pressing the tailgate button on your
remote control twice within three
seconds.
• Pressing the button on the instrument
panel.
• Pressing the button on the tailgate.
Note: The tailgate stops and reverses if it
detects an obstruction when closing.
Lift-to-Close
To close the tailgate automatically using
lift-to-close, lift the tailgate approximately
4 in (10 cm) and hold it for a few seconds.
Note: If the tailgate position is more than
halfway between open and close, it may not
close automatically.
Manual Close
You can close the tailgate manually when
you lift the tailgate in a continuous motion.
96
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
If you stop the tailgate motion, the
lift-to-close feature can engage and power
close the tailgate.
Putting the Tailgate in Manual Mode
You can put the tailgate in manual mode
through the vehicle settings in your
touchscreen.
Note: In manual mode, the tailgate only
functions by the tailgate release button and
messaging is reduced.
Closing the Tailgate Using the
Remote Control
E191530
Press the remote control button
twice within three seconds.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING
THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure
cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
E189556
1. Put the tailgate into manual mode by
accessing the vehicle settings using the
touchscreen.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Disconnect the power door locks in-line
connector. It is under the pickup box
on the right-hand side of the vehicle
near the spare tire.
4. Install a protective cap on the in-line
connector portion that remains under
the pickup box.
Note: The protective cap is in the glove
compartment.
5. Partially raise the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and
the bumper and place it out of the way
under the pickup box.
6. Fully lower the tailgate.
E310339
7. Remove the retaining screw.
97
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
E311529
8. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
9. Disconnect the other cable.
Note: To avoid damaging the tailgate, you
may need assistance when removing. The
tailgate weighs approximately 97 lb (44 kg).
10. Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from
the horizontal position.
11. Lift the right-hand side off its hinge.
12. Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from
the horizontal position.
13. Remove the tailgate from the
left-hand side hinge by sliding it to
the right.
14. Install the tailgate in reverse order.
Note: After reinstalling the tailgate it is
important to reinstall the retaining screw to
the recommended torque, 7 lb.ft (10 Nm).
Failure to install the retaining screw can
cause the tailgate to detach.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Accessing the Tailgate Step
Integrated Tailgate Step
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step pops out
slightly.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. To lock the handle in place, rotate the
handle up from the horizontal to the
vertical position until you hear a click.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears as worn or
damaged.
98
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
• Make sure you use the grab handle
when climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load below the total
maximum load of 350 lb (159 kg).
Stowing the Tailgate Step
1. Press the yellow button on the handle
to lower and then press the yellow
lever at the bottom of the handle to
unlock. Rotate the handle down from
the vertical to the horizontal position
and push it into the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Do not
drive with the step or grab handle open.
Note: The power tailgate cannot close if
the step is opened. A warning message
appears and a chime sounds. After stowing
step the power close function is restored.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Bed Extender Precautions
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the
tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
Using the Bed Extender
E311521
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
99
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
E311522
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
A
B
A
1 2
203
A
A
E311523
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E311524
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
E311520
5. Insert the latch rod into the tailgate
hole.
6. Engage both sides of the locking pins
into their holes in the pick-up box.
100
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
Grocery Mode
E311519
1. Follow steps 1-4.
2. Before engaging the locking pins, rotate
the panels away from the tailgate.
3. Engage both sides of the locking pins
into their holes in the pick-up box.
4. Close the tailgate.
TAILGATE WORK SURFACE (IF
EQUIPPED)
The tailgate work surface is a durable and
functional surface on the inside portion of
your tailgate you can use to perform
various tasks.
To use the tailgate work surface, fold down
the tailgate.
E308677
Tablet stand.A
Tool inset.B
Clamp pocket.C
Standard and metric ruler.D
Cup holder.E
Tailgate anchors.F
E336605
The tailgate work surface contains clamp
pockets that allows you to secure work
material.
Note: When you have finished using the
tailgate work surface, make sure you remove
all of your belongings, then close the
tailgate.
101
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
TAILGATE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tailgate – Warning Lamps
E311338
Illuminates when the tailgate is
not completely closed.
Tailgate – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The tailgate is not completely closed.Tailgate Ajar
Reminder to check if tailgate is closed securely. If message
persists contact an authorized dealer.
Power Tailgate System
Fault Service Now
You need to stow the tailgate step before the power tailgate
can close.
Power Tailgate Stow
Step
102
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
Tailgate – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why won't my power tailgate open?
Make sure the transmission is in park
(P), ensure nothing is obstructing the
tailgate path and or causing resistance
(tonneau cover or other aftermarket
accessory, freezing conditions or being
parked downhill). If you have
continued issues, the battery voltage
may be low or other system issues.
See an authorized dealer.
Why won't my power tailgate close?
Your vehicle speed is at or above
2.5 mph (4 km/h), the tailgate
encountered an obstacle or freezing
conditions. After removing the
obstacles, manually close the tailgate
to resume normal operation. If you
have continued issues, the battery
voltage may be low or other system
issues. See an authorized dealer.
103
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
OPENING THE TAILGATE
Opening the Tailgate From Inside
Your Vehicle
The vehicle must be in park (P) to operate
the power tailgate.
E308661
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
Note: A tone sounds while the tailgate
opens.
Opening the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
Note: If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the tailgate
unlocks when you press the tailgate release
button.
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the
tailgate handle.
Opening the Tailgate Using the
Remote Control
E191530
Press the remote control button
twice within three seconds.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING
THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure
cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does
not have power door locks.
E189556
1. Unlatch the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the power door locks in-line
connector. It is under the pickup box
on the right-hand side of the vehicle
near the spare tire.
3. Install a protective cap on the in-line
connector portion that remains under
the pickup box.
Note: A protective cap should be in the
glove compartment.
4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and
the bumper and place it out of the way
under the pickup box.
5. Lower the tailgate.
104
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
E311529
6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
7. Disconnect the other cable.
Note: To avoid damaging the tailgate, you
may need assistance when removing. The
tailgate weighs approximately 97 lb (44 kg).
8. Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from the
horizontal position.
9. Lift the right-hand side off its hinge.
10. Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from
the horizontal position.
11. Remove the tailgate from the
left-hand side hinge by sliding it to
the right.
12. Install the tailgate in reverse order.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Accessing the Tailgate Step
Integrated Tailgate Step
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step pops out
slightly.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. To lock the handle in place, rotate the
handle up from the horizontal to the
vertical position until you hear a click.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears as worn or
damaged.
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
105
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
• Make sure you use the grab handle
when climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load below the total
maximum load of 350 lb (159 kg).
Stowing the Tailgate Step
1. Press the yellow button on the handle
to lower and then press the yellow
lever at the bottom of the handle to
unlock. Rotate the handle down from
the vertical to the horizontal position
and push it into the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Do not
drive with the step or grab handle open.
Note: The power tailgate cannot close if
the step is opened. A warning message
appears and a chime sounds. After stowing
step the power close function is restored.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Bed Extender Precautions
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the
tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
Using the Bed Extender
E311521
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
106
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
E311522
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
A
B
A
1 2
203
A
A
E311523
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E311524
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
E311520
5. Insert the latch rod into the tailgate
hole.
6. Engage both sides of the locking pins
into their holes in the pick-up box.
107
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
Grocery Mode
E311519
1. Follow steps 1-4.
2. Before engaging the locking pins, rotate
the panels away from the tailgate.
3. Engage both sides of the locking pins
into their holes in the pick-up box.
4. Close the tailgate.
TAILGATE WORK SURFACE (IF
EQUIPPED)
The tailgate work surface is a durable and
functional surface on the inside portion of
your tailgate you can use to perform
various tasks.
To use the tailgate work surface, fold down
the tailgate.
E308677
Tablet stand.A
Tool inset.B
Clamp pocket.C
Standard and metric ruler.D
Cup holder.E
Tailgate anchors.F
E336605
The tailgate work surface contains clamp
pockets that allows you to secure work
material.
Note: When you have finished using the
tailgate work surface, make sure you remove
all of your belongings, then close the
tailgate.
108
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
TAILGATE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Tailgate – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Reminder to check the tailgate due to it recently being opened
from the remote control or the button on the instrument panel
while the vehicle is On and the transmission is not in park.
Check Tailgate Ajar
Reminder to check if tailgate is closed securely. If message
persists contact an authorized dealer.
Power Tailgate System
Fault Service Now
109
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
Tailgate – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why won't my tailgate open?
Make sure the transmission is in park
(P), ensure nothing is obstructing the
tailgate path and or causing resistance
(tonneau cover or other aftermarket
accessories, freezing conditions or
being parked downhill). If you have
continued issues, the battery voltage
may be low or other system issues.
See an authorized dealer.
110
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
What Is the Passive Anti-Theft
System
The passive anti-theft system prevents
someone from starting the vehicle with an
incorrectly coded key.
How Does the Passive Anti-Theft
System Work
The passive anti-theft system arms when
you switch the ignition off.
It disarms when the ignition is switched on
with a correctly coded key.
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take the keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
What Is the Anti-Theft Alarm
System
The Anti-Theft Alarm System warns you
of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
How Does the Anti-Theft Alarm
System Work
When armed, the anti-theft alarm is
triggered in any of the following ways:
• If someone opens a door, the tailgate
or the hood without a correctly coded
key or remote control.
• If you turn the power on without a
correctly coded key.
• If the interior sensors detect movement
inside your vehicle.
• If the inclination sensors detect an
attempt to raise your vehicle.
• If someone disconnects the vehicle
battery or the battery backup alarm.
• If someone disconnects the trailer. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
Any further attempts to carry out one of
the above sounds the alarm again.
If the anti-theft alarm is triggered, the
alarm horn sounds for 30 seconds and the
direction indicators flash for five minutes.
What Is the Perimeter Alarm
The perimeter alarm is designed to detect
unauthorized access to your vehicle.
What Are the Interior Sensors (If
Equipped)
The interior sensors are designed to detect
any movement inside your vehicle.
The interior sensors are in the overhead
console.
Note: Do not cover the interior sensors.
What Are the Inclination Sensors
(If Equipped)
The inclination sensor is designed to detect
an attempt to raise your vehicle, for
example to remove a wheel or to tow it
away.
What Is the Battery Backup Alarm
The battery backup alarm is an additional
alarm system that has its own battery and
horn. It is designed to detect if the vehicle
battery or the battery backup alarm is
disconnected.
111
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
Arming the Anti-Theft Alarm
System
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle.
Lock your vehicle with your remote control
to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Anti-Theft Alarm
System
Disarm the alarm by performing any of the
following actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM
SETTINGS (If Equipped)
What are the Alarm Security Levels
You can select two levels of alarm security,
all sensors and perimeter sensing.
All Sensors
All sensors is the standard setting.
In all sensors, all equipped sensors are on
when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not arm the alarm with all sensors
if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle.
Perimeter Sensing
In perimeter sensing, the interior sensors
are off when you arm the alarm.
All the other equipped sensors activate
when you arm the alarm in this mode.
Setting the Alarm Security Level
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Alarm System.
4. Press Motion Sensors.
5. Press a setting.
What Is Ask on Exit
You can choose which level of security you
require after you switch the ignition off.
Note: If you do not choose a setting, the
system defaults to all sensors.
Switching Ask on Exit On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Alarm System.
4. Switch Ask on Exit on or off.
112
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
SECURITY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Security – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The system has not detected a correctly coded key.No Key Detected
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Starting System Fault
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
ized entry.
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Alarm Announcement
113
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
Security – Frequently Asked
Questions
What should I do if there is any
potential alarm problem with my
vehicle?
Take all remote controls to an
authorized dealer if there is any
potential alarm problem with your
vehicle.
What should I do if the vehicle is unable
to start with a correctly coded key?
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
114
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
POWER RUNNING BOARD
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: In extreme climates,
excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving
before attempting to step on them. The
running boards will resume normal
function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any
object under your vehicle. Never place
your hand between the extended running
board and your vehicle. A moving running
board may cause injury.
Do not use the running boards, front and
rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Use proper jacking points.
The running boards could move slower in
cold temperatures.
POWER RUNNING BOARD
SETTINGS
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Running Boards.
3. Press a setting.
Running Boards (Modes)
Off
The power running boards remain stowed,
regardless of door position.
Auto
The power running boards deploy when
you approach your vehicle with a remote
control, unlock the door or open the door.
The power running boards stow:
• After a few seconds when you close
the doors.
• If you unlock the door but do not open
it.
• If you have switched Approach
detection on and do not open a door
before the Auto Timer setting expires.
Note: When you select this mode, an option
displays that allows you to select how long
the running boards stay deployed without
opening the door.
Out
The power running boards remain
deployed, regardless of door position.
Approach detection
When you switch Approach detection on
with Auto switched on, the running boards
deploy when you approach your vehicle
with a remote control.
POWER RUNNING BOARD
KICK SWITCH
You can use the power running board kick
switch to deploy and stow the running
board without opening or closing the door.
115
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
E334917
Press the switch with your foot to use the
power running board kick switch.
Pressing the kick switch with the power
running boards stowed switches the mode
to Out.
Pressing the kick switch with the power
running boards deployed switches the
mode to Auto.
Note: When you use the kick switch, the
power running board mode changes until
you press the kick switch again.
You can change the kick switch setting on
the touchscreen. See Power Running
Board Settings (page 115).
Kick switch
Always active
The kick switch is on regardless of whether
the doors are locked or unlocked.
Only while unlocked
The kick switch is on only with the doors
unlocked.
DEPLOYING AND STOWING
THE POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
The power running boards deploy when
you approach your vehicle with a remote
control, unlock the door or open the door.
The power running boards stow:
• After a few seconds when you close
the doors.
• If you unlock the door but do not open
it.
• If you have switched Approach
detection on and do not open a door
before the Auto Timer setting expires.
See Power Running Board Settings
(page 115).
Note: The power running boards reverse
direction and move to the end of travel if
they encounter an object when moving.
POWER RUNNING BOARDS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Power Running Boards –
Frequently Asked Questions
Why is there unwanted noise coming
from my power running boards?
The power running board mechanism
could trap debris such as mud, dirt,
snow, ice and salt. If this happens, set
the running boards to the deployed
position. Then, wash the system, in
particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash
wand.
116
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 167).
E261502
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 167).
E261582
Press the top or bottom of the control to
move the steering wheel up or down.
Press the front or rear of the control to
move the steering wheel in or out.
You can save and recall the steering wheel
position with the memory function. See
Recalling a Preset Position (page 181).
117
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
RESETTING THE STOPPING
POSITION - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Note: The steering wheel stops when it
detects an obstruction. This sets a new
stopping position.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may start to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction, as necessary.
HORN
E270945
Press on the center of the
steering wheel near the horn icon
to activate the horn.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF
To activate the heated steering
wheel, press the button on the
climate control unit.
On some vehicles, an indicator on the
button illuminates when the heated
steering wheel is on.
Note: A sensor regulates the temperature
of the steering wheel.
118
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING: Do not use the pedal
adjustment controls when the vehicle is
moving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
Your control is on the left-hand side of the
steering column or on the instrument
panel.
E176213
Farther away from you.A.
Closer to you.B.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 181).
119
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adjustable Pedals (If Equipped)
WIPERS
Wiper Precautions
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This could scratch the glass or
damage the wiper blades. Use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Switch the windshield wipers off before
entering a car wash.
Switching Windshield Wipers On
and Off
E327739
High-speed wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Off.C
E270969
Use the rotary control.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
What Are Autowipers
Autowipers turns on and controls the
speed and frequency of the windshield
wipers.
Autowipers Settings
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Wipers.
4. Switch Rain Sensing on or off.
Note: When you switch the feature off, the
wipers do not operate based on the rain
sensor. When you switch on the windshield
wipers to the intermittent wipe position with
the feature off, the wipers use the wipe
speed set by the rotary control.
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the
Rain Sensor
E311292
Low sensitivity.A
High sensitivity.B
Use the rotary control to set the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
120
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
When you select low sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield.
When you select high sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
Improving Your Windshield Wiper
Performance
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
REPLACING THE FRONT
WIPER BLADES
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
E327597
2
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
E327598
3. Press the wiper blade secondary
locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
121
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
WASHERS
Washer Precautions
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
Using the Windshield Washer
E311291
E270967
Press and hold the button at the
end of the lever to operate the
windshield washer.
Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time
after the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid when switched on. See
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off
(page 122).
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On
and Off
Courtesy Wipe
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Wipers.
4. Switch Courtesy Wipe on or off.
Adding Washer Fluid
E328222
Washer Fluid Specification
See Washer Fluid Specification (page
559).
WIPERS AND WASHERS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Wipers and Washers – Warning
Lamps
E132353
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
122
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why are there streaks and smears on
the windshield?
The wiper blades could be dirty, worn
or damaged. Check the wiper blades.
See Checking the Wiper Blades
(page 121). If the wiper blades are dirty,
clean them with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth. If
the wiper blades are worn or damaged,
install new ones. See Replacing the
Front Wiper Blades (page 121).
123
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
CONTROL
E327629
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps on.B
Autolamps on.C
Headlamps on.D
Rotate the control to make a selection.
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps every time you switch your
vehicle on.
HEADLAMPS
Using the High Beam Headlamps
E327570
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
Headlamp Indicators
Lamps On
Illuminates when you switch the
low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps on.
Headlamp High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on.
HEADLAMPS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Headlamps – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why is there condensation in the
headlamps?
Headlamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure. Condensation can be a
natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp
assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can
occur when the temperature is cold.
When normal condensation occurs, a
fine mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The fine mist eventually clears
and exits through the vents during
normal operation.
How much condensation is
acceptable?
The presence of a fine mist, for
example no streaks, drip marks or
large droplets. A fine mist covers less
than 50% of the lens.
124
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
How long may it take for the
acceptable condensation to be
cleared?
Clearing time may take as long as 48
hours under dry weather conditions.
How much condensation is
unacceptable?
A water puddle inside the lamp.
Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
What should I do if unacceptable
condensation is present?
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Why do my headlamps turn off when I
have them switched on when I switch
my vehicle off?
The battery saver turns the headlamps
off after a short period of time after
you switch your vehicle off.
AUTOLAMPS
What Are Autolamps
Autolamp
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low
light situations or when the windshield
wipers operate.
Autolamp Settings
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Lighting.
4. Press Autolamp Delay.
5. Press a setting.
EXTERIOR LAMPS
Switching the Turn Signal Lamps
On and Off
Intelligent Three Blink Turn Signal
E311431
Push the lever up or down to
switch the turn signal lamps on.
Set the lever to the middle position to
switch the turn signal lamps off.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
turn signal lamps flash three times.
How Do Cornering Lamps Work (If
Equipped)
The cornering lamps illuminate the inside
of a corner when you are turning the
steering wheel.
125
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
E327599
Headlamp beam.A
Cornering lamp beam.B
Switching the Daytime Running
Lamps On and Off - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Lighting.
4. Switch Daytime Running Lights on or
off.
The daytime running lamps turn on when
all of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
• The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
• The headlamps are off.
Note: Other lighting control positions do
not turn on the daytime running lamps.
Switching the Daytime Running
Lamps On and Off - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Daytime running lamps are always on
unless you switch on the headlamps or
your vehicle is in park (P).
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On
and Off (If Equipped)
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
control.
Press the button to switch the
front fog lamps on or off.
Note: Only switch the front fog lamps on
during reduced visibility.
126
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Note: When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
fog lamps on unless the headlamps are on.
Switching the Cargo Lamps On (If
Equipped)
E189587
Press the button in the lighting
control or in the rear cargo box.
Switching the Spot Lamps On and
Off (If Equipped)
The spot lamp buttons are near the lighting
control.
E340436
Press the button to switch on the
left-hand spot lamp.
E340437
Press the button to switch on the
right-hand spot lamp.
Move the position of the exterior mirrors
to adjust the aim.
Note: The lighting control must be set to
the parking lamp position.
Note: The spot lamps illuminate the area
in front of and to the side of your vehicle.
Exterior Lamp Indicators
Front Fog Lamp
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
Turn Signal Lamp
It flashes when you switch the
turn signal lamps on.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
warns of a failed turn signal lamp bulb.
Exterior Lamp Audible Warning
Exterior Lamps On
Sounds when you open the driver door and
the exterior lamps are on.
EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING (If
Equipped)
What Is Exterior Zone Lighting
Exterior zone lighting divides the exterior
lighting into zones and allows you to switch
them on and off to provide lighting around
the perimeter of your vehicle.
Using the Exterior Zone Lighting
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Zone Lighting.
E339129
On and off button.A
Settings menu.B
Exterior lamp indicators.C
127
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
Individual zones on and off.D
All zones on and off.E
You can use zone lighting when your
vehicle is on or off. When it is off, the
lighting turns off after a certain period of
time.
You can also use individual zone controls
to switch on each zone.
Note: Make sure to remove exterior lighting
covers when using zone lighting.
Note: When your vehicle is off and the timer
has one minute remaining, the direction
indicators flash six times.
Note: Indicators on the touchscreen
illuminate when the lights outside of the
zone lighting control are on.
Note: You can remotely control the zone
lighting using the FordPass app.
Note: Vehicles without spot lamps only
have two zones.
Exterior Zone Lighting Settings
When you access zone lighting for the first
time, you can choose to allow zone lighting
to override the autolamps when zone
lighting is on.
You can change this setting at any time in
the zone lighting settings menu.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Zone Lighting.
3. Press the settings menu in the upper
right-hand corner.
4. Press a setting.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
How Does Automatic High Beam
Control Work
Automatic high beam control turns the
high beams on if it is dark enough and no
other traffic is present. If it detects an
approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail
lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system
turns the high beams off.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
128
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
E327596
Without automatic high beam
control.
A
With automatic high beam
control.
B
Automatic High Beam Control
Precautions
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
Automatic High Beam Control
Requirements
The system turns the high beams on if all
of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough
that you require high beams.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
Automatic High Beam Control
Limitations
The system turns the high beams off if any
of the following occur:
• You switch the system off.
• You set the lighting control to any
position except autolamps.
• The ambient light level is high enough
that you do not require high beams.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or rear lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The system detects street lighting.
129
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
• The camera has reduced visibility.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
Switching Automatic High Beam
Control On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Lighting.
4. Switch Auto Highbeam on or off.
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators
Illuminates to confirm when the
system is ready to assist.
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beams on.
Push the lever away from you again to
switch the high beams off.
Push the lever away from you for a third
time to switch automatic high beam
control back on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING (If
Equipped)
Automatic High Beam Control – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If
the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time
for the camera to cool down. If the message continues to
appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
130
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
GLARE FREE LIGHTING (If
Equipped)
How Does Glare Free Lighting Work
Glare free lighting enhances visibility and
minimizes glare for other road users.
E220921
Without glare free lighting.A
With glare free lighting.B
Glare Free Lighting Precautions
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
adapt the lighting to avoid glare if the
lights of oncoming vehicles are hidden
by obstacles such as guard rails.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
Glare Free Lighting Requirements
The system turns on if all of the following
occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• Your vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
131
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
The system adapts the lighting to avoid
glare if all of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or rear lamps.
Glare Free Lighting Limitations
The system turns off if any of the following
occur:
• You switch the system off.
• You set the lighting control to any
position except autolamps.
• The ambient light level is high enough.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The system detects street lighting.
• The camera has reduced visibility.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
Switching Glare Free Lighting On
and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Lighting.
4. Switch Glarefree Lighting on or off.
Glare Free Lighting Indicators
Illuminates to confirm when the
system is ready to assist.
Overriding Glare Free Lighting
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beams on.
Push the lever away from you again to
switch the high beams off.
Push the lever away from you for a third
time to switch glare free lighting back on.
132
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
GLARE FREE LIGHTING – TROUBLESHOOTING (If Equipped)
Glare Free Lighting – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If
the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time
for the camera to cool down. If the message continues to
appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
(If Equipped)
How Does Adaptive Front Lighting
Work
Adaptive front lighting adapts when you
are steering around a curve or if the camera
detects lane markings indicating a curve.
E161714
B
A
Without adaptive front lighting.A
With adaptive front lighting.B
133
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
Switching Adaptive Front Lighting
On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Lighting.
4. Switch Adaptive Headlamps on or off.
Set the lighting control to the autolamps
position to use the adaptive front lighting.
134
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
SWITCHING ALL OF THE
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a button on the remote
control.
• You press the all lamps on button on
the overhead console.
Press to switch all interior lamps
on or off.
SWITCHING THE FRONT
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
E339273
The front interior lamp switches are on the
overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the
overhead console depends on your vehicle.
Individual Map Lamps
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
SWITCHING THE REAR
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
(IF EQUIPPED)
E281231
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or
off.
Note: If you switch the rear lamps on
through the overhead console, you cannot
switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION
What Is the Interior Lamp Function
The interior lamp function switches the
courtesy and door lamps on or off.
Switching the Interior Lamp
Function On and Off
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
Note: The indicator lamp illuminates amber
when the door function is off.
135
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Lighting
ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL LIGHTING
BRIGHTNESS
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
E291299
E296433
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If
Equipped)
Switching Ambient Lighting On
and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Ambient Light.
4. Switch Ambient Light on or off.
Adjusting Ambient Lighting
Drag the slider left or right.
136
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Lighting
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
WINDOWS
One-Touch Power Windows -
Troubleshooting
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
Press the window control switch
to open the window. Lift the
window control switch to close
the window.
Note: The power windows operate with the
ignition on, and for several minutes after you
switch the ignition off or until you open a
front door.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when
one window is open, slightly open the
opposite window.
One-Touch Open
Fully press the window control switch and
release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
One-Touch Close
Fully lift the window control switch and
release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
Resetting One-Touch Close
Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence.
1. Close the window.
2. Press and hold the window control
switch until the window is fully open.
Keep the window control switch
pressed for a few seconds.
3. Lift and hold the window control switch
until the window is fully closed. Keep
the window control switch held for a
few seconds.
4. Press and hold the window control
switch until the window is fully open.
Keep the window control switch
pressed for a few seconds.
5. Lift and hold the window control switch
until the window is fully closed. Keep
the window control switch held for a
few seconds.
Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close when you use one-touch.
WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK
What Is Window Bounce-Back
The window stops and reverses if it detects
an obstruction when closing.
Overriding Window Bounce-Back
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
care when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
1. Close the window until it reaches the
point of resistance and let it reverse.
2. Lift the window control switch within
two seconds to override bounce-back
and close the window. Bounce-back
is now disabled and you can close the
window manually.
137
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows
Note: The window goes past the point of
resistance and you can fully close it.
Note: If the window does not close, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
LOCKING THE REAR WINDOW
CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press the window control switch
to lock or unlock the rear window
controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SLIDING WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
E311430
The window control switch is on the
overhead console.
Press and hold the window control switch
to open the window. Pull and hold the
window control switch to close the
window.
138
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows
INTERIOR MIRROR
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
MANUALLY DIMMING THE
INTERIOR MIRROR
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR
MIRROR (If Equipped)
What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior
Mirror
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Limitations
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
139
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Mirror
ADJUSTING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
E311081
Power fold.A
Window lock.B
Adjustment control.C
Right-hand mirror.D
Left-hand mirror.E
To adjust the mirrors, switch your vehicle
on, with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control light turns on.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
FOLDING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL FOLDING MIRRORS
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror
in its support when returning it to its
original position.
FOLDING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors fold when you lock
your vehicle and unfold when you unlock
your vehicle.
For tight parking conditions,
press the control to fold the
mirrors.
Press the control switch again to unfold
the mirrors.
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.
The left-hand and right-hand mirrors move
at different rates. For example, one mirror
may stop while the other one continues to
move. This is normal.
If you press the control switch to fold in the
mirrors with auto-fold on, the mirrors do
not unfold when you unlock your vehicle.
Note: The power folding mirrors operate
with the ignition on, and for several minutes
after you switch the ignition off.
Note: If you fold and unfold the mirrors
several times within one minute, the power
fold function may turn off to protect the
motors from overheating.
140
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Mirrors
Switching Auto-fold On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Mirrors.
4. Switch Autofold on or off.
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the mirrors perform the following
steps:
1. By hand, fold or retract both mirrors.
2. Using the power folding/power
telescoping mirror control switch,
operate the mirrors until you hear an
audible click.
3. Operate the power folding or power
telescoping mirrors an additional 3 to
4 times to synchronize the mirrors.
EXTENDING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
This optional feature lets you extend the
mirror about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when
towing a trailer. You can manually pull out
or push in the mirrors to various positions.
Power Telescoping Mirrors (If
Equipped)
This feature lets you position both mirrors
at the same time.
E218902
A. Extend.
B. Retract.
To adjust your mirrors, make sure you
switch your vehicle on, with the ignition in
accessory mode or the engine running.
1. Press and release the control switch.
2. Press the adjustment control to
position the mirrors.
3. Press the left arrow to extend the
mirrors out. Press the right arrow to
retract the mirrors in.
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors when holding the
control down during full travel, could disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
AUTO-DIMMING EXTERIOR
MIRROR (If Equipped)
What Is the Auto-Dimming Exterior
Mirror
The driver exterior mirror dims when the
interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
141
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Mirrors
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SUN SHADE
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the sun shades.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
The controls are on the overhead console.
Opening the Sun Shade
E312249
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch open
feature. To stop movement,
press the switch a second time. The sun
shade also opens when you open the
moonroof.
Note: The sun shade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To fully open the sun shade,
press the switch again.
Closing the Sun Shade
E312250
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch close
feature. To stop movement,
press the switch a second time.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
MOONROOF
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the moonroof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
roof opening.
The controls are on the overhead console.
Opening the Moonroof
E312251
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch open
feature. To stop movement,
press the switch a second time.
Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully
opened position to reduce wind noise or
rumbling that may happen with the
moonroof fully open.
Press and release the switch again to fully
open the moonroof.
Closing the Moonroof
E312252
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch close
feature, from either the open or
vent positions. To stop movement, press
the switch a second time.
VENTING THE MOONROOF
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the moonroof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
The moonroof controls are on the
overhead console.
142
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Moonroof (If Equipped)
E312252
With the moonroof in the closed
position, press and release the
switch to vent the moonroof. To
close the moonroof from the vent position,
press and release the switch again.
MOONROOF BOUNCE-BACK
What Is Moonroof Bounce-Back
The moonroof stops and reverses some
distance if it detects an obstacle when
closing.
Overriding Moonroof Bounce-Back
Press and hold the close button within two
seconds after the moonroof comes to a
stop.
143
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Moonroof (If Equipped)
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW - VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH
SCREEN
E219638
Engine oil pressure gauge.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Fuel gauge.C
Transmission fluid temperature gauge.D
Speedometer.E
Information display.F
Tachometer.G
144
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW - VEHICLES WITH: 8 INCH
SCREEN
E311317
Tachometer.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Configurable gauges.C
Compass.D
Fuel gauge.E
Ambient temperature.F
Speedometer.G
Distance to empty.H
Odometer.I
145
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW - VEHICLES WITH: 12.3 INCH
SCREEN
E310245
Tachometer.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Configurable gauges.C
Fuel gauge.D
Speedometer.E
Odometer.F
Compass.G
Ambient temperature.H
WHAT IS THE TACHOMETER
Shows the engine speed. The red line
thickens where the engine speed enters
the overspeed limiter.
WHAT IS THE SPEEDOMETER
Displays the vehicle speed.
FUEL GAUGE
What Is the Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank.
146
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Fuel Gauge Limitations
The fuel gauge may not provide an
accurate reading when your vehicle is on
an incline.
Locating the Fuel Filler Door
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
What Is the Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 12 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
What Is Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods
of time.
WHAT IS THE ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
Indicates the engine coolant temperature.
WHAT IS THE ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE GAUGE
Indicates the engine oil pressure.
Note: This is a configurable gauge.
WHAT IS THE TRANSMISSION
FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Indicates the transmission fluid
temperature.
Special operating conditions can cause
higher than normal operating
temperatures. See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
(page 614).
Note: This is a configurable gauge.
WHAT IS THE TURBO BOOST
GAUGE (IF EQUIPPED)
Indicates the amount of manifold air
pressure in the engine.
Note: This is a configurable gauge.
WHAT IS THE DIESEL
EXHAUST FLUID GAUGE (IF
EQUIPPED)
Indicates the current diesel exhaust fluid
level.
WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER WARNING LAMPS
Warning lamps alert you to a vehicle
condition that could become serious.
Some lamps illuminate when you start
your vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
147
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
WARNING LAMPS
Anti-Lock Brake System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Battery
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running, this indicates your vehicle
requires service. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Brake System
E270480
It illuminates when you apply the
parking brake and the ignition is
on. If it illuminates when your
vehicle is moving, make sure the
parking brake is released. If the
parking brake is released, this
indicates low brake fluid level or the brake
system requires service. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: Indicators may vary depending on
region.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
E163176
Illuminates when the diesel
exhaust fluid is low,
contaminated or the system
requires service. See What Is the
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
(page 245).
Door Ajar
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and remains on if
any door is open.
Electric Parking Brake
E146190
It illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake requires
service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
If it illuminates, safely stop your
vehicle and switch the vehicle
off.
Fasten Seatbelt
E71880
It illuminates and a tone sounds
until you fasten the seatbelts.
Hood Ajar
E296055
It illuminates when the ignition
is on and the hood is not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level
is low.
Low Tire Pressure
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If illuminated,
check your tire pressure as soon
as possible. If it begins to flash at anytime,
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Low Washer Fluid Level
E132353
It illuminates when the washer
fluid is low.
148
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Oil Pressure
It illuminates when the engine
oil pressure is low.
Powertrain Malfunction, Reduced
Power, Electronic Throttle Control,
Check 4X4
Illuminates when the powertrain
or four-wheel drive require
service. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
It illuminates when the ignition
is on and the engine is off, this is
normal. If it illuminates when the
engine is on this indicates the emission
control system requires service. If it flashes,
have your vehicle checked immediately.
See Emission Law (page 668). See
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Warning Lamps (page 216).
Stop Safely
E332963
Illuminates if an electrical
component requires service or a
failure that causes your vehicle
to shutdown or enter into a limited
operating mode.
Tailgate Ajar
E311338
It illuminates when the ignition
is on and the tailgate is not
completely closed.
Water in Fuel
It illuminates when the fuel and
water separator has a significant
quantity of water in it and
requires immediate draining.
WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER INDICATORS
Indicators notify you of various features
that are active on your vehicle.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INDICATORS
Active Drive Assist
E297977
See Active Drive Assist (page
292).
Adaptive Cruise Control
E144524
See Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 317).
Automatic High Beam
See Automatic High Beam
Control Indicators (page 130).
Automatic Regen Control Off
E252868
See Diesel Particulate Filter
Precautions (page 240).
Auto Hold Active
E323448
See Auto Hold (page 283).
Auto Hold Unavailable
E323449
See Auto Hold (page 283).
Auto-Start-Stop
See Auto-Start-Stop (page
224).
149
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Blind Spot Monitor
E151262
See Blind Spot Information
System (page 340).
Cruise Control
E332905
See Cruise Control (page 313).
Electronic Locking Differential
E325779
See Electronic Locking
Differential (page 269).
Four-Wheel Drive
E181778
E181781
E181780
E181779
See Four-Wheel Drive (page
260).
Note: Some indicators appear different
depending on vehicle options.
Front Airbag
E67017
See Airbags (page 58).
Front Fog Lamp
See Switching the Front Fog
Lamps On and Off (page 126).
High Beam
See Using the High Beam
Headlamps (page 124).
Hill Descent
E163171
See Hill Descent Control (page
289).
Lamps On
See Exterior Lighting Control
(page 124).
Ready to Drive
E224090
See Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Information (page 221).
Reverse Brake Assist
E293490
See Reverse Braking Assist
(page 279).
Stability Control and Traction
Control
E138639
E130458
See Traction Control (page
284). See Stability Control
(page 286).
Turn Signal Lamps
See Switching the Turn Signal
Lamps On and Off (page 125).
Tow Haul
E246592
See Towing a Trailer (page 375).
Wait to Start
See Starting a Diesel Engine
(page 211).
150
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
USING THE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER DISPLAY CONTROLS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E309379
Back button.A
OK button.B
Menu button.C
Back Button
Press to go back or to exit a menu.
OK Button
Press to make a selection.
Menu Button
Press to display the submenus.
Scroll Buttons
Press the up or down buttons to scroll
through the menu items.
Status Indicator
E204495
Menu items with a check box
indicates a feature's status. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is on, and unchecked indicates the
feature is off.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MAIN MENU -
VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH
SCREEN
Depending on your vehicle options, some
menu items can appear different or not at
all.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent and could be unavailable
when your vehicle is above a certain speed.
Menu Item
Select Screens
Truck Info
Towing
Settings
151
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MAIN MENU -
VEHICLES WITH: 8 INCH
SCREEN
Depending on your vehicle options, some
menu items can appear different or not at
all.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent and could be unavailable
when your vehicle is above a certain speed.
Menu Item
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Navigation
Phone
Audio
Settings
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MAIN MENU -
VEHICLES WITH: 12.3 INCH
SCREEN
Depending on your vehicle options, some
menu items can appear different or not at
all.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent and could be unavailable
when your vehicle is above a certain speed.
Menu Item
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Navigation
Phone
Audio
Settings
TRIP COMPUTER - VEHICLES
WITH: 4.2 INCH SCREEN
Accessing the Trip Computer
Using Select Screens
1. Select Select Screens.
2. Use the controls on the steering wheel
to navigate the menu. See
Customizing the Instrument Cluster
Display (page 153).
Using the Home Screen
Once screens have been added, use the
controls on the steering wheel to view each
trip screen.
Resetting the Trip Computer
1. Use the controls on the steering wheel
to navigate the home screen.
2. Select Trip 1 or Trip 2.
3. Press and hold the OK button for a few
seconds.
Note: This Trip resets every time you start
your vehicle.
152
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
TRIP COMPUTER - VEHICLES
WITH: 8 INCH SCREEN/12.3
INCH SCREEN
Accessing the Trip Computer
1. Select Trip/Fuel.
2. Select This Trip, Trip 1 or Trip 2.
Resetting the Trip Computer
1. Select Trip/Fuel.
2. Select Trip 1 or Trip 2.
3. Press and hold the OK button for a few
seconds.
Note: This Trip resets every time you start
your vehicle.
CUSTOMIZING THE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Adding Screens Using MyView
1. Using the information display controls
on the steering wheel, select MyView.
2. Select Configure MyView.
3. Select a screen.
4. Press the OK button.
Note: The number of screens you can add
is limited. If the selected screen does not
appear you must deselect screens from the
MyView menu.
Adding Screens Using Select
Screens
1. Select Select Screens.
2. Use the controls on the steering wheel
to highlight a screen to add.
3. Press the OK button.
Note: The number of screens you can add
is limited. If the selected screen does not
appear you must deselect screens from the
Select Screens menu.
Configuring Gauges
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Configure Gauges.
3. Select to swap or change left-hand
side and right-hand side gauges.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Changing the Measure Unit
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General.
3. Press Measure Units.
4. Select a measurement unit.
Changing the Temperature Unit
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General.
3. Press Temperature Units.
4. Select Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Changing the Tire Pressure Unit
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General.
3. Press Tire Pressure Units.
4. Select a pressure unit.
153
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
HYBRID DISPLAY
INFORMATION
What Is EV Coach
EV coach helps you get the most of your
vehicle's electrical driving and regenerative
braking capabilities.
How Does EV Coach Work
When accelerating or maintaining speed,
a blue or white solid bar displays. This
indicates vehicle power. A blue rectangular
box could also display that shows the
power level that the engine turns on at.
When the power level displays in the
rectangular box, it is blue which indicates
you are in electric only operation.
When the power level displays outside of
the rectangular box, it is white which
indicates you are in hybrid operation.
When you are decelerating, either releasing
the accelerator pedal or applying the
brake, you see a green or white solid bar
which indicates the power being used to
slow your vehicle down. A green
rectangular box could also display that
shows the amount of power that can be
recaptured by the regenerative braking
system and returned to the high voltage
battery.
When the power level displays in the
rectangular box, it is green which indicates
that the regenerative braking system is
being used to slow down your vehicle and
return the maximum amount of energy to
the high voltage battery.
When the power level displays outside of
the rectangular box, it is white which
indicates both regenerative and
conventional braking systems are in use.
WHAT IS BRAKE COACH
The brake coach appears after the vehicle
has come to a stop. It coaches you to brake
in a manner that maximizes the amount
of energy returned through the
regenerative braking system.
The percent displayed is an indication of
the regenerative braking efficiency with
100% representing the maximum amount
of energy recovery. You can switch brake
coach on or off in the settings menu on
your touchscreen.
WHAT IS THE TRIP SUMMARY
Displays the trip summary when you switch
off your vehicle. The values are cumulative
since you last started your vehicle.
154
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
WHAT IS REMOTE START
The system allows you to remotely start
your vehicle and to adjust the interior
temperature according to the settings that
you chose.
REMOTE START
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
REMOTE START LIMITATIONS
Remote start does not work under the
following conditions:
• The alarm horn is sounding.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The ignition is on.
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
Note: You can use remote start with
FordPass. See Connecting the Vehicle to
a Wi-Fi Network (page 565).
ENABLING REMOTE START
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Switch Remote Start on or off.
Note: To remote start with FordPass, make
sure that the modem is enabled. See
Connecting FordPass to the Modem
(page 565).
REMOTELY STARTING AND
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
Remotely Starting the Vehicle
E138623
Press the button on the remote
control.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the
button on the remote control.
Within three seconds, press the
button again.
Note: You can also use FordPass to start
the vehicle.
Note: The turn signal lamps flash twice.
Note: The parking lamps turn on when the
vehicle is running.
Note: The horn sounds if the system fails
to start.
Note: All other vehicle systems remain off
when you have remotely started the vehicle.
Note: The vehicle remains secured when
you have remotely started the vehicle. A
valid key must be inside your vehicle to
switch the ignition on and drive your vehicle.
Remotely Stopping the Vehicle
E138625
Within three seconds, press the
button on the remote control.
Within three seconds, press the
button again.
155
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start (If Equipped)
EXTENDING THE REMOTE
START DURATION
To extend the remote start duration during
remote start, do the following:
E138623
Press the button on the remote
control.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the
button on the remote control.
Within three seconds, press the
button again.
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the
duration extends by another 15 minutes.
This provides a total of 30 minutes.
Note: Remote start can only be extended
once.
Note: A maximum of two remote starts, or
one remote start with an extension, are
allowed. To reset the restart procedure
switch the vehicle to on, then to off.
REMOTE START REMOTE
CONTROL INDICATORS
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start
successful.
Solid green.
Remote stop
successful.
Solid red.
Request failed or
status not received.
Blinking red.
Status incomplete.Blinking green.
REMOTE START SETTINGS
Switching Climate Control Auto
Mode On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Remote Start Setup.
3. Press Climate Control.
4. Select Vehicle.
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the
system attempts to heat or cool the interior
to 72°F (22°C).
Note: When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the last
used settings.
Switching Climate Control Last
Settings On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Switch Last settings on or off.
Note: If you switch the last settings on, the
system remembers the last used settings.
Switching the Heated Seat
Settings On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Seats.
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the heated seat settings
on, the heated seats turn on during cold
weather.
156
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start (If Equipped)
Switching the Heated Steering
Wheel Settings On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Seats and Steering Wheel.
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the heated steering
wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel
turns on during cold weather.
Setting the Remote Start Duration
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Duration.
Note: Wait a few seconds before remotely
starting the vehicle after the vehicle stops
running.
157
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start (If Equipped)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
E339318
Depending on your vehicle options, the
controls could look different than what you
see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate
air currently in the passenger
compartment.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be
prevented from turning on in all air flow
modes except maximum cooling to reduce
the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off
when you direct air to the instrument panel
or footwell air vents during hot weather to
improve cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air
conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING DEFROST ON AND
OFF
E265283
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch the
windshield air vents on.
E244097
Make sure that the instrument
panel air vents are switched off.
Make sure that the footwell air
vents are switched off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
158
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
WIPER PARK ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the heated wiper
park also turns on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF
Heated Mirrors
E266189
Press the button.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
E266187
E266186
Press up or down on the control
to select the blower motor
speed.
Note: For Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) and
Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
vehicles, the blower motor may run, and you
may feel airflow when the climate control
is off to provide cooling to the battery.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
E244115
Turn the control on the left-hand side of
the climate control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
the climate control to set the right-hand
temperature.
159
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
E265283
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
Press the button on the
touchscreen.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Panel Air Vents
E265283
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
E244097
Press the button on the
touchscreen.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents
E265283
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
Press the button on the
touchscreen.
AUTO MODE
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
button to adjust auto mode.
Note: When you switch auto mode on,
lights on the blower motor control do not
illuminate to indicate the blower motor
speed.
Adjust the blower motor control or air
distribution control to switch auto mode
off.
Auto Mode Indicators
The indicators are on the Auto Mode
button.
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator
Status
The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
One indicator illumin-
ated.
The blower motor speed is moderate.Two indicators illumin-
ated.
The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
Three indicators illumin-
ated.
160
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
Switching Dual Mode On and Off
E265280
Press the button.
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS
General Hints
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
• You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless
of the air distribution setting.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your
vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air
always switched on.
• Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
• To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot
weather, drive with the windows open
until you feel cold air through the air
vents.
Automatic Climate Control
• Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold
is not necessary. Automatic mode is
best recommended to maintain set
temperature.
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the
interior to the temperature you select
as quickly as possible.
• For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
• If you press AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs air
flow to the windshield and side window
air vents.In addition, the blower motor
may run at a slower speed until the
engine warms up.
• If you press AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system uses
recirculated air to maximize interior
cooling. Blower motor speed may also
reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Press AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Press MAX A/C.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Press AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
161
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
162
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
E308141
Depending on your vehicle options, the
controls could look different than what you
see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate
air currently in the passenger
compartment.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be
prevented from turning on in all air flow
modes except maximum cooling to reduce
the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off
when you direct air to the instrument panel
or footwell air vents during hot weather to
improve cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air
conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING DEFROST ON AND
OFF
Press the button to switch the
windshield air vents on.
E244097
Make sure that the instrument
panel air vents are switched off.
Make sure that the footwell air
vents are switched off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Turn the temperature control
clockwise past the highest
setting to maximize defrosting.
Note: The temperature control springs back
to the highest setting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: When you switch maximum defrost
on, the heated windshield turns on.
163
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise past the
lowest setting to maximize
cooling.
Note: The temperature control springs back
to the lowest setting.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF
Heated Mirrors
E266189
Press the button.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to
indicate the blower motor speed.
Note: When you switch the blower motor
off, air conditioning turns off and the
windows could fog up.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
E244106
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise for cooler temperature
settings.
Turn the temperature control clockwise
for warmer temperature settings.
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Panel Air Vents
E244097
Press the button.
164
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents
Press the button.
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS
General Hints
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
• You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless
of the air distribution setting.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your
vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air
always switched on.
• Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
• To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot
weather, drive with the windows open
until you feel cold air through the air
vents.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest speed setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press MAX A/C.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
period of time.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
3. Direct air to the instrument panel air
vents.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Direct air to the instrument panel and
windshield air vents.
2. Press and release A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer.
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest setting.
5. Direct air toward the side windows.
6. Close the instrument panel air vents.
165
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 605).
The cabin air filter is behind the glove
compartment.
To remove the lower glove compartment
and access the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment.
E311296
2. Press the tab on each side.
3. Fully lower the glove compartment.
4. Pull the glove compartment toward
you.
166
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Air Quality
FRONT SEAT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event
of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees
from the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
167
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Head Restraint Components
E327921
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If equipped).
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
4-Way Head Restraints
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint:
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
To tilt the head restraint:
E327919
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
168
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the preferred position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release
button and the unlock and remove
button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Note: You cannot remove head restraints
that have audio system speakers.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
Manual Seat Adjustment
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in
a crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
E308316
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
Manual Seat Adjustment
E327922
169
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E308334
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
Head Restraint Components
E327921
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If equipped).
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
4-Way Head Restraints
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
To raise the head restraint, pull the head
restraint up.
To lower the head restraint, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
To tilt the head restraint, do the following:
E327919
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the preferred position.
170
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release
button and the unlock and remove
button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Note: You cannot remove head restraints
that have audio system speakers.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E308339
If the seat stops prior to reaching the end
of the travel position, or an obstruction
occurs, a new stopping position is learned.
To reset the stopping position:
1. Remove any obstruction.
2. Press and hold the control until the
seat stops moving.
3. Press and hold the control again until
the seat stops.
4. Continue holding the control for a few
seconds. The new position is learned.
Adjusting the Seat Cushion
E308336
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
Max Recline Seat
E308338
171
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
Adjusting the Seat Flat (If Equipped)
E306956
This feature allows the occupant to find a
comfortable position to rest when the
vehicle is not moving.
Note: Before adjusting the seat backrest
fully flat, place the rear seat cushion into
the upright position and remove any objects
that could obstruct the movement of the
flat seat. See Folding the Seats (page 176).
As the seat folds flat, the cushion adjusts
to support the hips and lower back. For
additional support, you can also adjust the
upper seat backrest.
If you fully recline the passenger seat and
the vehicle is moving, a message appears
on the instrument cluster and a tone
sounds. To switch the warning off, return
the seat to an upright position.
Adjusting the Upper Seat Backrest
(If Equipped)
E311333
The front upper seat backrest tilts for extra
comfort. To tilt the upper seat backrest,
pivot the upper seat backrest toward your
shoulders.
After the upper seat backrest reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
Adjusting the Seat Height
E308337
172
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E327927
MASSAGE SEATS (If
Equipped)
Massage Seat Limitations
The engine must be running or the vehicle
must be in accessory mode to activate the
seats.
The passenger side massage is available
if the occupant meets the seat sensor
weight requirements.
Allow a few seconds for any selection to
activate. Selecting a different adjustment
cancels the current one in progress. When
the seat backrest and cushion are both
active, the massage alternates between
zones.
Adjusting the Massage Seat
Settings
E156301
Select the previous massage
pattern or lumbar area.
A
Decrease the massage or lumbar
Intensity.
B
Select the next massage pattern
or lumbar area.
C
Increase the massage or lumbar
Intensity.
D
Select the massage or lumbar
mode.
E
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen.
173
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Heated Seat Precautions
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything
on the seat that blocks the heat, for
example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry.
Switching the Heated Seats On
and Off
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol on the
climate controls or touchscreen to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
The more indicators that display, the
warmer the temperature of the seat.
Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
VENTILATED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Ventilated Seat Precautions
Do not:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
Switching the Ventilated Seats On
and Off
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
174
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
E224689
Press this symbol on the climate controls
or the touchscreen to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
Note: When you switch the climate control
fan speed and the ventilated seats to their
maximum settings, the ventilated seats
provide increased cooling.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the ventilated seats are on, the feature
turns itself off unless the vehicle is in
Auto-Start-Stop mode. You may need to
reactivate the ventilated seats.
Note: The ventilated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The ventilated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
175
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
MANUAL SEATS
Head Restraint Components
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints
E308301
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint
E308306
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If equipped).
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint:
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release
button and the unlock and remove
button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Seats
You can flip each seat cushion up into a
vertical storage position.
E181250
Rotate the seat up until it locks in place.
176
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
Unfolding the Seats
WARNING: Make sure that cargo
and other objects are not trapped under
the seat cushion and that you return the
seat cushion to the full-down position.
Failure to do so may prevent the seat
from operating properly, which could
increase the risk of serious injury in a
crash.
E308139
Pull the strap to lower the seat
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Heated Seat Precautions
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything
on the seat that blocks the heat, for
example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry.
Switching the Heated Seats On
and Off
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
The rear seat heat controls are on the rear
of the center console.
177
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seats turn off when you switch
off the vehicle.
178
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE REAR
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
The rear occupant alert system monitors
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check
for rear seat occupants when you switch
the ignition off.
HOW DOES THE REAR
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
WORK
The system monitors when rear doors have
been opened and closed to indicate the
potential presence of an occupant in the
rear seat.
A message displays in the information and
entertainment display screen and an
audible warning sounds when you switch
the ignition off after any of the following
conditions have been met:
• A rear door is opened or closed while
the ignition is on.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of a rear door opening and
closing.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed
or sounded.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The system does not detect the presence
of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
It monitors when rear doors are opened
and closed.
Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
conditions are met.
Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
through a rear door.
Note: The audible warning does not sound
when the front door is opened before you
switch the ignition off.
SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
Note: The default setting is on.
Note: Performing a master reset causes the
system to switch on again.
Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped)
When you switch the system off, a
message appears every six months as a
reminder that the system is off. You can
switch the system back on or leave it off.
179
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM INDICATORS
E325002
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The warning sounds for a short period of
time.
180
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE MEMORY
FUNCTION
The memory function recalls the position
of these features:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable pedals.
MEMORY FUNCTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants
are clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
LOCATING THE MEMORY
FUNCTION BUTTONS
E332006
The memory function buttons are on the
driver door.
SAVING A PRESET POSITION
1. Adjust the memory features to your
preferred position.
2. Press and hold the preferred preset
button until you hear a single tone.
A confirmation message appears in the
information display.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions at any time.
RECALLING A PRESET
POSITION
Press and release a preset button.
Note: You can recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when you
place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not
moving.
Note: Pressing any of the preset buttons or
any memory feature control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if you linked it to a
preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked remote control is
present.
Using a linked remote control to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat and steering column to the
easy entry position.
Linking a Preset Position toy Your
Remote Control or Passive Key
See Linking or Unlinking a Personal
Profile to a Remote Control (page 593).
181
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Memory Function (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
Universal Garage Door Opener: Getting
Started
Universal Garage Door Opener: HomeLink
Universal Garage Door Opener Homelink for
Genie Intellicode
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
HOW DOES THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER WORK
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com or by
calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Clearing the Garage
Door Opener (page 185).
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with your vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Clearing the Garage
Door Opener (page 185).
182
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
LIMITATIONS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit)
after several seconds – which may not be
long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal.
U.S. gate operators time-out in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR
HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Clearing the Garage Door Opener
(page 185).
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release one of the three
HomeLink function buttons that you
would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1– 3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Programming
the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate
Opener Motor (page 184).
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLite indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
184).
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
183
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
MOTOR
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor, you have 30
seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E188212
3. Press and hold one of the three
HomeLink function buttons you want
to program for two seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR GATE
OPENER MOTOR
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators “time-out” in the
same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function
button you want to program for two
seconds, then release. You may need
to do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 3.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
184).
4. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
184
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons.
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
REPROGRAMMING THE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow programming steps.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
RADIO FREQUENCIES
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that could cause undesired
operation.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
185
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
LOCATING THE USB PORTS
Data Transfer USB Ports
The USB Ports could be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
Note: These USB ports can also charge
devices.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
Charge Only USB Ports
The USB ports could be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• On the upper instrument panel.
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
PLAYING MEDIA USING THE
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Connect your device to the USB port.
E100027
Press the audio button on the
feature bar.
Select Sources.
Select the USB option.
Press the button to play a track.
Press the button again to pause
the track.
Press the button to skip to the
next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press the button once to return
to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
186
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
USB Ports
CHARGING A DEVICE
Connect your device to the USB port.
You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running, or when SYNC is on.
187
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
USB Ports
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
Pro-Power On-Board
The vehicle functions as a portable
generator and can power devices that
require up to the rating listed on power
outlet label.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: 2KW
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
WARNING: Do not connect any
vehicle power outlets to any premises,
including buildings or recreational
vehicles. This can create a backfeed to
utility lines. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in damage to the
vehicle, fire, electrical shock or death.
WARNING: The vehicle's engine
runs while the generator is switched on.
Running engines emit carbon monoxide.
Only use the generator when the vehicle
is outdoors. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: Automatic engine stop is disabled
and the gasoline engine will continue to idle
when the outlet is switched on.
Note: We recommend using UL approved
devices for use with the power outlet.
Note: Unplug electrical devices from the
power outlet when they are not switched
on.
Note: Make sure there is no damage to the
outlets before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure that objects are not
blocking the inverter inlet and exhaust near
the rear underseat storage compartment.
Note: The climate control system may turn
on and power may be limited during extreme
hot or cold temperatures to optimize the
performance of the system.
Note: When the outlet is switched on and
the vehicle is in Park (P) the engine turns
off 30 minutes after the low fuel warning is
displayed. After the vehicle is turned off,
generator mode only operates while driving
or until the vehicle is refueled.
188
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
Grounding Types
Grounding TypeVehicle Type
Neutral floating: The neutral of the inverter
generator is isolated from system ground.
Gas
Neutral bonded: The neutral of the inverter
generator is bonded to system ground.
Connecting loads that also have neutral
bonded to ground will cause the ground
fault detection to trip.
HEV
Note: If additional grounding measures are
required, consult with a qualified electrician.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: 2.4KW/7.2KW
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
WARNING: Do not connect any
vehicle power outlets to any premises,
including buildings or recreational
vehicles. This can create a backfeed to
utility lines. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in damage to the
vehicle, fire, electrical shock or death.
WARNING: The vehicle's engine
runs while the generator is switched on.
Running engines emit carbon monoxide.
Only use the generator when the vehicle
is outdoors. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: The gasoline engine may start and
stop to provide power when the outlet is
switched on.
Note: We recommend using UL approved
devices for use with the power outlet.
Note: Unplug electrical devices from the
power outlet when they are not switched
on.
Note: The climate control system may turn
on and power may be limited during extreme
hot or cold temperatures to optimize the
performance of the system.
Note: When the outlet is switched on and
the vehicle is in Park (P) the engine turns
off 30 minutes after the low fuel warning is
displayed. After the vehicle is turned off,
generator mode only operates while driving
or until the vehicle is refueled.
189
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
Grounding Types
Grounding TypeVehicle Type
Neutral floating: The neutral of the inverter
generator is isolated from system ground.
Gas
Neutral bonded: The neutral of the inverter
generator is bonded to system ground.
Connecting loads that also have neutral
bonded to ground will cause the ground
fault detection to trip.
HEV
Note: If additional grounding measures are
required, consult with a qualified electrician.
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
E335065
The power outlets are behind covers on
the left side of the bed.
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
- VEHICLES WITH: 2KW
Power Outlet Status Indicator
The power outlet indicator illuminates to
let you know the status of the system.
DescriptionIndicator Status
The power point is
working and the
vehicle is on.
On
The power point is
off or the vehicle is
off.
Off
The power point is
in fault mode.
Flashing
Generator Mode Power Indicator
E335469
190
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
The generator mode power indicator
displays the currently used power and total
available power level on the touchscreen.
When Generator Mode is switched off the
indicator displays a reduced available
power level. When generator mode is
switched on the indicator displays the full
available power.
Note: Ensure plugged in devices do not
exceed the available power displayed on
the generator mode power indicator.
Note: Maximum power may be reduced
when the vehicle is in drive (D).
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
- VEHICLES WITH: 2.4KW/
7.2KW
Power Outlet Status Indicator
The power outlet indicator illuminates to
let you know the status of the system.
DescriptionIndicator Status
The power point is
working and the
vehicle is on.
On
The power point is
off and the vehicle
is off.
Off
The power point is
in fault mode.
Flashing
Generator Mode Power Indicator
E335469
The generator mode power indicator
displays the currently used power and total
available power level on the touchscreen.
When Generator Mode is switched off the
indicator displays a reduced available
power level. When generator mode is
switched on the indicator displays the full
available power.
Note: Additional indicators may be
available based on vehicle configuration.
Note: Ensure plugged in devices do not
exceed the available power displayed on
the generator mode power indicator.
WHAT IS UTILITY IDLE MODE -
VEHICLES WITH: FLIP KEY
Utility Idle mode allows you to remove the
key from the ignition and keep the vehicle
and bed power point running.
SWITCHING UTILITY IDLE ON
AND OFF - VEHICLES WITH:
FLIP KEY
Switching Utility Idle On
1. Start the vehicle. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 209).
191
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
2. Press the Features button on the
touchscreen.
3. Press the Pro Power Onboard button.
4. Press the Generator Mode button to
switch the power outlet to the rating
listed on the power outlet label.
5. Press the Utility Idle button.
6. Turn the key to position 0.
7. Remove the key from the ignition.
Switching Utility Idle Off using the
Key
1. Insert the key into the ignition.
2. Turn the key to position III.
Switching Utility Idle off using the
Information and Entertainment
Display Screen
Use the controls on the touchscreen to
switch off the vehicle.
WHAT IS GENERATOR MODE
Pro-Power On-Board
Generator Mode uses the vehicle engine
to increase power to the bed power outlets
up to the rating listed on the power outlet
label.
SWITCHING GENERATOR
MODE ON AND OFF
Using the Information and
Entertainment Display Screen
1. Switch the vehicle on. See Starting
and Stopping the Engine (page 209).
2. Press the Features button on the
touchscreen.
3. Press the Pro Power Onboard button.
4. Press the Generator Mode button to
switch the power outlet to the full
rating listed on the power outlet label.
Using the Instrument Panel
E311311
Press the button to switch
between off, Convenience Mode,
and Generator Mode.
Using the Bed Control
E337175
Press the button to switch Generator Mode
on and off.
RESETTING GROUND FAULT
DETECTION
After disconnecting all electrical loads the
ground fault can be reset using the
switches on the power point, on the
instrument panel or on the touchscreen.
Use the controls on the touchscreen to test
the ground fault detection circuit.
192
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
RESETTING THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER - VEHICLES WITH:
7.2KW
E337774
Press the button on the upper right area of
the bed outlet when the circuit breaker has
opened after a fault has occurred to reset
the circuit breaker to the on position. There
are two circuit breaker buttons that
correspond to the A and B outlets.
193
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
POWER OUTLET – TROUBLESHOOTING
Power Outlet – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
Ensure plugged in devices do not exceed
the available power displayed. Devices may
exceed the power rating shown the device
label when plugged in. Unplug the device
and switch the ignition on and off to reset
the system.
Item(s) plugged in exceed the system's
maximum capacity. Try unplugging one or
more items and reset. See Owner's Manual
for detail.
After disconnecting all electrical loads, the
ground fault can be reset using the switches
on the power point, on the instrument panel
or on the touchscreen. Use the controls on
the touchscreen to test the ground fault
detection circuit.
Ground Fault Detected. See Owner's
Manual for details.
The climate control system may turn on
and power may be limited during extreme
hot or cold temperatures to optimize the
performance of the system.
Generator System is outside its operating
temperature and capacity is reduced. See
Owner's Manual for details.
Do not plug in any device that supplies
power to the vehicle through the power
points. This could result in damage to
vehicle systems.
Another power source is trying to supply
power to your vehicle's AC outlets. Discon-
nect vehicle from that power source. See
Owner's Manual for details.
The Pickup Bed Power Generator is in fault
mode. Ensure all devices are unplugged
from the system. Use the controls on the
touchscreen to reset the system. Switch
the vehicle on and off if the touchscreen
controls are unable to reset the system. See
an authorized dealer if these steps do not
fix the fault.
Pro Power OnBoard is currently unavailable.
See Owner's Manual for details.
After disconnecting all electrical loads, the
ground fault can be reset using the switches
on the power point, on the instrument panel
or on the touchscreen. Use the controls on
the touchscreen to test the ground fault
detection circuit.
This button test outlets for proper opera-
tion of ground fault detection. In a
successful test, Pro Power OnBoard
detects the ground fault and turns off. See
Owner's Manual for details.
194
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
DescriptionMessage
Extended idling in drive (D) is reducing
available power. When safe, shift to park
(P) while idling, or reduce power draw to
less than 4300W to keep the generator
running.
Extended idling in drive (D) is reducing
available power to 4300W. See Owner’s
Manual for details
195
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
Power Outlet – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why am I not able to put my vehicle in
Drive (D) while using the pickup bed
power outlet?
Unplug all devices from the Bed Power
Generator Outlets and make sure you
have closed the outlet covers. If you
are still unable to drive the vehicle, use
Manual Park Release to put the
transmission into Drive (D). See Using
Manual Park Release (page 257).
What do I do when my touchscreen is
malfunctioning and I cannot accept the
popup message to put the vehicle in
Drive (D)?
See Using Manual Park Release
(page 257).
196
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet can power devices that
require up to the rating on the outlet cover.
Note: The total power delivered is divided
if more than one outlet is used.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 120 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 400 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
POWER OUTLET LIMITATIONS
Devices may exceed the power rating
shown the device label when plugged in.
Unplug the device and switch the ignition
on and off to reset the system.
You should not use the power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other
electric power tools, or
compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices which process
precise data, for example medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply, for
example microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets or touch sensor
lamps.
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
The power outlet may be located on the
instrument panel, the rear of the center
console or the in the bed.
Instrument Panel
E337927
Rear of the Center Console
E337926
197
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet
Bed
E338700
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
The power outlet indicator illuminates to
let you know the status of the system.
DescriptionIndicator Status
The power point is
working, the ignition
is on, or the vehicle
is in accessory
mode.
On
The power point is
off, the ignition is
off, or the vehicle is
not in accessory
mode.
Off
The power point is
in fault mode.
Flashing
Note: Due to different technologies used
on its construction, some devices may
exceed the capacity shown on its label
when they are initially plugged in.
Note: The power outlet temporarily turns
off power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the Watt limit. Unplug your device
and switch the ignition off. Switch the
ignition back on, but do not plug your device
back in. Let the system cool off and switch
the ignition off to reset the fault mode.
Switch the ignition back on and make sure
the indicator light remains on.
198
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet can power devices using
a 12 V outlet adapter.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
When you switch the vehicle on, you can
use the socket to power 12 V appliances
with a maximum current rating of 20 A. Do
not use the power point over the vehicle
capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse could
blow. Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points. This could result in damage
to vehicle systems. Do not hang any
accessory from the accessory plug. Always
keep the power point caps closed when
not in use. Do not insert objects other than
an accessory plug into the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
Power outlets are in the following
locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
199
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V Power Outlet
USING THE CENTER CONSOLE
WORK SURFACE - VEHICLES
WITH: COLUMN SHIFT
E313248
Push the lever on the side of the seat and
fold the seat down.
There are three different positions:
E312215
Home position.A.
Forward position.B.
Rotated position.C.
E327628
Push the latch down on the top of the work
surface to move it to the forward position.
There are 11 lockable positions.
200
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Center Console Work Surface (If Equipped)
E331800
Push the latch on the side of the work
surface to rotate it toward the driver. It can
be rotated into 11 lockable positions in 5°
increments.
Note: The work surface must be placed in
the home position when driving your vehicle.
Note: Do not drive with the center console
work surface rotated. This could interfere
with steering your vehicle.
Note: Do not adjust the steering column
when the work surface is rotated.
Note: Do not raise the seat when the work
surface is in the forward or rotated positions
to avoid damaging it.
Note: Do not use the work surface as a
handle when entering or exiting the vehicle
to avoid damaging it.
USING THE CENTER CONSOLE
WORK SURFACE - VEHICLES
WITH: CONSOLE SHIFT
To use the center console work surface,
stow the selector lever. See Stowing the
Selector Lever (page 256).
E327042
1. Press the button to release the folding
surface.
E327043
2. Open the work surface. Fold the work
surface to close.
201
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Center Console Work Surface (If Equipped)
CENTER CONSOLE WORK SURFACE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Center Console Work Surface – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Return the work surface to the home posi-
tion to clear the message.
Stow work surface before driving.
202
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Center Console Work Surface (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
The wireless accessory charger allows you
to charge one compatible Qi wireless
charging device on the charging area.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we
recommend that you consult with your
physician.
Tests on this equipment show that it
complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
• This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. There is no
guarantee that the interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, please consult the dealer.
• This product is not end-user
serviceable.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip,
for example passports, parking tickets or
credit cards, near the charging area when
charging a device. Damage may occur to
the magnetic strip.
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy
wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
heat up and degrade the charging
performance, in addition to causing error
messages and interruptions in charging.
Note: During charging, the device and the
charger could heat up, this is normal. If the
battery gets hotter than usual, the device
may stop charging.
LOCATING THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
E297549
The charging area is on the
center console or in the media
bin below the instrument panel.
CHARGING A WIRELESS
DEVICE
Place the device on the center of the
charging surface with the charging side
down. The charging stops after your device
reaches a full charge.
203
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running, or when SYNC is on.
204
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
CUP HOLDERS
Cup Holder Precautions
WARNING: Use caution when
stowing items or hot drinks in the cup
holders. Items could become loose or
spill during hard braking, acceleration or
crashes. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
Opening the Glove Compartment
Upper Glove Compartment
E310219
Push the button on the instrument panel
to open.
Lower Glove Compartment
E310218
Pull the latch to the left to open.
Locking the Glove Compartment
E310618
The glove compartment may be locked
using the key.
205
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
UNDER SEAT STORAGE (If
Equipped)
Locating the Under Seat Storage
Compartment
Front Under Seat Storage
E306120
Lift the latch to access the storage
compartment under the center seat
cushion.
Locking the Front Under Seat
Storage
E224738
1. Use the key in the remote control to
unlock.
E223578
2. Press the latch to release the cushion.
3. Lift the cushion to access the storage
compartment.
Rear Under Seat Storage
E229819
Lift the rear seat to access the under seat
storage bin.
206
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
Locking the Rear Under Seat
Storage
E229819
1. Lift the rear seat to access under seat
storage bin.
E235007
2. Lift the front and side panels to expand
and lock them in place.
E235008
3. Lock the panels in an open position.
207
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
E235009
4. To collapse, release the lever, push
down to the stowed position and fold
in the side and front panels.
Note: Make sure the storage divider is not
locked into place when collapsing. Push the
button to release the divider door and swing
to stowed position on front wall.
E224956
The locking key is in the key fob. Turn the
key to lock or unlock the cushion.
GLASSES HOLDER
Locating the Glasses Holder
E306967
The glasses holder is in the overhead
console.
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
208
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
STARTING AND STOPPING
THE ENGINE – PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not use starting
fluid, for example ether, in the air intake
system. Such fluid could cause
immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
If you stop your vehicle and leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in
(2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
IGNITION SWITCH
E252522
0
/
/
/
/
/
/
Switching the Ignition Off
Turn the key to position 0.
Switching the Ignition to
Accessory Mode
Turn the key to position I. Electrical
accessories, for example the radio, operate
without the engine running.
Switching the Ignition On
Turn the key to position II. All electrical
circuits and accessories are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
209
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting the Engine
Turn the key to position III. Release the
key when the engine starts.
PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)
E321258
Switching the Ignition Off
When the ignition is on or in accessory
mode, press the push button ignition
switch once without your foot on the brake
pedal.
Switching the Ignition to
Accessory Mode
When the ignition is off, press the push
button ignition switch once without your
foot on the brake pedal.
All electrical circuits and accessories are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
Note: Your vehicle has a battery saver
feature that shuts your vehicle off when it
detects a certain amount of battery drain,
or after approximately 30 minutes of
inactivity in accessory mode.
Starting the Engine
With the transmission in park (P), press
the brake pedal and press the push button
ignition switch. An indicator light on the
button illuminates when the ignition is on
and when the engine starts.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: A valid key must be inside your
vehicle to switch the ignition on and start
the engine.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Starting a Gasoline Engine -
Vehicles Without: Push Button
Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E322354
2. Turn the key to position III.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at
lower temperatures. It may crank for several
seconds when very cold.
210
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting a Gasoline Engine -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at
lower temperatures. It may crank for several
seconds when very cold.
Starting a Diesel Engine - Vehicles
Without: Push Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P).
E322357
1. Turn the key to position II.
Note: Wait until the glow plug indicator
turns off.
2. Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E322354
3. Turn the key to position III.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at
lower temperatures. It may crank for several
seconds when very cold.
Glow Plug Indicator
If it illuminates, wait until the
glow plug indicator turns off
before starting the engine.
Starting a Diesel Engine - Vehicles
With: Push Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
211
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at
lower temperatures. It may crank for several
seconds when very cold.
Glow Plug Indicator
The engine does not start until
the glow plug indicator turns off.
This may take several seconds
in extremely cold conditions.
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System - Vehicles Without: Push
Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E322354
2. Turn the key to position III.
Note: The green ready indicator illuminates
letting you know that your vehicle is ready
for driving. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a silent key start, the engine may not
start when your vehicle starts.
When the engine starts for the first time
on your drive, the idle speed increases, this
helps to warm up the engine. If the engine
idle speed does not slow down, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The green ready indicator illuminates
letting you know that your vehicle is ready
for driving. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a silent key start, the engine may not
start when your vehicle starts.
When the engine starts for the first time
on your drive, the idle speed increases, this
helps to warm up the engine. If the engine
idle speed does not slow down, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
Restarting the Engine After
Stopping it - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
The system allows you to start the engine
within 10 seconds of switching it off, even
if it does not detect a valid passive key.
212
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 10 seconds of switching the engine
off, fully press the brake pedal and press
the push button ignition switch. After 10
seconds, you can no longer start the engine
if the system does not detect a valid
passive key.
When you start the engine, it remains
running until you press the push button
ignition switch, even if your vehicle does
not detect a valid passive key. If you open
and close a door when the engine is
running, the system searches for a valid
passive key.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
Engine Block Heater Precautions
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power
cable and may cause an electrical short
resulting in fire, injury and property
damage.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and engine block
heater cord plug connections are free
and clear of water. This could cause an
electric shock or fire.
• If the engine block heater cord is under
the hood, do not remove the wiring
from its original location. Do not close
the hood on the extension wiring.
• Park your vehicle in a clean area, clear
of combustible materials.
• Firmly connect the engine block heater
cord and the extension cord.
• Check the extension cord for heat
anywhere when the system has been
operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Unplug and properly stow the system
before starting and driving your vehicle.
The protective cover seals the
terminals of the engine block heater
cord plug when not in use.
• Check the engine block heater system
for proper operation before winter.
213
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
How Does the Engine Block Heater
Work
The engine block heater warms the engine
coolant. This allows the climate control
system to quickly respond. The equipment
includes a heater element installed in the
engine block and a wire harness. You can
connect the system to a grounded
220-240 volt AC electrical source.
Note: The engine block heater is most
effective when outdoor temperatures are
below 0°F (-18°C).
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the engine block heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary - Vehicles
Without: Push Button Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle
speed.
E322405
4. Turn the key to position 0.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary - Vehicles
With: Push Button Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle
speed.
E321258
4. Press the push button ignition switch.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving - Vehicles
Without: Push Button Start
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
E322405
1. Turn the key to position 0.
214
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
3. Shift into park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving - Vehicles With:
Push Button Start
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
E321258
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch until the engine stops, or press
it three times within two seconds.
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
3. Shift into park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP
What Is Automatic Engine Stop
Automatic engine stop is a feature that
switches the engine off if it has been idling
for an extended period to help you save
fuel.
How Does Automatic Engine Stop
Work
Automatic engine stop turns the engine
off. The ignition also turns off in order to
save battery power. Before the engine
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down. If you do not intervene
within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down.
Another message appears in the
information display to inform you that the
engine has shut down in order to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as you normally do.
Switching Automatic Engine Stop
On and Off - Vehicles With: 4.2
Inch Screen
1. Using the information display controls
on the steering wheel, select Settings.
2. Select Vehicle Settings.
3. Switch 30min Max Idle on or off.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. If you switch it
off, it turns on each time you switch the
ignition on.
Switching Automatic Engine Stop
On and Off - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen
1. Press the menu button on the steering
wheel to enter the information display
main menu.
2. Select Settings.
215
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
3. Switch Auto Engine Off on or off.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. If you switch it
off, it turns on each time you switch the
ignition on.
Overriding Automatic Engine Stop
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic engine shutdown feature.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns
on at the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the
30-second countdown has expired by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
• Pressing the OK or RESET button
during the countdown.
ACCESSING THE PASSIVE KEY
BACKUP POSITION
If you are unable to start your vehicle,
locate the backup slot in one of two
positions:
Type One
E312216
Type Two
E269950
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Type
One, make sure to place the key properly
into the backup slot.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Type
Two, make sure the buttons are facing the
rear of the vehicle and the key ring up. Place
the key into the backup slot.
With the key in the backup slot, press the
brake pedal, then press the push button
ignition switch to start your vehicle.
STARTING AND STOPPING
THE ENGINE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Warning Lamps
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If it illuminates when the engine
is running, the on-board
diagnostics system is detecting
a malfunction of the vehicle emission
control system.
216
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
If it flashes, engine misfire could be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration,
and have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Powertrain Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when the engine
is running, this indicates a
powertrain or four-wheel drive
fault. If it flashes when you are driving,
immediately reduce the vehicle speed.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration,
and have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
If both lamps illuminate when the engine
is running, stop your vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so. Continuing to drive your
vehicle could cause reduced power or the
engine to stop. Switch the ignition off and
attempt to restart the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays if you exceed the starting time limit. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for 15 minutes. If you cannot start
the engine after 15 minutes passes, have your vehicle imme-
diately checked.
Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays if you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly
coded key. The system has detected a fault that requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Starting System Fault
Displays if the system does not detect a valid passive key.No Key Detected
217
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Gasoline, Vehicles Without: Push
Button Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting is optimized
to minimize vehicle emissions and
maximize cabin comfort and fuel
economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the
engine for a limited amount of time
before the starting system temporarily
disables. If you exceed the starting
time limit, a message may appear and
you cannot attempt to start the engine
for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving
characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your
vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for
approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you
reconnect it. This is because the engine
management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine after 3
attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the
following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is
applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
E322354
3. Turn the key to position III and wait
until the engine stops cranking.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
5. Turn the key to position III.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Gasoline, Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting is optimized
to minimize vehicle emissions and
maximize cabin comfort and fuel
economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the
engine for a limited amount of time
before the starting system temporarily
disables. If you exceed the starting
time limit, a message may appear and
you cannot attempt to start the engine
for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving
characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your
vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for
approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you
reconnect it. This is because the engine
management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
218
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine after 3
attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the
following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is
applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The engine cranks for a short period
of time and then it stops.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
E321258
5. Press the push button ignition switch.
Why does the system not detect a
passive key?
If the system does not detect a passive
key and you are unable to start the
engine, insert the passive key into the
backup position and press the push
button ignition switch to start the
engine. See Accessing the Passive
Key Backup Position (page 216).
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Diesel, Vehicles Without: Push
Button Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting is optimized
to minimize vehicle emissions and
maximize cabin comfort and fuel
economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the
engine for a limited amount of time
before the starting system temporarily
disables. If you exceed the starting
time limit, a message may appear and
you cannot attempt to start the engine
for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving
characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your
vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for
approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you
reconnect it. This is because the engine
management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine, do the
following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is
applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P) or neutral (N).
219
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E322354
2. Turn the key to position III until the
engine starts.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Diesel, Vehicles With: Push Button
Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting is optimized
to minimize vehicle emissions and
maximize cabin comfort and fuel
economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the
engine for a limited amount of time
before the starting system temporarily
disables. If you exceed the starting
time limit, a message may appear and
you cannot attempt to start the engine
for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving
characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your
vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for
approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you
reconnect it. This is because the engine
management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine, do the
following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is
applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P) or neutral (N).
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch
until the engine starts.
Why does the system not detect a
passive key?
If the system does not detect a passive
key and you are unable to start the
engine, insert the passive key into the
backup position and press the push
button ignition switch to start the
engine. See Accessing the Passive
Key Backup Position (page 216).
220
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WHAT IS A HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE
A hybrid vehicle has an electric motor and
a high voltage battery combined with a
gasoline engine.
HOW DOES A HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE WORK
The hybrid vehicle combines electric and
gasoline propulsion to provide optimal
performance and improved efficiency.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
DRIVING CHARACTERISTICS
The gasoline engine starts and stops to
provide power when required and to save
fuel when not needed. When coasting at
low speeds, coming to a stop or standing,
the gas engine normally shuts down and
your vehicle operates in electric-only
mode.
Conditions that may cause the gasoline
engine to start or remain running include:
• Considerable vehicle acceleration.
• Driving uphill.
• The high voltage battery charge level
is low.
• Heating or cooling the vehicle interior
in high or low outside temperatures.
• The gasoline engine is below normal
operating temperature.
• Towing a trailer.
• Certain selectable drive modes could
cause the engine to run. See Selecting
a Drive Mode (page 328). Use of the
paddle shifters while in drive (D) could
cause the engine to run.
Your hybrid vehicle also comes with
standard hydraulic braking and
regenerative braking. Regenerative braking
is performed by your transmission and
captures brake energy and stores it in the
high voltage battery.
You could also notice that your engine
continues to run instead of shutting off
during extended downhill driving. The
engine stays on during this engine braking
but is not using any fuel.
You could also hear a slight whine or
whistle when operating your vehicle. This
is the normal operation of the electric
motor in the hybrid system.
LOW ENGINE USE MODE
What is Low Engine Use Mode
Low engine use mode maintains proper
engine lubrication at sufficient temperature
and activates when you drive your vehicle
with limited engine operation.
How Does Low Engine Use Mode
Work
When in low engine use mode, your vehicle
runs the engine as necessary. When low
engine use mode begins, a message
appears in the information display. If low
engine use mode does not complete
before you switch your vehicle off, it
continues the next time you start your
vehicle and the message reappears.
Note: Cold temperatures affect the engine
warm up time and the low engine use mode
may operate more frequently.
Note: An oil change is not required but gives
you the option of not running a low engine
use cycle. Resetting the oil life monitoring
system suspends the low engine use mode.
221
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information (If Equipped)
Low Engine Use Mode Limitations
Cold temperatures affect the engine warm
up time and the low engine use mode
could operate more frequently.
An oil change is not required but gives you
the option of not running a low engine use
cycle. Resetting the oil life monitoring
system suspends the low engine use mode.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION INDICATORS
E293827
When you start your vehicle, a
green READY indicator light
appears in the instrument cluster
letting you know that your vehicle is ready
for driving.
The engine may not start because your
vehicle has a silent key start feature. This
fuel saving feature allows your vehicle to
be ready to drive without requiring the gas
engine to be running.
The indicator remains on when your vehicle
is on, whether the engine is running or not,
to indicate your vehicle is capable of
movement using the electric motor, gas
engine or both.
Typically, the engine does not start unless
the vehicle is cold, a climate control
change is requested or you press the
accelerator pedal.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Information – Frequently Asked
Questions
How long is the high voltage battery
system designed to last?
The high voltage battery system is
designed to last the life of your vehicle.
Does the high voltage battery require
maintenance?
The high voltage battery does not
require maintenance.
What should I do if the vehicle runs out
of fuel and the high voltage battery is
out of charge?
Refuel and start your vehicle normally.
The engine will recharge the high
voltage battery.
Why does the engine sometimes start
at key-on?
The vehicle's computer will determine
if an engine start is required at key-on.
It starts the engine when necessary for
cabin heating, windshield defrost, or if
the outside temperature is low.
Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and
how will it affect my fuel economy?
Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 (15%
ethanol, 85% gasoline) fuel, but you
may notice slightly reduced fuel
economy because ethanol contains
less energy per gallon than gasoline.
Your hybrid vehicle is not designed to
use E85 (85% ethanol).
222
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information (If Equipped)
Why does it take a long time before the
engine shuts down?
There are several reasons the engine
stays on for an extended amount of
time when you first start it. One
common reason is to make sure that
the emissions components are warm
enough to minimize tailpipe emission.
As the climate gets cooler, the
engine-on time is extended.
Why does my engine stay on when it is
extremely cold outside?
In order to make sure that the climate
control system can begin heating the
cabin or defrosting the windshield as
soon as a driver requests it, the engine
coolant temperature has to be kept
sufficiently hot. Keeping the engine on
is required to maintain the correct
coolant temperature.
223
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information (If Equipped)
WHAT IS AUTO-START-STOP
Auto Start-Stop
The system is designed to help reduce fuel
consumption and CO
2
emissions by
stopping the engine when it is idling, for
example at traffic lights.
AUTO-START-STOP
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
SWITCHING AUTO-START-
STOP ON AND OFF
The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on.
Press the button to switch the
system off.
Note: OFF illuminates in the switch.
Note: Deactivating the system using the
button lasts only one key cycle.
Press the button again to switch the
system back on.
Note: The system turns off if it detects a
malfunction. If the system malfunctions,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Stop your vehicle, keep your foot on the
brake pedal and the transmission in drive
(D).
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine stops.
RESTARTING THE ENGINE
Release the brake pedal or press the
accelerator pedal.
A message appears in the information
display if the system requires you to take
action.
AUTO-START-STOP
INDICATORS
WARNING: The system may
require the engine to automatically
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes
amber. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop indicator
illuminates green when the
engine stops. It flashes amber
and a message appears when you need to
take action.
E146361
The Auto-Start-Stop indicator
illuminates gray with a
strikethrough when the system
is not available.
224
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto-Start-Stop (If Equipped)
Note: You can display the reason why the
system is not available in the information
display.
AUTO-START-STOP –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Auto-Start-Stop – Information
Messages
A message appears in the information
display if the system requires you to take
action.
ActionConditionMessage
Press the brake pedal to
restart the engine.
The system needs to restart
the engine but requires your
confirmation.
Auto StartStop Press Brake
to Start Engine
Press the brake pedal or the
accelerator pedal to restart
the engine.
The system needs to restart
the engine but requires your
confirmation.
Auto StartStop Press a
Pedal to Start Engine
225
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto-Start-Stop (If Equipped)
Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does the engine not always
stop when I expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way
that complements other vehicle systems,
allowing them to operate at optimum
performance.
The system does not stop the engine if:
• The driver door is open.
• Your vehicle is at high altitude.
• The heated windshield is on.
• The engine is warming up.
• The outside temperature is too low or
too high.
• The battery charge is low.
• The battery temperature is outside the
optimal operating range.
• The engine is required to run to
maintain interior climate and reduce
fogging.
Why does the engine sometimes
restart when I do not expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way
that complements other vehicle systems,
allowing them to operate at optimum
performance.
The system restarts the engine if:
• You switch the heated windshield on.
• You switch maximum defrost on.
• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
neutral.
• The engine is required to run to
maintain adequate brake system
assistance.
• The engine is required to run to
maintain interior climate and reduce
fogging.
Can I permanently switch the
system off?
No. The system plays an important role in
reducing the fuel consumption and the CO
2
emissions.
Will the frequent engine starts
cause parts to wear out?
Your vehicle has an enhanced battery and
starter motor that are designed for the
increased number of engine starts.
226
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto-Start-Stop (If Equipped)
FUEL AND REFUELING
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Switch the engine off before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses, if worn, flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Selecting the Correct Fuel - Flex
Fuel – Ethanol
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
identifiers:
• Yellow fuel filler cap.
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
• Yellow fuel filler housing.
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
door.
227
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E161513
Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded
gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2
octane rating of 87 or regular unleaded
gasoline blended with a maximum of 85%
ethanol (E85).
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
(page 375).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance.
For additional information, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl, which is a
manganese-based fuel additive, will impair
engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
Selecting the Correct Fuel -
Gasoline
E161513
Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded
gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2
octane rating of 87.
228
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
(page 375).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance.
For additional information, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl, which is a
manganese-based fuel additive, will impair
engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
Selecting the Correct Fuel for Cold
Weather - Diesel
Choosing the Right Fuel: Vehicles
Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel Fuel Is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands And Other Locales)
Note: Your Warranty will not cover damage
caused by using an improper type of fuel or
fuel additive.
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with
diesel fuel under any circumstances.
Blending used oil with the fuel significantly
increases your vehicle’s exhaust emissions
and reduce engine life due to increased
internal wear.
We recommend Top Tier diesel fuel where
available to help minimize engine deposits
and maintain optimal vehicle and engine
performance.
For additional information, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
229
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
You should use ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel
designated as number 1-D or 2-D with a
maximum of 15-ppm sulfur in your diesel
vehicle. You can operate your vehicle on
diesel fuels containing up to 20%
biodiesel, also known as B20. These fuels
should meet the ASTM D975 diesel or the
ASTM D7467 B6-B20 biodiesel industry
specifications. Outside of North America,
use fuels meeting EN590 or equivalent
local market standard.
Using low-sulfur diesel fuel
(16-500 ppm) or high-sulfur
diesel fuel (greater than 500
ppm) in your diesel engine will cause
certain emission components to
malfunction which could also cause the
service engine soon light to illuminate
indicating an emissions-related concern.
Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
temperature. For best results at
temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), we
recommend using a diesel fuel which has
been seasonally adjusted for the ambient
conditions.
Choosing the Right Fuel: Vehicles
Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel Fuel Is Not Required
For the engine to operate reliably on
low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the
engine must be a factory-built high-sulfur
engine (available as a dealer order option
for select markets) or an ultra-low sulfur
diesel fuel configured engine that has been
retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using
authorized dealer service parts. Failure to
use retrofit components other than those
available through your authorized dealer
results in coolant system damage, engine
overheating, selective catalyst reduction
system or diesel particulate filter damage
and possible base engine damage.
Use only a diesel engine configured for use
with high-sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
than 15 ppm. Using low-sulfur diesel fuel
(16–500 ppm) or high-sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
designed to use only ultra-low sulfur diesel
fuel could result in damage to engine
emission control devices and the after
treatment system, potentially rendering
the vehicle inoperable.
Vehicles with engines configured for use
with high-sulfur diesel fuel are only
available for sale in countries where
ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
available or mandated by the government.
Vehicles originally sold in an ultra-low
sulfur diesel fuel market that are
subsequently exported to non-ultra low
sulfur diesel fuel markets will need to be
retrofitted at the customer’s expense using
Ford authorized dealer service parts in
order to be reliably operated on non-ultra
low sulfur diesel fuel.
Biodiesel
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with
gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could
cause an explosion.
Note: Do not use home heating oil,
agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste
cooking greases, biodiesel greater than 20%
or any diesel not intended for highway use.
Damage to the fuel injection system, engine
and exhaust catalyst, and diesel particulate
filter can occur if you use an improper fuel.
Red dye is used to identify fuels intended
for agricultural and non-highway use.
You can operate your vehicle on diesel
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20.
230
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted
product from renewable fuel sources, such
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste
cooking greases.
To help achieve acceptable engine
performance and durability when using
biodiesel in your vehicle:
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less.
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality
that complies with industry standards.
• Follow the recommended service
maintenance intervals. See General
Maintenance Information (page 602).
• Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
tank for more than 1 month.
• Consider changing brands or reducing
biodiesel content if you have cold
temperature fuel gelling issues or a
frequently appearing LOW FUEL
PRESSURE message.
Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater
than 20% can cause damage to your
vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
after-treatment hardware (exhaust
catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
Concentrations greater than 20% can also
cause fuel filter restrictions that could
result in a lack of power or damage to fuel
system components, including fuel pump
and fuel injector failures.
We recommend SAE 5W-40 oil for fuels
with greater than 5% biodiesel (B5). For
more information about oil change
intervals and other maintenance when
operating on biodiesel. See Special
Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance (page 614).
Look for a label on the fuel pump to
confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
in diesel fuel. Ask the service station
attendant to confirm the biodiesel content
of diesel fuel, if you do not see a label on
the fuel pump.
If you plan to park or store your vehicle for
more than 1 month, then you should empty
your vehicle fuel tank of biodiesel fuel. You
should fill the tank with a pure
petroleum-based diesel fuel and run your
vehicle for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
damage fuel system seals and plastics and
corrode steel parts.
During cold weather, if you have problems
operating on biodiesel, you may need to
use diesel fuel with lower biodiesel
content, try another brand or discontinue
the use of biodiesel.
Diesel Fuel Additives
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you
use a high-quality diesel fuel that conforms
to ASTM industry specifications.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine.
Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an
equivalent cetane booster additive if you
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use
Motorcraft® anti-gel and performance
improver or an equivalent additive if there
is fuel gelling.
Do not use alcohol-based additives to
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol
additives could result in damage to the fuel
injectors and system.
Your Warranty may not cover repairs
needed to correct the effects of using an
aftermarket product that does not meet
our specifications in your fuel.
231
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline
We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER
FUNNEL
Regular Cab
The fuel filler funnel is behind the
right-hand front seat.
Super Cab/Crew Cab
The fuel filler funnel is under the second
row right-hand rear seat.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Locating
the Fuel Filler Funnel (page 232).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
232
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
E157452
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel add a
minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart
the engine.
Note: You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Refueling Your Vehicle - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
233
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when
the fuel pump nozzle automatically
shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle
resting on the fuel tank filler pipe.
E327438
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
A when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position B can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
234
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown. Refer to A for left hand
drive or B for right hand drive.
E119081
6. When the pump shuts off, wait 5
seconds, then raise the fuel pump
nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling Your Vehicle - Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when
the fuel pump nozzle automatically
shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. When you stop your vehicle, shift into
park (P) and switch the ignition off.
235
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E293006
2. Press the button on the left side of the
instrument panel next to the headlamp
switch to open the fuel filler door. The
fuel filler door can take up to 15
seconds to open before you can insert
a fuel filler nozzle.
3. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
4. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle
resting on the fuel tank filler pipe.
E327438
5. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
A when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position B can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E206912
6. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown. Refer to A for left hand
drive or B for right hand drive.
E119081
7. When the pump shuts off, wait 5
seconds, then raise the fuel pump
nozzle and slowly remove it.
8. Fully close the fuel filler door.
236
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: To close the fuel filler door, press the
center rear edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
Complete the refueling process within 20
minutes. If 20 minutes elapses, press the
button on the left side of the instrument
panel again. Fuel pump nozzle automatic
shut off could occur if you do not press the
button on the left side instrument panel.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle immediately checked.
Manually Opening the Fuel Filler
Door - Excluding: Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
E206911
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
D
Manually Opening the Fuel Filler
Door - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)
Note: The transmission must be in park (P)
or neutral (N).
To manually open the fuel door do the
following:
237
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E333731
1. Retrieve the emergency opening tool.
Note: The emergency opening tool is with
the jack and tool bag. See Changing a Flat
Tire (page 516).
E333736
2. Insert the emergency opening tool in
the position shown and gently pry the
fuel door open.
Note: Do not press the fuel filler door
release button if the emergency opening
tool has been used.
E333737
Using the emergency opening tool can
cause the tappet to temporarily dislodge
from the fuel filler door and remain
attached to the fuel filler door opening. If
you press the fuel filler door release button
after using the emergency opening tool,
locate the tappet and reinsert it into the
fuel door.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY -
EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
238
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL TANK CAPACITY -
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
FUEL AND REFUELING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuel and Refueling – Warning
Lamps
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Fuel and Refueling – Information
Messages
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel
(page 232). This action should dislodge
any debris that may be preventing the
fuel tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
239
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WHAT IS THE DIESEL
PARTICULATE FILTER
The diesel particulate filter is part of your
vehicle's emissions system and filters
harmful diesel particulates from the
exhaust gas.
HOW DOES THE DIESEL
PARTICULATE FILTER WORK
The diesel particulate filter reduces carbon
emissions by trapping exhaust particles
before they reach the tailpipe. The system
must periodically clean the exhaust
particles that gather inside the filter. This
is carried out in three ways, passive
regeneration, active regeneration and
manual regeneration.
Passive Regeneration
In passive regeneration, the normal
exhaust system temperature cleans the
filter by oxidizing the soot. Cleaning occurs
during normal vehicle operating conditions
due to driving patterns.
Active Regeneration
Once the diesel particulate filter is full,
active regeneration raises the exhaust
temperature to eliminate the particles.
During cleaning, the particles convert to
harmless gasses.
When the engine control module detects
that the diesel particulate filter is nearly
full of particulates, and you are not
operating your vehicle in a manner to allow
effective regeneration, messages appear
in the information display as a reminder
for you to drive your vehicle in order to
clean the diesel particulate filter. If you
drive your vehicle in a manner to allow
effective regeneration, the information
display shows a cleaning exhaust filter
message.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not park or idle your
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The regeneration
process creates very high exhaust gas
temperatures and the exhaust will
radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after
you have switched the engine off. This is
a potential fire hazard.
WARNING: When the Exhaust
Filter Cleaning message appears in the
information display, do not park near
flammable materials, vapors or
structures until filter cleaning is
complete.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter or the diesel
particulate filter. The diesel oxidation
catalytic converter and the diesel
particulate filter heat up to very high
temperatures after only a short period
of engine operation and remain hot after
you switch the engine off.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration
process.
240
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter (If Equipped)
Failure to perform active or manual
regeneration when instructed could result
in a clogged diesel particulate filter. If the
diesel particulate filter fills beyond the
regeneration threshold, your vehicle
disables the ability for active and manual
regeneration. This could result in
irreversible damage your vehicle Warranty
may not cover.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
REQUIREMENTS
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
its correct function.
If your journeys meet one of the following
conditions:
• You drive only short distances.
• You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.
You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and observe
speed limits and road conditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
MANUAL REGENERATION
What Is Diesel Particulate Filter
Manual Regeneration
Diesel particulate filter manual
regeneration allows you to manually start
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter
at idle to clean the filter.
Note: If you are not sure whether your
vehicle has this feature, contact your
authorized dealer.
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Precautions
WARNING: Stay clear of the
exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot
exhaust gases can burn you badly.
You may not be able to use manual
regeneration if the service engine soon
warning lamp appears in the information
display.
Note: During the use of manual
regeneration, you may observe a light
amount of white smoke. This is normal.
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Requirements
You can use the manual regeneration
feature when a message appears in the
information display and you are not able
to drive in a manner that allows effective
automatic active regeneration or if you
choose to manually start the regeneration
of the diesel particulate filter while the
vehicle is idle.
241
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter (If Equipped)
Before you start manual regeneration, do
the following:
• Shift into park (P) and apply the
parking brake, on stable, level ground.
• Park your vehicle outside of any
structure.
• Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m)
away from any obstructions and away
from materials that can easily combust
or melt, for example paper, leaves,
petroleum products, fuels, plastics and
other dry organic material.
• Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8
tank of fuel.
• Make sure all fluids are at proper levels.
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Limitations
You cannot use manual regeneration until
the diesel particulate filter load percentage
has reached 100%. The diesel particulate
filter load percentage fluctuates up and
down when driving your vehicle due to
active and passive regenerations.
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system.
Aftermarket devices or modifications to
the exhaust system may reduce the
effectiveness of the exhaust system as
well as cause damage to the exhaust
system or engine. This may also degrade
vehicle performance and could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Starting Diesel Particulate Filter
Manual Regeneration
Start with your vehicle engine and when it
has reached the normal operating
temperature, press the information display
control button on the steering wheel. See
Instrument Cluster Display (page 151).
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at
saturation, a message requesting
permission to initiate filter cleaning
appears in the information display. See
What Is the Diesel Particulate Filter
(page 240). Answer yes to this prompt and
then follow the next prompts regarding
exhaust position required to initiate
manual regeneration. Be sure to
understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished. You can also drive to
clean the filter.
When the system is at the point
of oversaturation, the service
engine warning lamp illuminates
and a message appears in the information
display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning.
You must have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Once manual regeneration starts, engine
speed increases to approximately 1600
rpm and the cooling fan speed increases.
You will hear a change in audible sound
due to engine speed and cooling fan speed
increases.
It is not necessary to open the hood on the
engine compartment. Once manual
regeneration completes, the engine speed
returns to normal idling. The exhaust
system remains very hot for several
minutes even after regeneration is
complete. Do not reposition the vehicle
over materials that could burn until the
242
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter (If Equipped)
exhaust system has had sufficient time to
cool. Depending on the amount of soot
collected by the diesel particulate filter,
ambient temperature and altitude, manual
regeneration lasts approximately 30
minutes.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
– TROUBLESHOOTING
Diesel Particulate Filter – Warning
Lamps
If filter service is required, the
engine control system warning
lamp illuminates in the
information display.
If there are any issues with the
diesel particulate filter system,
the engine control system
warning lamp and a service
engine soon warning lamp
illuminate to inform you that
your vehicle requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Diesel Particulate Filter – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine
actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel
Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust
soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust
temperature will return to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL.
Exhaust Filter Cleaning
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the message turns off.
Exhaust Filter Over-
loaded Drive to Clean
Exhaust Filter Over-
loaded Clean Now
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the message turns off.
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Drive to Clean Now
Your diesel particulate filter is clean.Exhaust Filter Drive
Complete
243
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only).Exhaust Filter Cleaned
The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only).Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Stopped
You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Ignoring this warning message could lead to reduced drivability
and customer expense, including damage to the diesel
particulate filter. Your new vehicle warranty may not cover
this damage.
Exhaust Filter Over Limit
Service Now
244
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM
The selective catalytic reduction system
helps reduce emission levels of oxides of
nitrogen from the exhaust system.
HOW DOES THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM WORK
The selective catalytic reduction system
injects diesel exhaust fluid into the exhaust
system to enable correct selective catalytic
reduction system function.
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Keep diesel exhaust
fluid out of reach of children. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In
case of contact with your eyes, flush
immediately with water and get prompt
medical attention. In case of contact
with your skin, clean immediately with
soap and water. If you swallow any
diesel exhaust fluid, drink plenty of
water, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Only refill the diesel
exhaust fluid tank in a well ventilated
area. When you remove the diesel
exhaust fluid tank filler cap or a diesel
exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia
vapors may escape. Ammonia vapors
can be irritating to skin, eyes and mucous
membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapors
can cause burning to the eyes, throat and
nose and cause coughing and watery
eyes.
WARNING: Diesel exhaust fluid
must be refilled when low or replaced
when contaminated or your vehicle
speed becomes limited to 50 mph
(80 km/h). In these conditions, drive with
caution and refill diesel exhaust fluid
immediately. If the diesel exhaust fluid
becomes empty or contaminated and
fluid is not replaced, your vehicle
becomes limited to engine idle only once
stopped. In these conditions, be cautious
where you stop your vehicle because you
may not be able to drive long distances
or maintain highway speeds until you
refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid.
WARNING: Tampering with or
disabling the selective catalytic
reduction system results in severe
vehicle performance limitation including
eventual speed limiting to 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
fuel tank. This can cause damage that your
vehicle Warranty may not cover.
Selective catalytic reduction systems are
sensitive to contamination of the diesel
exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the
fluid is important to avoid system
malfunctions. If you remove or drain the
diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the
same fluid to refill the tank. The system
has a sensor to monitor fluid quality.
245
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
Driving without refilling, replacing
contaminated diesel exhaust fluid, or
having the selective catalytic reduction
system repaired results in the following
actions as required by the California Air
Resources Board (CARB) and the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
• Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message
appears in the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
refilling or replacing contaminated
diesel exhaust fluid causes the engine
to enter an idle-only condition. This
only occurs upon vehicle refueling,
vehicle idling in park for 1 hour, or
engine shutdown for 10 minutes or
more and is indicated by a message in
the information display indicating
required actions to resume normal
operation. It is required to add a
minimum of 1.0 gal (3.8 L) of diesel
exhaust fluid to the tank to exit the
idle-only condition, but your vehicle is
still in the speed-limiting mode until
you refill the tank completely.
Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only
condition, normal vehicle operation resumes
when you refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank
or repair the contaminated system. If the
system is contaminated or inoperative, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS
E163354
Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at
an authorized dealer, or contact roadside
assistance for help in finding a retailer that
sells diesel exhaust fluid.
Note: Non-certified diesel exhaust fluid use
can cause damage that your Warranty may
not cover
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
GUIDELINES
• Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable,
non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble
liquid.
• In order for the system to operate
correctly you must maintain the diesel
exhaust fluid level.
• Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
• Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive.
246
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
• Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on
painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic
components. Immediately wipe away
any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled
with a damp cloth and water. If it has
already crystallized, use warm water
and a sponge.
• Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid
bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could
cause damage to interior components
or release an ammonia odor inside your
vehicle.
• Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid
container once it is emptied.
• Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct
sunlight and in temperatures between
23–68°F (-5–20°C).
• The system has a diesel exhaust fluid
quality sensor. Dilution of diesel
exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid
in the selective catalytic reduction
system leads to a diesel exhaust fluid
system fault, eventually leading to the
vehicle only operating in idle-only
mode.
• Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
water or any other liquid.
FILLING THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM TANK
Filling the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Tank in Cold
Weather
Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the
ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
Your vehicle has a preheating system
which allows diesel exhaust fluid to
operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not
use your vehicle for an extended period
when the ambient temperature is below
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid
freezes it may cause damage that your
Warranty will not cover.
Filling the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Tank Using a
Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using
a fuel station pump is similar to refueling
your vehicle.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
E328788
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap.
Note: The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a
blue filler cap.
247
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
3. Fully insert the diesel exhaust fluid
pump nozzle.
E328783
4. Operate the diesel exhaust fluid pump
nozzle within the area shown.
Note: The pump nozzle shuts off when the
tank is full.
5. Slightly raise the diesel exhaust fluid
pump nozzle and then slowly remove
it.
6. Replace the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you
feel a strong resistance and it clicks.
Filling the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Tank Using a
Portable Container
The following procedure applies to
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar
fluid containers. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap.
3. Place the spout on to the container and
tighten it until you feel a strong
resistance.
E328788
4. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap.
Note: The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a
blue filler cap.
5. Insert the spout into the filler neck until
the seal on the spout fully seats.
6. Pour the fluid into the tank.
Note: The fluid stops flowing when the tank
is full.
7. Return the container to the vertical
position slightly below the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck.
8. Allow any fluid remaining in the spout
to drain back into the container.
9. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck.
10. Replace the diesel exhaust fluid tank
cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel
a strong resistance and it clicks.
11. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid container and replace
the cap.
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in
the container retain it for later use. The
spout is reusable. Wash the spout with
clean water prior to storage. Do not use the
diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
fluid.
248
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
CHECKING THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM STATUS
The information display shows a series of
messages about the amount of diesel
exhaust fluid available. A systems check
displays messages indicating the amount
of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays
a warning message indicating the
approximate distance remaining as the
fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears
empty. See Selective Catalytic
Reduction System – Information
Messages (page 249).
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
For filling information please refer to the
Capacities and Specifications section of
the owner's manual. See Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Capacity and Specification (page
249).
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System – Warning Lamps
E163176
As the diesel exhaust fluid level
nears empty, the warning
symbol displays and a series of
tones and messages starting at 500 mi
(800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust
fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and
messages continue until you refill the
diesel exhaust fluid tank.
The warning lamp illuminates and a
message appears in the information
display if the system becomes
contaminated or inoperative.
Selective Catalytic Reduction System – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining
diesel exhaust fluid. Refill as soon as possible.
DEF Level Range: XX mi/
km Refill Now
Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top
speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must
replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification (page 249).
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH / km/
h in XX mi/km
Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed
will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel
exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and Specification (page
249).
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/
h Upon Restart
249
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
ActionMessage
The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the
diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and Specific-
ation (page 249).
DEF Level Low Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/
h
The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust
fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capa-
city and Specification (page 249).
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled Soon
The vehicle will enter into an idle only mode. You must
replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification (page 249).
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled See Manual
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed
distance and count down from this point. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h in XX
mi/km
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h Upon
Restart
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed is limited. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
DEF Fault Engine Idled
Soon
250
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
WHAT IS THE CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
The catalytic converter is part of your
vehicle's emissions system and filters
harmful pollutants from the exhaust gas.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short
period of engine operation and stays hot
after the engine is switched off.
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 439).
• Use the correct fuel. See Fuel and
Refueling (page 227).
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Catalytic Converter – Warning
Lamps
Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics
system that monitors the emission control
system. If any of the following warning
lamps illuminate, this may indicate that
the on-board diagnostics system has
detected an emission control system
malfunction.
Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause
reduced power or the engine to stop.
Failure to respond to a warning lamp may
cause damage that your vehicle Warranty
may not cover. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
251
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Catalytic Converter
WHAT IS THE HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY
The high voltage battery is a highly
sophisticated lithium ion battery system,
used to store electrified propulsion energy
to power the vehicle.
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: This battery pack
should only be serviced by an authorized
electric vehicle technician. Improper
handling can result in personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not touch the
electronic ignition system parts after you
have switched the ignition on or when
the engine is running. The system
operates at high voltage. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Keep your hands and
clothing clear of the engine cooling fan.
252
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property
damage.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
POSITIONS
Park (P)
This position locks the driveline and
prevents the wheels from turning. Come
to a complete stop before putting your
vehicle into and out of park (P).
The electric parking brake could apply
when you shift to park (P) without the
brake pedal fully pressed. The electric
parking brake applies when you shift to
park (P) on large slopes. The electric
parking brake releases with the drive away
release function or manually as described
in the Releasing the Electric Parking Brake
section. See Electric Parking Brake
(page 276).
Note: A warning tone sounds if you open
the driver door and you have not shifted the
transmission selector to park (P).
Reverse (R)
WARNING: Move the transmission
selector lever to reverse (R) only when
your vehicle is stationary and the engine
is at idle speed.
This position allows your vehicle to move
backward. Come to a complete stop
before shifting into and out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
WARNING: In neutral (N) your
vehicle has the ability to roll freely. If you
intend to leave your vehicle, make sure
you apply the parking brake.
This position allows your vehicle to roll
free. Hold the brake pedal down when in
this position.
Note: You can start your vehicle in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position, and
allows automatic upshifts and downshifts
through all available gears.
253
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
Manual (M)
To select manual mode press the (M)
button on the shifter.
Note: In order to activate manual mode
your vehicle must be in drive (D).
This position allows you to change gears
up or down as preferred using + or -
buttons on the shifter lever.
To return to the normal drive (D) position,
press the (M) button again to exit manual
mode.
SHIFTING YOUR VEHICLE INTO
GEAR
Center Console Shifter
1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Depress the front button on the shifter
and move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop.
4. Depress the front button on the shifter
and move the gearshift lever and
securely latch it in park (P).
Column Shifter
1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop.
4. Pull lever toward the driver and move
the gearshift lever and securely latch
it in park (P).
MANUALLY SHIFTING GEARS
Shifting Using the Buttons on the
Selector Lever
Pressing the manual (M) button on the
shifter allows you to select the gear you
prefer. Only the current gear displays. Press
the + button to upshift or the – button to
downshift. Return the transmission to a
different gearshift position to deactivate
manual control or press manual (M).
Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic
transmission gearshift lever. This gives you
the ability to change gears up or down,
without a clutch, as preferred.
Note: To prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which could cause it to
stall, SelectShift still makes some
downshifts if it determines that you have
not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift makes some downshifts for you,
it still allows you to downshift at any time
if it determines that damage to the engine
from over-revving does not occur.
Note: SelectShift does not automatically
upshift, even if the engine is approaching
the RPM limit. Shift manually by pressing
the + button.
Note: Engine damage could occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
254
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
Center Console Shifter
E311242
Column Shifter
E327267
TEMPORARY NEUTRAL MODE
What Is Temporary Neutral Mode
This mode keeps your vehicle in neutral
(N) when you switch your vehicle off. Use
this mode if you exit your vehicle or switch
your vehicle off at an automatic car wash.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: Automatic return to park (P) is
delayed when your vehicle is in this mode.
See What Is Automatic Return to Park
(P) (page 256).
Temporary Neutral Mode
Limitations
Your vehicle could shift to park (P) after
30 minutes, or when the vehicle battery
charge level is low. Prolonged use of this
mode can cause the vehicle battery to run
out of charge.
Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in vehicle damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Power your vehicle on.
2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift into neutral (N).
Note: An instructional message appears.
5. Press the manual (M) button.
Note: A confirmation message appears
when your vehicle enters the mode.
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll.
7. Switch your vehicle off.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: The neutral (N) indicator on the
transmission selector may flash in this
mode.
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P), or power your
vehicle on and shift into drive (D) or
reverse (R).
255
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
USING PROGRESSIVE RANGE
SELECTION
Progressive range selection gives you the
ability to lock out gears from the automatic
shifting range. This could provide you with
an improved driving experience by reducing
transmission shifts, for example, in slippery
conditions or steep slopes.
With the transmission in drive (D), press
the - button to begin to switch the feature
on.
Press the - button again to continue locking
out higher gears. Beginning with the highest
gear, the instrument cluster will indicate
the current gear and highest gear available.
For example, press the - button twice to
lock out 10th and 9th gears.
Note: The instrument cluster will indicate
the current gear and highest gear available.
Press the + button to unlock gears to allow
the transmission to shift to higher gears.
Note: The transmission automatically
shifts within the gear range you select.
AUTOMATIC RETURN TO
PARK (P)
What Is Automatic Return to Park
(P)
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) if you
attempt to exit your vehicle without the
transmission in park (P).
How Does Automatic Return to
Park (P) Work
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) when your
vehicle is stationary and any of the
following occur:
• You switch the vehicle off.
• You open the driver door with your
seatbelt unlatched.
• You unlatch the driver seatbelt when
the driver door is open.
Note: Do not use automatic return to park
(P) when your vehicle is moving, except in
an emergency. See Starting and Stopping
the Engine (page 209).
Automatic Return to Park (P)
Limitations
Automatic return to park may not work if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning.
See an authorized dealer if any of the
following occur:
• Door ajar indicator does not illuminate
with the driver door open.
• Door ajar indicator illuminates with the
driver door closed.
• Transmission not in park message
appears with the driver door closed,
after you shift out of park (P).
STOWING THE SELECTOR
LEVER - VEHICLES WITH:
CONSOLE SHIFT
Press the stow button to fold down the
selector lever. Press the button again to
release the selector lever from the stow
position to use.
The stow function allows the shifter to lay
flat in the console, enabling the use of the
working surface tray.
256
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
E311505
E311503
Note: Do not store objects in the selector
lever stow bin, and be sure that the bottom
selector lever tray mat is flat inside the
selector lever stow bin.
Note: If there are objects in the stow bin
while stowing the selector lever, the selector
lever could come back to the upright park
(P) position.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
What Is Manual Park Release
Manual park release allows you to move
your transmission out of the park (P)
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction or emergency.
Manual Park Release Precautions
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not drive your
vehicle until you verify that the
stoplamps are working.
Use the manual park release to move your
transmission from the park (P) position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or
emergency. See Emergency Towing
(page 445).
Note: Do not engage the manual park
release with the engine on.
Using Manual Park Release
Activating the Manual Park
Release Cable
1. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 276).
Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example,
no electrical power available, an external
power source may be required to apply the
parking brake.
2. Locate the manual park release cable
access cover at the bottom of the
driver dash lower panel, under the
steering wheel.
257
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
E336473
3. Carefully open the hinged access cover
using a plastic type wedge or pry tool
at the upper edge of the panel. If done
correctly the panel will swing
downward.
Note: Do not activate the override lever
until you are in the driver's seat.
4. Switch ignition on, but do not start your
vehicle.
5. Once in the driver seat, fully apply the
brake pedal and hold. Do not release.
Pull the tether straight out toward the
driver seat until engaged. If done
correctly, a message will appear in the
instrument cluster.
Note: Do not use excessive force when
using the manual park release handle, as it
could result in damage to the handle.
Note: Your vehicle is now out of the park
(P) position and is free to roll.
E315156
6. With your foot still fully applied on the
brake pedal, disengage the parking
brake. See Electric Parking Brake
(page 276).
7. Your vehicle remains in neutral (N) for
emergency towing purposes.
8. Switch off the ignition.
9. Once safe to do so, and there is no risk
that your vehicle will roll, disconnect
the negative (black) battery cable from
the battery.
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal
Mode
E315157
1. Once it is safe to do so, reconnect the
negative (black) battery cable to the
battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 276).
Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example,
no electrical power available, an external
power may be required to apply the parking
brake.
Note: Do not pull the tether until you are in
the driver seat.
3. Once in the driver seat, fully apply the
brake pedal and hold, do not release.
Using the tether, pull the handle
towards the driver seat until you hit a
hard stop.
4. Pull the lever toward the floor until it
hits a hard stop, before returning to the
stowed position.
Note: Maintain tension on the strap until
the lever reaches the stowed position.
5. Return the manual park release cable
lever to the stowed position and install
the access cover.
258
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
6. With your foot fully applied on the
brake pedal, start your vehicle. Confirm
that your vehicle is in the park (P)
position and that the instrument
cluster indicates park (P).
Note: If the instrument cluster is not
displaying the park (P) position or the
instrument cluster displays an error
message, apply the parking brake before
exiting your vehicle. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
7. Close the access cover.
259
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
HOW DOES FOUR-WHEEL
DRIVE WORK
Using the Electronic Shift On the
Fly System (If Equipped)
This four wheel drive system utilizes a
2-speed Electronic Shift On the Fly (ESOF)
transfer case which is also known as a
part-time system. This system offers the
driver two-wheel drive high, four-wheel
drive high, and four-wheel drive low as
available modes of operation. When either
four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive
low are selected, the system provides
mechanically locked four-wheel drive
power to both the front and rear wheels
for use in off-road or slippery conditions
such as deep snow, sand or mud. When
four-wheel drive low is selected, the
system provides additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication for
conditions like deep sand, steep grades, or
pulling heavy objects. Additionally, the
system is capable of recreational flat
towing by putting the transfer case into a
neutral position. See Recreationally
Towing Your Vehicle (page 443).
Using the 2-Speed Automatic
Four-Wheel Drive System (If Equipped)
The 2-speed automatic four-wheel drive
system utilizes an electronically controlled
on-demand 2-speed transfer case. This
system monitors various vehicle sensory
inputs to provide an increased level of
performance. This system offers the driver
two-wheel drive high, four-wheel drive
auto, four-wheel drive high, and four-wheel
drive low as available modes of operation.
When four-wheel drive auto is selected,
the system continuously varies power to
the front wheels for optimum performance
for all on-road conditions. When either
four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive
low are selected, the system provides
electronically locked power to the front
and rear wheels for use in off-road or
slippery conditions such as deep snow,
sand or mud. When four-wheel drive low
is selected, the system provides additional
gearing for increased torque multiplication
for conditions like deep sand, steep grades,
or pulling heavy objects. Additionally, the
system is capable of recreational flat
towing by putting the transfer case into a
neutral position. See Recreationally
Towing Your Vehicle (page 443).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
260
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle could be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting stuck or damaging
underbody components. The differences
that make your vehicle so versatile also
make it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car. Always maintain steering
wheel control, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result
in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive
cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from
concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps. Drive slower in strong crosswinds
which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle. Be
extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
Note: Do not use four-wheel drive high or
four-wheel drive low mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and can
damage drive components. Four-wheel
drive high or four-wheel drive low mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of four-wheel drive low
mode on these surfaces could produce
some noise, such as occasional clunks, but
should not damage drive components.
When transitioning from consistently loose
or slippery surfaces, be sure the four-wheel
drive system is not mechanically blocked
once on dry, hard surfaced roads in
two-wheel drive high.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
LIMITATIONS
Do not use four-wheel drive high or
four-wheel drive low mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and can
damage drive components. four-wheel
drive high or four-wheel drive low mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of four low mode on
these surfaces could produce some noise
,such as occasional clunks, but should not
damage drive components. When
transitioning from consistently loose or
slippery surfaces, be sure the four-wheel
drive system is not mechanically blocked
once on dry, hard surfaced roads in
two-wheel drive high.
Operating Four-Wheel Drive with
a Spare or Mismatched tires
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of
the spare tire can affect the four-wheel
drive system. If there is a significant
difference between the size of the spare
tire and the remaining tires, you could have
limited four-wheel drive functionality.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a
four-wheel drive mode turned on.
• Turn on a four-wheel drive mode
unless the vehicle is stationary.
• Use a four-wheel drive mode on dry
pavement.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, four-wheel
drive functionality can be limited,
especially when driving in a mechanically
locked four-wheel drive mode. You can
experience the following:
261
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
• Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked four-wheel drive mode.
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Comfort and noise.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
Mechanical Shift Blocking
On four-wheel drive vehicles without a
four-wheel drive auto selection (ESOF),
the transfer case distributes torque to the
front wheels by mechanically interlocking
the front and rear driveshafts together.
Shifting performance of this type of system
can be affected by various external factors
including, but not limited to:
• Vehicle acceleration.
• Dissimilar tire sizes.
• Steering input.
If the system detects a mechanical shift
block at speed after two-wheel drive high
has been selected, a message can appear
momentarily that four-wheel drive is
unable to disengage one or more of
following actions can relieve the
mechanical shift block:
• Momentary acceleration.
• Momentary braking.
• Bringing the vehicle to a stop.
• Shifting the transmission to neutral and
back to drive.
• Shifting the transmission to reverse
and back to drive.
• Driving the vehicle around a tight turn
at slow speed.
SELECTING A FOUR-WHEEL
DRIVE MODE
E308146
E323655
The four-wheel drive mode control is on
the instrument panel.
262
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
To select a four-wheel drive mode, press
the four-wheel drive mode control button
of the desired mode. You can select
two-wheel drive high (2H), four-wheel
drive high (4H), or if your vehicle has
four-wheel drive auto (4A) at a stop or
while driving. Once the shift is complete,
the information display will then display
the selected four-wheel drive mode. While
shifts are in progress, the lights on the
four-wheel drive control switch can flash
and you could see messages in the
information display indicating that a shift
is in progress or to release the accelerator
pedal to improve shift performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or while applying
the accelerator pedal.
Note: You could hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages which is normal.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Four-Wheel Drive –
Information Messages (page 267).
Shifting to or from Four-Wheel
Drive Low (4L)
To select or exit four-wheel drive low (4L):
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N)
3. Press the desired four-wheel drive
button on the four-wheel drive mode
control switch.
The information display will display a
message indicating a four-wheel drive shift
is in progress. If any of the above shift
conditions are not present, the shift will
not occur and the information display will
display information guiding the driver
through the proper shifting procedures. If
there is a transfer case tooth blockage a
message will display in the information
display. To alleviate this condition, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
complete the range shift.
Note: You could hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages which is normal.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Four-Wheel Drive –
Information Messages (page 267).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODES
Two-Wheel Drive High
Two-wheel drive high is for general
on-road driving. Power is sent to the rear
wheels only.
Two-wheel drive high can turn on or off
based on Drive Mode selection See Drive
Mode Control (page 328).
Four-Wheel Drive Auto (If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive Auto provides electronic
controlled four-wheel drive with power
delivered to the front and rear wheels, as
required, for increased traction on varying
road conditions. The four-wheel drive auto
function varies based on selected Drive
Mode. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page
328).
Note: Four-wheel drive auto can turn on or
off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode
(page 328).
263
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive High
Four-Wheel Drive High provides
electronically or mechanically locked
four-wheel drive power to both the front
and rear wheels for use in off-road or
winter conditions such as deep snow, sand
or mud. This mode is not for use on dry
pavement.
Note: Four-wheel drive high can turn on or
off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode
(page 328).
Four-Wheel Drive Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low provides
electronically or mechanically locked
four-wheel drive power to both the front
and rear wheels for use on low traction
surfaces, but does so with additional
gearing for increased torque multiplication.
This mode is intended only for off-road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades, or pulling heavy objects.
Note: Four-wheel drive low can turn on or
off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode
(page 328).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
INDICATORS
Two-wheel Drive High
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when
two-wheel drive high is selected.
Four-wheel Drive Auto (If Equipped)
E181781
Continuously illuminates when
four-wheel drive auto is selected.
Four-wheel Drive High
E181779
Continuously illuminates when
four-wheel drive high is selected.
Four-wheel Drive Low
E181780
Continuously illuminates when
four-wheel drive low is selected.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE DRIVING
HINTS
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there can be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver, i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking.
264
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving In Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
can maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speed. This
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Driving Through Mud and Water
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited. When driving through water,
determine the depth and avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs. If the
ignition system gets wet, your vehicle may
stall. Once through water, test the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
by applying light pressure to the brake
pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should try to drive
straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you can use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to
turnaround because this could cause
vehicle roll over. It is better to reverse back
to a safe location.
265
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power can cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes,
apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire
chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
allow for longer stopping distances and
avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death.
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while
cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your
vehicle.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it cannot stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Anti-Lock Braking System
Limitations (page 273).
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Four-Wheel Drive – Warning
Lamps
Illuminates when a four-wheel
drive or power train fault is
present.
Note: When a system fault is present, the
system can typically remain in whichever
mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It does not default to
two-wheel drive in all circumstances. When
this warning is displayed, have your vehicle
serviced by an authorized dealer.
266
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive – Information Messages
ActionMessage
A four-wheel drive system fault is present.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Check 4x4
The four-wheel drive system is making a
shift.
4x4 Shift in Progress
Displays when you attempt to switch to
four-wheel drive low mode and you do not
shift the transmission to neutral (N).
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch to
four-wheel drive low mode and your
vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
Displays when you attempt to switch from
four-wheel drive low mode and you do not
shift the transmission to neutral (N).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch from
four-wheel drive low mode and your
vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
Displays when there is a transfer case gear
tooth blockage while shifting to or from
four-wheel drive low mode or to the neutral
state. Place the transmission in a forward
gear, move your vehicle forward approxim-
ately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission
back to neutral (N) to allow the transfer
case to complete the range shift.
Shift Delayed Drive Forward
Displays when the system turns off the
clutch due to excessive stress. The system
automatically turns on the clutch after it
cools.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled
Displays when the four-wheel drive system
detects a mechanical shift block when
shifting out of four-wheel drive high. See
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations (page 261).
4x4 Unable to Disengage. See Manual
267
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Displays when the four-wheel drive system
restores to the four-wheel drive auto
setting.
4x4 Restored
Displays when the four-wheel drive system
temporarily turns on four-wheel drive high
mode from four-wheel drive auto mode
after detecting driving conditions that
require greater four-wheel drive perform-
ance. The system automatically returns to
four-wheel drive auto mode after the
system no longer detects these driving
conditions.
4X4 Temporarily Locked
Displays when the system requires an
additional transmission shift to neutral (N)
to complete a transfer case shift.
Shift to Neutral
Displays when you command a four-wheel
drive shift during conditions which are
potentially harmful to the driveline
components
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h
Displays when the four-wheel drive system
requests that you release the accelerator
pedal to complete a four-wheel drive shift.
See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode
(page 262).
To Engage 4x4 Release Accelerator Pedal
268
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE ELECTRONIC
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL
The electronic locking differential is a
device housed in the rear axle, and when
activated, allows both wheels on a specific
axle to turn at the same speed. The
electronic locking differential can provide
additional traction should your vehicle
become stuck. You can activate the
differential electronically and shift it on the
fly within the operating speed range. The
electronic differential will disengage when
the vehicle speed exceeds a set value and
it will reengage when the vehicle speed
goes below a set value. See Switching
the Electronic Locking Differential On
and Off (page 269). It will also engage
based on certain selected drive modes.
See Selecting a Drive Mode (page 328).
The electronic locking differential is for use
in mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road
condition where you need maximum
traction.
Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL PRECAUTIONS
Operating the Electronic Locking
Differential with a Spare or
Mismatched Tires
On vehicles with an electronic locking
differential, the size of the spare tire can
affect performance of the system. If there
is a significant difference between the two
rear tires, you may have limited electronic
locking differential functionality. If the
system has difficulty disengaging, release
the accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction when
rolling. We recommend engaging and
disengaging the electronic locking
differential at a stop when you mount a
spare on the rear axle.
SWITCHING THE ELECTRONIC
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ON
AND OFF - 4X4
The button to activate and deactivate the
electronic locking differential is in the
center of the drive mode rotary switch.
E323655
269
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped)
E308146
To manually activate or deactivate the
electronic locking differential, press the
electronic locking differential button.
Note: The electronic locking differential can
activate or deactivate automatically based
on speed, four-wheel drive mode, and drive
mode selection. See Selecting a Drive
Mode (page 328).
4X4 Rear Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability
Automatic Re-
Engagement Speed
Automatic Disen-
gagement Speed
Maximum Engage-
ment Speed
Drive Modes
20 mph (30 km/h)25 mph (41 km/h)20 mph (30 km/h)
Normal (2H, 4A
2
, 4H)
20 mph (30 km/h)25 mph (41 km/h)20 mph (30 km/h)
Eco (2H, 4A
2
, 4H)
20 mph (30 km/h)25 mph (41 km/h)20 mph (30 km/h)
Sport (2H, 4A
2
, 4H)
20 mph (30 km/h)25 mph (41 km/h)20 mph (30 km/h)
Slippery (2H, 4A
2
,
4H)
Deep Snow/Sand
(4H, 4L)
1
No Speed LimitNo Speed LimitNo Speed Limit
Mud/Ruts (4H, 4L)
1
Rock Crawl (4L)
1
1
Automatically engages when these drive modes are selected. You have the ability to
manually override the automatic engagement by pressing the electronic locking differential
button.
2
If available for 4A drive modes.
270
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped)
Automatic Re-
Engagement Speed
Automatic Disen-
gagement Speed
Maximum Engage-
ment Speed
4WD Mode
No speed LimitNo speed LimitNo speed LimitFour-Wheel Drive
Low (4L)
Note: The electronic locking differential
may not engage if you press your accelerator
pedal during an engagement attempt. A
message could display in the instrument
display guiding you to release the
accelerator pedal.
Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement results in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
SWITCHING THE ELECTRONIC
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ON
AND OFF - 4X2
The button to activate and deactivate the
electronic locking differential is located in
the center of the Drive mode rotary switch.
E333748
To manually activate or deactivate the
electronic locking differential, press the
electronic locking differential button.
4X2 Rear Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability
Automatic Re-Engagement
Speed
Automatic Disengagement
Speed
Maximum Engagement
Speed
20 mph (30 km/h)25 mph (41 km/h)20 mph (30 km/h)
Note: The electronic locking differential
may not engage if you press your accelerator
pedal during an engagement attempt. A
message could display in the instrument
display guiding you to release the
accelerator pedal.
Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
271
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped)
Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement results in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL INDICATORS
E325779
Amber Color: This indicator
illuminates in amber when the
electronic locking differential is
on, indicating that both rear wheel axle
shafts are locked together providing added
traction.
Gray Color: This indicator illuminates in
gray when the electronic locking
differential has been requested to activate
but the vehicle speed is too high, or the left
and right wheel speed difference is too high
during an engagement attempt.
If the electronic locking differential has
been selected, but has malfunctioned, a
message appears in the information
display. See your authorized dealer for
assistance.
Note: If the vehicle is experiencing an
anti-lock braking event, the electronic
locking differential may momentarily
disengage.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL – TROUBLESHOOTING
Electronic Locking Differential – Information Messages
Description and ActionMessage
The electronic locking differential has been requested and
will engage when the speed condition is met.
To Engage Locking
Differential Slow to XX
mph/km/h
Release the accelerator pedal in order to engage.To Engage Locking
Differential Release
Accelerator Pedal
An electronic locking differential system fault is present.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Locking Differen-
tial
272
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped)
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
Anti-Lock Braking System
Limitations
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risk of crash when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal could pulse and could travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal.
BRAKE OVER ACCELERATOR
Brake over accelerator allows you to slow
your vehicle if the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Shift
the transmission into park (P), switch the
power off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If nothing is found, have your
vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
dealer.
LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID
RESERVOIR
See Under Hood Overview (page 456).
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid
from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
273
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
WARNING: The brake system
could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
E170684
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
where the brake fluid level is relative
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 560).
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION
See Brake Fluid Specification (page 560).
BRAKES –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Brakes – Warning Lamps
If the ABS indicator illuminates
when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Your
vehicle continues to have normal braking
without the anti-lock braking system
function. See an authorized dealer.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
E270480
The brake indicator momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. It may also illuminate when
you apply the parking brake and the
ignition is on. If it illuminates when your
vehicle is moving, make sure the parking
brake is disengaged. If the parking brake
is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. See an
authorized dealer.
Brakes – Frequently Asked
Questions
Is it normal for my brakes to make
noise?
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding,
or continuous squeal sound is present,
the brake lining could be worn-out.
Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
274
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
There is an electrical motor sound
when I hit the brakes. Is this normal?
Yes, that sound is the electric brake
booster operating. This sound is
normal when operating your vehicle's
brakes.
Note: Brake dust could accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning Wheels (page
487).
275
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
WHAT IS THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake is used to hold
your vehicle on slopes and flat roads.
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
E267156
The switch is on the lower part
of the instrument panel.
1. Pull the switch up.
The red warning lamp flashes during
operation and illuminates when the parking
brake is applied.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
apply when you shift into park (P). See Park
(P) (page 253).
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE IN AN
EMERGENCY
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
1. Pull the switch up and hold it.
The electric parking brake continues to
slow your vehicle down unless you release
the switch.
The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone
sounds and the stoplamps turn on when
you use the electric parking brake in an
emergency.
Note: Do not apply the electric parking
brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency.
MANUALLY RELEASING THE
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Push the switch down.
The red warning lamp turns off.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Pull the switch upward and hold it.
3. Shift into gear.
4. Press the accelerator pedal until engine
has developed sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down
the hill.
5. Release the switch and pull away in a
normal manner.
AUTOMATICALLY RELEASING
THE ELECTRIC PARKING
BRAKE
1. Close the driver door.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Press the accelerator pedal and pull
away in a normal manner.
276
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electric Parking Brake
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
AUDIBLE WARNING
Sounds when the parking brake is on and
your vehicle is moving. If the warning tone
continues after you have released the
parking brake, this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
RELEASING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE IF THE
VEHICLE BATTERY HAS RUN
OUT OF CHARGE
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery has run out of charge.
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery has run out of charge.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
439).
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps
Brake System
E270480
It illuminates red when you apply
the parking brake and your
vehicle is on. If the lamp flashes
when the parking brake has been
released, this indicates the
parking brake system requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
Electric Parking Brake
E146190
When the lamp illuminates
yellow, it indicates a malfunction
in the electric parking brake.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
277
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electric Parking Brake
Electric Parking Brake – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release
is attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake and
Switch
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic
release is attempted but cannot be performed.
Perform a manual release.
Park Brake Use Switch to
Release
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed
exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release the parking brake
before continuing driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake system has been put into a
special mode that is used to allow service of the rear
brakes. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance Mode
The electric parking brake system has detected a
condition that requires service. Some functionality
may still be available. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited Function
Service Required
The electric parking brake system has detected a
condition that requires service. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction Service
Now
278
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electric Parking Brake
WHAT IS REVERSE BRAKING
ASSIST
Reverse Braking Assist reduces impact
damage or avoids a collision completely
by using the sensors on the rear of your
vehicle.
HOW DOES REVERSE
BRAKING ASSIST WORK
Reverse Braking Assist functions when in
reverse (R) and traveling at a speed of
1–7 mph (2–12 km/h).
If the system detects an obstacle behind
your vehicle, it provides a warning through
the rear parking aid or cross traffic alert
system.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system. This
may cause reduced performance or false
alerts.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with accessories that extend beyond the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example
a trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is
not able to make corrections for the
additional length of the accessories.
The system only applies the brakes for a
short period of time when an event occurs.
Act as soon as you notice the brakes apply
in order to remain in control of the vehicle.
Note: Certain add-on devices around the
bumper or fascia may create false alerts.
For example, large trailer hitches, bicycle or
surfboard racks, license plate brackets,
bumper covers or any other device that may
block the normal detection zone of the
system. Remove the add-on device to
prevent false alerts.
Note: The system does not react to small
or moving objects, particularly those close
to the ground.
Note: The system does not operate during
hard acceleration or steering.
279
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned
or bent, it could alter the sensing zone
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Vehicle loading and suspension
changes can impact the angle of the sensors
and may change the normal detection zone
of the system resulting in inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer, the
system may detect the trailer and provide
an alert, or the system turns off. If the
system does not turn off, switch the system
off manually after you connect the trailer.
Note: You may experience reduced system
performance on road surfaces that limit
deceleration. For example, roads with ice,
loose gravel, mud or sand.
SWITCHING REVERSE
BRAKING ASSIST ON AND OFF
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Switch Reverse Brake Assist on or off.
Note: The system is unavailable when rear
parking aid or cross traffic alert is off.
OVERRIDING REVERSE
BRAKING ASSIST
There could be instances when
unexpected or unwanted braking occurs.
Firmly pressing the accelerator pedal or
switching the feature off overrides the
system.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST
INDICATORS
If the system determines that a collision
with an obstacle may occur, full braking
may apply. Bring your vehicle to a stop a
safe distance away from the obstacle.
E293490
A message and warning
indicator appear when the
system applies the brakes.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
Reverse Braking Assist – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Make sure that all doors, liftgate and hood
are closed. Drive the vehicle on a straight
road for a short period. If message remains,
contact an authorized dealer.
Reverse Brake Assist Not Available See
Manual
Displays when a system error has occurred.
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Fault
Displays when reverse brake assist is off.
Make sure the parking aids and cross traffic
systems are on.
Reverse Brake Assist Off
280
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
Reverse Braking Assist –
Frequently Asked Questions
Why is reverse braking assist unavailable?
• Make sure that all doors, liftgate and
hood are closed. Drive the vehicle on a
straight road for a short period. If the
message remains, contact an
authorized dealer.
• Make sure the cross traffic alert system
is on. See How Does Cross Traffic
Alert Work (page 344).
• Make sure the rear parking aid system
is on. See What is the Rear Parking
Aid (page 297).
• Make sure traction control is on. See
Traction Control (page 284).
• The vehicle has sustained a rear end
impact. Contact an authorized dealer
to have the sensors checked for proper
coverage and operation.
• An ABS, traction control or stability
control event may have occurred.
Reverse braking assist resumes
operation when the event is complete.
• Make sure the rear view camera and
360 degree camera are not dirty or
obstructed. If dirty, clean the camera.
If the message still appears after
cleaning the camera, wait a short time
and the message should clear. If the
message does not clear, contact an
authorized dealer.
• Make sure there are no blocked or
faulted sensors. See How Does Cross
Traffic Alert Work (page 344).
• You recently had your vehicle serviced,
or the battery disconnected. Drive your
vehicle a short distance to resume
system operation.
• Reverse braking assist does not
function when you connect a trailer.
Operation resumes when you
disconnect the trailer.
Note: If the answers to why the system is
unavailable do not assist in returning reverse
braking assist to available, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
281
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
WHAT IS HILL START ASSIST
Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist makes it easier for you to
pull away when your vehicle is on a slope
without using the parking brake.
HOW DOES HILL START
ASSIST WORK
When the system activates, your vehicle
remains stationary for a few seconds after
you release the brake pedal. This gives you
time to move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. The brakes
release when the engine has developed
sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle
from rolling down the slope.
HILL START ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system turns off if
there is a malfunction or if you
excessively rev the engine.
HILL START ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hill Start Assist – Information
Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when
system is not avail-
able. Have your
vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
282
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hill Start Assist
HOW DOES AUTO HOLD WORK
Auto Hold applies the brakes to hold your
vehicle after you stop it and release the
brake pedal. This can help when waiting
on a hill or in traffic.
SWITCHING AUTO HOLD ON
AND OFF
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
You can switch the system on or off by
accessing the menu in the SYNC display
screen.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
Note: You can only switch the system on
after you close the driver door, and fasten
your seatbelt.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: Make sure you switch the system off
before using an automatic car wash.
USING AUTO HOLD
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
The auto hold active indicator
illuminates in the information display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the information display.
3. Pull away in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes and the
auto hold active indicator switches off.
Note: The system only activates if you
apply enough brake pressure on the brake
pedal.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
could apply the electric parking brake. The
brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
electric parking brake releases when you
press the accelerator pedal. See
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake (page 276).
Note: The system switches off if you shift
into reverse (R) and press the brake pedal.
There could be actions that can cause the
auto hold system not to work when the
following occur:
• When you use active park assist.
• Your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
• The driver door is open.
• You have not fastened your seatbelt.
• You shift into reverse (R) before the
system is active.
AUTO HOLD INDICATORS
E323448
Illuminates when the system is
active.
E323449
Illuminates when the system is
on but cannot hold your vehicle
at a standstill at this particular
time.
283
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto Hold
WHAT IS TRACTION CONTROL
The traction control system helps to avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
HOW DOES TRACTION
CONTROL WORK
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
SWITCHING TRACTION
CONTROL ON AND OFF
WARNING: The stability and
traction control light illuminates steadily
if the system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
E327252
The traction control system turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
The button for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, a
message and an illuminated icon appear
on the instrument cluster.
Press the switch again to turn the traction
control system back on to normal
operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See What Is
MyKey (page 78).
TRACTION CONTROL
INDICATOR
E138639
If the indicator does not
illuminate when you switch the
ignition on, or remains on when
the engine is running, this indicates a
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
E130458
The traction control off indicator
illuminates when you switch the
traction control system off, or
when an alternative stability control mode
is selected that requires the traction
control off.
284
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Traction Control
TRACTION CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
Traction Control – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off.
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on.
Traction Control On
285
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Traction Control
HOW DOES STABILITY
CONTROL WORK
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket
roof racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic
stability control system. In addition,
installing any stereo loudspeakers may
interfere with and adversely affect the
electronic stability control system. Install
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as
far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats
in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of
the electronic stability control system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the
laws of physics. It's always possible to
lose control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator's ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or traction control you may
experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic stability control enhances your
vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral
slides by applying brakes to one or more
of the wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
Roll stability control enhances your
vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by
detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and
the rate at which it changes by applying
the brakes to one or more wheels
individually.
Curve Control
Curve control enhances your vehicle’s
ability to follow the road when cornering
severely or avoiding objects in the roadway.
Curve control operates by reducing engine
power and, if necessary, applying brakes
to one or more of the wheels individually.
Side Wind Stabilization
Side wind stabilization is an advanced
feature that works by carefully applying
the brakes on one side of the vehicle to
reduce the effect of a side wind gust on
the vehicle's path.
286
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
Torque Vectoring by Brakes
Torque vectoring control applies brake
torque on the inner driven wheel in a curve
for better traction to avoid an understeer,
or oversteer situation. Unlike electronic
stability control, enhanced torque
vectoring control does not slow the
vehicle. It helps control excessive wheel
slip and gives the vehicle improved
cornering agility.
Traction Control
Traction control enhances your vehicle’s
ability to maintain traction of the wheels
by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
See What Is Traction Control (page 284).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
SWITCHING STABILITY
CONTROL ON AND OFF
The system turns on each time you switch
the ignition on.
You can switch the electronic stability
control system off by pressing and holding
the ESC off button for over 5 seconds, or
you can press the button again to switch
the system on.
Shifting the transmission into reverse (R)
will disable the system.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently. See Switching
Traction Control On and Off (page 284).
287
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with Roll Stability Control
Traction Control
System
3
Electronic
Stability
Control
3
Roll Stability
Control
3
Stability Control
OFF Light
Enabled
Enabled
3
EnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at start-
up
Disabled
1
Enabled
3
EnabledilluminatedButton pressed
momentarily
Disabled
1
Disabled
2
EnabledilluminatedButton Pressed
and held for 5 -
15 seconds
Disabled
1
DisabledEnabledilluminatedButton not
pressed and
transfer case is
switched to 4x4
Low or put into
Rock Crawl
Mode
1
The Traction Control system can still be enabled but with tighter or looser thresholds.
2
When you press and hold the button, a progress bar will display to show the button hold
time progress.
3
Functions can vary depending on what selectable drive mode the vehicle is currently in.
STABILITY CONTROL
INDICATOR
E138639
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the power on, or remains
on, this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
288
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
WHAT IS HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep slopes in various surface
conditions.
HOW DOES HILL DESCENT
CONTROL WORK
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill slopes between
2–20 mph (3–32 km/h). Above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system remains on but the
descent speed cannot be set or
maintained.
Note: The system does not function below
2 mph (3 km/h).
The system requires a cool down interval
after a period of sustained use. Hill descent
control provides a warning in the message
center and a tone sounds when the system
is about to disengage for cooling. At this
time, manually apply the brakes as needed
to maintain descent speed.
Note: The amount of time that the system
can remain active before cooling varies with
conditions.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as
ice or extremely steep grades. Hill
descent control is a driver assist system
and cannot substitute for good judgment
by the driver. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious
injury.
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission
into park (P) for automatic transmission
or first gear for manual transmission.
SWITCHING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL ON AND OFF
E163171
Press the button on the
instrument panel. A light
illuminates and a tone sounds
when the system is active.
SETTING THE HILL DESCENT
SPEED
To increase or decrease the descent speed,
press the accelerator or brake pedal, or use
the SET + and SET - buttons on the
steering wheel. Once you reach the
preferred speed remove your feet from the
pedals.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
INDICATOR
E163171
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent control on.
289
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
HILL DESCENT CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
Hill Descent Control – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
resume control.
Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control
A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling
The hill descent system cannot activate while Cruise
Control is actively controlling speed.
Hill Descent Control not avail-
able with Cruise Control Active
290
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS ACTIVE DRIVE
ASSIST
Active drive assist keeps your vehicle
centered in the lane when using adaptive
cruise control.
HOW DOES ACTIVE DRIVE
ASSIST WORK
Active drive assist uses cameras to monitor
your vehicle position within a lane and
applies steering support to keep your
vehicle centered in the lane.
When active, active drive assist uses a
driver facing camera and infrared lighting
to monitor your eyes and head position to
detect if you are distracted. If the system
determines you are distracted, it alerts you
to return your eyes to the road.
E319812
A
A
B
Lighting area.A
Camera.B
Note: When active drive assist is active, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, camera data may be
recorded through the vehicle event data
recorder. See Event Data (page 27).
Note: No data is recorded under normal
driving conditions.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Obstructions to the
driver facing camera or infrared lighting
could prevent the system from properly
operating. Keep the camera and lighting
areas free from obstruction. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
if any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
changes or modifications to the steering
wheel could affect the functionality or
performance of the system. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
291
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist (If Equipped)
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
REQUIREMENTS
Active drive assist only activates when all
of the following occur:
• Active drive assist is enabled in your
information and entertainment screen.
See Active Drive Assist Settings
(page 292).
• Adaptive cruise control is on.
• The system detects both lane
markings.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel.
• Your eyes are on the road.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
Any of the following conditions could result
in active drive assist not operating
correctly:
• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or too wide.
• The system does not detect at least
one lane marking or when lanes merge
or split.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Using the system in areas under
construction.
• When modifications to the steering
system have been made.
• When using a spare tire.
• If you have a pre-existing eye condition,
such as an eye misalignment, or have
had eye surgery.
Note: The steering assistance is limited and
may not be sufficient for all driving
situations.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could deviate from the center line.
Note: The information provided by the
navigation map data could be inaccurate or
out of date.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
SETTINGS
Enabling Active Drive Assist
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
4. Press Lane Centering Assist.
SWITCHING ACTIVE DRIVE
ASSIST ON AND OFF
Switching Active Drive Assist On
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E308131
E144529
Using the adaptive cruise control
and lateral support buttons,
ensure both systems are active.
Active drive assist activates.
Switching Active Drive Assist Off
E308131
E144529
Press either the lateral support
or adaptive cruise control button
when system is active or in
standby mode.
Active drive assist turns off
through each ignition cycle.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST ALERTS
When active drive assist is providing
hands-on driving and detects no steering
activity for a certain period of time, the
system alerts you to put your hands on the
steering wheel.
292
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist (If Equipped)
When active drive assist is providing
hands-on driving and detects you are not
looking at the road for a certain period of
time, the system alerts you to return your
eyes to the road.
If you do not react to the warnings, active
drive assist cancels, quickly activates and
releases the brakes, and slows your vehicle
down to low speeds while maintaining
steering control.
If your vehicle slows down and you resume
control, a message appears to prompt you
to press the accelerator pedal to allow the
system to resume.
Note: The system disables until the next
key cycle if repeated inactivity is detected.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION
When an external condition cancels active
drive assist, for example, no lane markings
available, a tone sounds and a message
appears in the instrument cluster.
E308130
If your vehicle starts to slow
down, you must take control of
steering and press and release
the button to reactivate active drive assist.
System cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
markings.
• Lane markings are crossed.
• Your eyes are not on the road or your
hands are not the steering wheel.
If you have your hands on the steering
wheel and your eyes are on the road when
the feature is active and a cancellation
occurs, the system sounds a tone and
displays a cancelled graphic in the
instrument cluster.
If you are not paying attention to the road
or your hands are not on the steering wheel
and a cancellation occurs, the system will
display a message and a tone sounds until
you resume control. If you do not resume
control in time, active drive assist quickly
activates and releases the brakes, and
slows your vehicle down to low speeds
while maintaining steering control. If your
vehicle slows down and you resume
control, a message appears to prompt you
to press the accelerator pedal to allow the
system to resume.
Note: The system disables until the next
key cycle if repeated inactivity is detected.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
INDICATORS
E297977
When on, the color of the
indicator changes to indicate the
status.
Gray indicates active drive assist is on but
inactive.
Green indicates active drive assist is active
and applying continuous steering support.
Hands-On Driving Support
Available
E310620
When this indicator is present, you must
keep your hands on the steering wheel.
293
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist (If Equipped)
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Active Drive Assist – Information
Messages
Depending on your vehicle options and
instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
ActionMessage
Make sure you return your hands to the
steering wheel and provide steering input.
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
The system is going to cancel and you must
take control.
Resume Control
Return your attention to the road.Watch the Road
Conditions exist preventing the system from
being available. If the message continues
to display, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Active Drive Assist Not Available
Press the accelerator pedal and follow the
prompts.
Press Accelerator Pedal to Resume
Note: Certain messages could be
abbreviated or shortened depending on
which cluster type you have.
294
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist (If Equipped)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
Electric Power Steering
Precautions
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays
in the information display. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Switch the vehicle off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the vehicle on and
watch the information display for a
steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message
returns, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects
an error, you may not feel a difference in
the steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Adapt your speed and driving behavior
according to reduced steering assist.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort to steer. This occurs to prevent
internal overheating and damage to the
steering system. If this occurs, you will not
lose the ability to steer your vehicle
manually nor will it cause damage to the
system. Normal steering and driving allows
the system to cool down and steering
assist returns to normal.
Note: There is no fluid reservoir to check or
fill.
Electric Power Steering Adaptive
Steering (If Equipped)
Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS)
The adaptive steering system changes the
steering ratio with changes to vehicle
speed, optimizing the steering response in
all conditions. The system also changes
when you switch on the transmission
tow/haul feature. When you select the
tow/haul button, the adaptive steering
system reduces vehicle sensitivity to
steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds,
while maintaining the ease of parking and
maneuverability at low speeds.
Note: The adaptive steering system
continuously monitors for faults. If the
system detects a fault, a message appears
in the information display. If a red warning
message displays, stop your vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so. The message could
clear if the fault is no longer present. If an
adaptive steering system warning message
appears each time you start your vehicle,
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Note: The system is designed with a locking
device. It remains mechanically locked at a
fixed steering ratio with the lock engaged.
You may notice a click when you turn your
vehicle on or off.
Note: If your vehicle loses electrical power
or detects a fault when you are driving, the
system shuts down and you retain a normal
steering function with a fixed steering ratio.
During this time it is possible that the
steering wheel could not be straight when
the vehicle is driving straight ahead. In
addition, you could notice that the steering
wheel angle required to steer your vehicle
could be different.
295
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering
Note: During parking maneuvers, the
adaptive steering system balances the driver
work load for various steering wheel inputs
and vehicle loading conditions. Under
extreme operating conditions the system
locking device could engage. This strategy
prevents overheating and permanent
damage to the adaptive steering system.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Adaptive Learning (If Equipped)
Adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and crash avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, you must drive your vehicle a
short distance before the system relearns
the strategy and reactivates all systems.
STEERING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Steering – Warning Indicators
E223375
The adaptive steering system
indicator illuminates if the
system detects a fault during the
continuous diagnostic checks.
Note: If a red warning message displays,
stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Steering – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
The steering system has detected a condi-
tion that requires service. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now
296
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering
PARKING AID PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system. This
may cause reduced performance or false
alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the rear parking aid detects the trailer and
provides an alert. Disable the parking aid
when you connect a trailer to prevent the
alert.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts, for example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that could block the normal detection zone
of the parking aid system. Aftermarket spare
tires or spare tire covers mounted to the rear
tailgate could cause false alerts from the
park aid system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. If the
sensors are covered, the system's accuracy
can be affected.
Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: When using a programmed MyKey
you cannot switch this off. See MyKey™
(page 78).
REAR PARKING AID (If
Equipped)
What is the Rear Parking Aid
Reverse Sensing System
Rear parking sensors detect objects behind
your vehicle when in reverse (R).
Rear Parking Aid Limitations
There is a decreased coverage area at the
outer corners.
When using a programmed MyKey, you
cannot switch the rear parking aid off.
297
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The rear parking aid sensors are active
when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 71 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
The rear parking aid detects large objects
when you shift into reverse (R) and any of
the following occur:
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a
low speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a
low speed and an object is moving
towards your vehicle, for example
another vehicle at a low speed.
Locating the Rear Parking Aid
Sensors
E231381
The rear parking aid sensors are in the rear
bumper.
Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the rear bumper.
If your vehicle remains stationary for a few
seconds, the audible warning turns off. If
your vehicle moves backward the tone
sounds again.
Note: When the parking aid system sounds
a tone, the audio system could reduce the
set volume.
FRONT PARKING AID (If
Equipped)
What is the Front Parking Aid
Front parking sensors detect objects in
front of your vehicle.
Front Parking Aid Limitations
The front parking aid sensors are active
when your vehicle is in any position other
than park (P) and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 27.6 in
(70 cm) from the bumper.
If your vehicle is in reverse (R), the front
parking aid detects objects when your
vehicle is moving at a low speed or an
object is moving toward your vehicle and
provides an audio warning, for example
another vehicle at a low speed. Once your
vehicle reaches a stop, the audio warning
stops after a few seconds. Visual indication
is always active in reverse (R).
If your vehicle is in any forward gear, the
front parking aid provides audible warnings
and visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
below and the system detects an object
within the detection zone. Once your
vehicle reaches a stop, the visual indication
and audio warning stops after a few
seconds.
298
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is in neutral (N), the front
and rear sensors provide visual indication
only when your vehicle is moving below a
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and obstacles
are detected inside the detection areas.
Once your vehicle reaches a stop, the
visual indication and audio warning stops
after a few seconds.
Locating the Front Parking Aid
Sensors
E310332
The front parking aid sensors are in the
front bumper.
Front Parking Aid Audible
Warnings
A warning tone sounds when there is an
object within 27.6 in (70 cm) from the front
bumper. As your vehicle moves closer to
an object, the rate of the tone increases.
The warning tone continuously sounds
when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from
the front bumper.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from your vehicle, visual indication
remains on.
SIDE PARKING AID (If
Equipped)
What is the Side Parking Aid
The front and rear outermost parking aid
sensors map objects that are near to the
sides of your vehicle.
Side Parking Aid Limitations
The sensor coverage is up to 24 in (60 cm)
from the sides of your vehicle.
The side parking aid may not function if:
• You switch your vehicle on, off and
back on within a few seconds.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system activates.
• The traction control system activates.
Note: If you switch traction control off, the
side sensing system also turns off.
To reinitialize the system, drive the length
of your vehicle.
The side parking aid does not detect an
object that is moving toward the side of
your vehicle, for example another vehicle
moving at a low speed, if it does not pass
a front or rear parking aid sensor.
If your vehicle is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system provides visual indication
only when your vehicle is moving below
7 mph (12 km/h) and there is a front or rear
park aid obstacle detected, and the side
obstacle is within 24 in (60 cm) from the
side of your vehicle. Once your vehicle
reaches a stop, the visual indication stops
after a few seconds.
299
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Locating the Side Parking Aid
Sensors
E310321
The side parking sensors are in the front
and rear bumpers.
Side Parking Aid Audible Warnings
When the side parking aid detects an
object within the coverage area and the
driving path of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As your vehicle moves
closer to the object, the rate of the tone
increases.
PARKING AID INDICATORS
E310320
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grey.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R). When you
stop your vehicle, visual indication turns
off after four seconds.
If the parking aids are not available, the
side distance indicator blocks do not
display.
300
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PARKING AIDS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Parking Aids – Information
Messages
If a fault is present in the parking aids, a
warning message appears in the
instrument cluster or the information and
entertainment display.
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Check Front Park Aid
The system detects a condition that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
301
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE REAR VIEW
CAMERA
The rear view camera provides a video
image of the area behind your vehicle when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
E332186
The rear view camera button is
on the instrument panel.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image could be
incorrect. All guide lines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage and you might not see
some objects. In some vehicles, the guide
lines may disappear when you connect the
trailer tow connector.
LOCATING THE REAR VIEW
CAMERA
The rear view camera is on the tailgate. It
provides a video image of the area behind
your vehicle.
REAR VIEW CAMERA GUIDE
LINES
E306774
A. Active guide lines.
B. Centerline.
302
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear View Camera
C. Fixed guide line: Green zone.
D. Fixed guide line: Yellow zone.
E. Fixed guide line: Red zone.
F. Rear bumper.
Active guide lines only show with fixed
guide lines. To use active guide lines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guide lines
toward an intended path. If the steering
wheel position changes while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the
intended path.
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Use caution while reversing. Objects in the
red zone are closest to your vehicle and
objects in the green zone are farther away.
Objects get closer to your vehicle as they
move from the green zone to the yellow or
red zones. Use the side view mirrors and
rear view mirror to get better coverage on
both sides and rear of your vehicle.
Note: Active guide lines and fixed guide
lines are only available when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if the
active or fixed guide lines are on.
Note: Not all camera modes work properly
without an auxiliary camera.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
SETTINGS
Zooming the Rear View Camera In
and Out
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Selectable settings for this feature are
zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the
symbol on the camera screen to change
the view. The default setting is zoom off.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Note: Zooming in also engages park hold
which applies the electric park brake when
you shift to park (P). When you press the
zoom button, the electronic park hold
button illuminates on the touchscreen. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Switching Rear View Camera Delay
On and Off
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Rear View Camera.
4. Switch Rear View Camera Delay on or
off.
303
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear View Camera
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
304
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear View Camera
WHAT IS THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras which
provide visibility around your vehicle.
HOW DOES THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA WORK
The 360 Degree Camera system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front of or behind your vehicle.
• Helps you when parallel parking and
centering in a parking space.
• Provides a cross traffic view in front of
and behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of
the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots and obstacles near your
vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The 360 degree
camera system still requires the driver
to use it in conjunction with looking out
of the windows, and checking the interior
and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
LIMITATIONS
Note: Use caution if a door is ajar. The 360
degree camera could be out of position and
the image could be incorrect.
LOCATING THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERAS
Cargo Bed Camera
Rear View Camera
The rear view camera is on the tailgate. It
provides a video image of the area behind
your vehicle.
Front View Camera
The front view camera is in the grille. It
provides a video image of the area in front
of your vehicle.
Side View Camera
The side view camera is on the outside
mirror. It provides a video image of the area
on the sides of your vehicle to aid you when
parking or when backing up a trailer.
305
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera (If Equipped)
Bed Camera
The bed camera is mounted within the
high-mount stop lamp. It displays the
contents of your truck bed. The camera
contains a dynamic guideline to help locate
the center of your vehicle. This view can
be accessed while in drive (D) or reverse
(R).
Auxiliary Camera
The auxiliary camera is a variant of the rear
view camera and is accessed by pressing
the AUX button on the display screen when
moving in reverse (R) or in drive (D). It
displays a rear view image from the back
of a trailer while in reverse.
360 DEGREE CAMERA GUIDE
LINES
Note: Active guide lines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
E306774
A. Active guide lines.
B. Centerline.
C. Fixed guide line: Green zone.
D. Fixed guide line: Yellow zone.
E. Fixed guide line: Red zone.
F. Rear bumper.
Active guide lines only show with fixed
guide lines. Turn the steering wheel to
point the guide lines toward an intended
path. If the steering wheel position changes
when reversing, your vehicle could deviate
from the intended path.
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
306
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera (If Equipped)
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects get closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side
view mirrors and rear view mirror to get
better coverage on both sides and rear of
your vehicle.
Keep Out Zone
E310341
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
SETTINGS
Switching the 360 Degree Camera
On and Off
E332186
The 360 degree camera system
button is on the instrument
panel. The front and rear
cameras have multiple screens which
consist of:
• Normal view.
• Normal view with 360.
• Split view.
• Bed camera.
• Auxiliary camera.
Note: The rear view camera activates when
you switch into reverse (R). Additional views
are then accessible on the touchscreen.
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
the front images display when the button
is pressed. When in reverse (R), only the
rear images display when the button is
pressed.
Note: Not all cameras are available.
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
Switching the 360 Degree Camera
View
E337002
Press to access the different
camera views.
E336516
Front normal view provides an
image of what is directly in front
of your vehicle.
E336517
Front split view provides an
extended view of what is in front
of your vehicle.
E310996
Normal + 360 view contains the
normal camera view next to a
360 degree camera view.
E310967
Rear normal view provides an
image of what is directly behind
your vehicle.
E310974
Rear split view provides an
extended view of what is behind
your vehicle.
E310995
Bed camera shows the truck
bed.
E311776
Trailer AUX camera shows a rear
view camera image of what is
behind your trailer. This camera
needs to be purchased and installed
separately.
307
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera (If Equipped)
E310965
Trailer reverse guidance shows
the sides of your truck and trailer.
See Trailer Reversing Aid
(page 410).
E224485
Zooms in on the image and park
hold is activated. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
E337359
Zooms in on the 360 degree
image.
308
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera (If Equipped)
WHAT IS ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST
Assists you with parking in and out of
parking spaces.
HOW DOES ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST WORK
Active park assist uses sensors to detect
parking spaces. Active park assist controls
steering, acceleration, braking and shifting
as required to maneuver into or out of a
parking space when activate.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with accessories that extend beyond the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example
a trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is
not able to make corrections for the
additional length of the accessories.
SWITCHING ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST ON AND OFF
E326188
P
Press the active park assist
button, then press the active
park assist icon on the
touchscreen to bring up full screen
notifications.
Press the soft keys on the touchscreen to
switch between the parallel park in,
perpendicular park in, or parallel park out
parking modes.
Cancelling Active Park Assist
To cancel parking assistance at any time,
shift out of neutral (N).
Pausing Active Park Assist
To pause parking assistance at any time,
release the active park assist button.
If you open the passenger or rear doors,
active park assist pauses.
To resume parking, press and hold the
button again.
ENTERING A PARALLEL
PARKING SPACE
1. Press the active park assist button.
Note: The system detects other vehicles
and curbs to find a parking space.
309
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist (If Equipped)
2. Use the turn signal lever to search for
a parking space on the driver or
passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not use the turn signal lever,
the system searches for a parking space on
the passenger side of your vehicle.
3. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft
(1 m) away from and parallel to the
other parked vehicles when searching
for a parking space.
Note: A tone sounds and a message
appears in the information and
entertainment display when active park
assist finds a suitable parking space.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Release the steering wheel and shift
into neutral (N).
6. Press and hold the active park assist
button.
7. Release the brake pedal to allow your
vehicle to park.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: When parallel parking between
objects, the system parks closer to the
object in front of your vehicle to allow easier
access to the luggage compartment.
Note: When parking is complete, your
vehicle shifts into park (P).
ENTERING A PERPENDICULAR
PARKING SPACE
1. Press the active park assist button.
Note: Active park assist does not recognize
parking space lines and centers your vehicle
between objects.
2. Press the active park assist icon on the
touchscreen.
3. Select perpendicular parking.
4. Use the turn signal lever to search for
a parking space on the driver or
passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not use the turn signal lever,
the system searches for a parking space on
the passenger side of your vehicle.
5. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft
(1 m) away from and perpendicular to
the other parked vehicles when
searching for a parking space.
Note: A tone sounds and a message
appears in the information and
entertainment display when active park
assist finds a parking space.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the steering wheel and shift
into neutral (N).
8. Press and hold the active park assist
button.
9. Release the brake pedal to allow the
vehicle to park.
Note: Active park assist backs your vehicle
into parking spaces.
Note: Active park assist aligns the front end
of your vehicle with the lane side of the
object next to it.
Note: When the system detects only one
object, it allows enough distance to open
the door on either side.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: When parking is complete, your
vehicle shifts into park (P).
EXITING A PARKING SPACE
Active park assist only assists leaving
parallel parking spaces.
1. Press the active park assist button.
2. Press the active park assist icon on the
touchscreen.
310
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist (If Equipped)
3. Select parallel park exit.
4. Use the turn signal to choose the
direction to exit the parking space.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Release the steering wheel and shift
into neutral (N).
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Press and hold the active park assist
button.
9. Release the brake pedal to allow your
vehicle to move.
Note: After active park assist drives your
vehicle to a position where you can exit the
parking space in a forward movement, a
message appears instructing you to take full
control of your vehicle.
10. Take control of your vehicle.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Active Park Assist – Information
Messages
ActionMessage
The system
requires service.
Have your vehicle
checked as soon as
possible.
Active Park Fault
Active Park Assist – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does active park assist not
operate correctly?
The system is unable to detect a
vehicle, curb or object to park next to
or in between. The system needs
boundary objects to operate correctly.
Why does active park assist not search
for a parking space?
You have switched traction control off.
Why does active park assist not search
for a parking space?
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your
vehicle must be moving forward to be
able to detect a parking space.
Why does active park assist not offer
a parking space?
The sensors could be blocked. For
example, snow, ice or large
accumulations of dirt. Blocked sensors
can affect how the system functions.
Why does active park assist not offer
a parking space?
The sensors in the front or rear bumper
could be damaged.
311
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist (If Equipped)
Why does active park assist not offer
a parking space?
There is not enough room in the
parking space for your vehicle to safely
park.
Why does active park assist not offer
a parking space?
There is not enough space for the
parking maneuver on the opposite side
of the parking space.
Why does active park assist not offer
a parking space?
The parking space is more than 5 ft
(1.5 m) or less than 2 ft (0.5 m) away
from your vehicle.
Why does active park assist not offer
a parking space?
Your vehicle's speed is greater than
22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel parking
or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) for
perpendicular parking.
Why does active park assist not offer
a parking space?
You recently disconnected or replaced
the battery. After you reconnect the
battery you must drive your vehicle on
a straight road for a short period of
time.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
An irregular curb along the parking
space prevents the system from
correctly aligning your vehicle.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
Vehicles or objects bordering the
space could not be correctly parked.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
Your vehicle stopped too far past the
parking space.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
The tires are not correctly installed or
maintained. For example, using a spare
tire, not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
A repair or alteration changed the
detection capabilities.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
A parked vehicle has a high
attachment. For example, a salt
sprayer, snowplow or moving truck
bed.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
The parking space length, or position
of parked objects, changes after your
vehicle passes the space.
Why does active park assist not
correctly position the vehicle into a
parking space?
The temperature around your vehicle
quickly changes. For example, driving
from a heated garage into a cold
outside temperature, or after leaving
a car wash.
312
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist (If Equipped)
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
Requirements
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed
is greater than 15 mph in imperial units and
20 km/h in metric units.
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
E332905
Press the button to activate the
system. When the system
activates, the set speed is equal
to whichever is greater, the current vehicle
speed, or 15 mph when in imperial units or
20 km/h when in metric units. If the speed
is too low, or other conditions are not
correct for cruise control activation, the
system will instead enter standby mode.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E332905
Press the button when the
system is active or switch the
ignition off.
Note: When you switch cruise control off,
the set speed clears.
SETTING THE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
system does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either the Set+ or Set-
buttons to set the current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the
information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press the Set+ button to
increase the set speed in small
increments. Press and hold the
Set+ button to accelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
Press the Set- button to
decrease the set speed in small
increments. Press and hold the
Set- button to decelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
313
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E308130
Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
E308130
Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E71340
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
314
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
WORK
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go
uses radar and camera sensors to maintain
a set gap between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you while following it to
a complete stop. Stop and go can also be
set to follow a vehicle directly in front of
you and adjust the set speed, while you are
at a complete stop.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use adaptive
cruise control on winding roads, in heavy
traffic or when the road surface is
slippery. This could result in loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as
entering or leaving a highway, on roads
with intersections or roundabouts, roads
without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: The system is not a
crash warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controls. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
When Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep slopes,
for example in mountainous areas.
315
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS
Sensor Limitations
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same
lane.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
E328125
Camera.1
Radar sensor.2
The camera is on the windshield behind
the interior mirror.
The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control
– Information Messages (page 325).
316
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle image does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
Detection Issues Can Occur:
E71621
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This
could cause missed or false vehicle
detection.
Optimal system performance requires a
clear view of the road by the windshield
camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Visual Search (page 30).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
E144529
Press the button to activate the
system. When the system
activates, the set speed is equal
to whichever is greater, the current vehicle
speed, or 15 mph when in imperial units or
20 km/h when in metric units. If the speed
is too low, or other conditions are not
correct for adaptive cruise control
activation, the system enters standby
mode. When you are below 15 mph when
in imperial units or 20 km/h when in metric
units, adaptive cruise control does not
activate unless you are following another
vehicle.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster
display.
317
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
E144529
Press the button when the
system is in standby mode or
switch the ignition off.
Note: When you switch the system off, the
set speed clears.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION
The system may cancel if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
The system may cancel and set the parking
brake if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
the driver door after you stop your
vehicle.
• Your vehicle is at a stop continuously
for more than three minutes.
The system may deactivate or prevent
activating when requested if:
• The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
• The brake temperature is too high.
• There is a failure in the system or a
related system.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL SPEED
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press the Set+ or Set- buttons
to set the current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E337576
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
from a Complete Stop
Press the Set+ or Set- buttons
while keeping the brake pedal
fully depressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 km/h when in
metric units or 15 mph when in imperial
units.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Note: The system will activate from a
complete stop only when it detects a lead
vehicle in close proximity.
318
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Manually Changing the Set Speed
Press the Set+ button to
increase the set speed in small
increments. Press and hold the
Set+ button to accelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
Press the Set- button to
decrease the set speed in small
increments. Press and hold the
Set- button to decelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
You can also press the accelerator or brake
pedal until you reach the speed you prefer.
Press the Set+ or Set- button to select the
current speed as the set speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed continuously displays in the
information display when the system is
active.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL GAP
Press the button to cycle
through the four gap settings.
E337576
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore, the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Gap DistanceGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
319
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain the gap setting.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small,
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow
down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap
distance from the vehicle in front of you.
The system only applies limited braking.
You can override the system by applying
the brakes.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
information display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E308130
Press the button or tap the brake
pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
E308130
Press the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the
previously set speed and gap setting. The
set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Resuming the Set Speed from a
Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than a few seconds, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
more than a few seconds, an indicator and
message displays.
E335548
320
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Cruise control does not resume automatic-
ally when this display is active.
Stopped
If the lead vehicle begins to move, you are
prompted to press the resume button.
Press button to resume
Press and release the button or use the
accelerator pedal to resume following the
lead vehicle.
Displays when on a limited access highway
after following a vehicle to a complete stop.
In this situation, the vehicle resumes
following the lead vehicle without a button
press or pressing the accelerator pedal. The
system can remain in auto-resume state
for approximately 30 seconds, after which
it no longer automatically resumes.
Auto-Resume
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon
does not appear in the instrument cluster
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E144529
Illuminates when you switch
adaptive cruise control on. The
color of the indicator changes to
indicate the system status.
White indicates the system is on but
inactive.
Green indicates that you set the speed and
the system is active.
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
321
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
4. Press Normal Cruise Control.
E332905
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting
does not display, and the system does not
respond to lead vehicles. Automatic
braking remains active to maintain set
speed. The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
LANE CENTERING
How Does Lane Centering Work
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
uses radar and camera sensors to help
keep your vehicle in the lane by applying
continuous assistance steering torque
input toward the lane center on highways.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
setting operates normally.
Lane Centering Precautions
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
if any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
changes or modifications to the steering
wheel could affect the functionality or
performance of the system. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
or contradicted by a lane centering
precaution. See Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions (page 315).
Lane Centering Requirements
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
The system only activates when all of the
following occur:
• You have adaptive cruise control with
stop and go on.
• Lane centering assist is enabled in your
information and entertainment screen.
See Switching Lane Centering On
and Off (page 323).
• You have your hands on the steering
wheel.
• The system detects both lane
markings.
Note: If it does not detect valid lane
markings, the system stays inactive until
valid markings are available.
Lane Centering Limitations
Adaptive cruise control limitations apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
or contradicted by a lane centering
limitation. See Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations (page 316).
322
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Lane Centering may not correctly operate
in any of the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The system does not detect at least
one lane marking or when lanes merge
or split.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Areas under construction or new
infrastructure.
• When modifications to the steering
system have been made.
• When using a spare tire.
• In high wind conditions.
Note: The driving assistance torque is
limited and may not be sufficient for all
driving situations such as driving through
tight curves or driving through curves at high
speeds.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
may deviate from the center line.
Switching Lane Centering On and
Off
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E308131
Press the button.
The indicator appears in the information
display. When the system is on, the color
of the indicator changes to indicate the
system status.
You can override the system at any time
by steering your vehicle.
Note: The correct requirements must be
met before you can switch the system on.
See Lane Centering Requirements (page
322).
Enabling and Disabling Lane
Centering
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
4. Press Lane Centering Assist.
Lane Centering Alerts
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
When the system is active and detects no
steering activity for a period of time, the
system alerts you to put your hands on the
steering wheel. If you do not react to the
warnings the system cancels and slows
your vehicle down to idle speeds while
maintaining steering control.
The system also alerts you if your vehicle
crosses lane markings without detected
steering activity.
Note: The system may detect a light grip
or touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
driving.
When an external condition cancels the
system, for example, no lane markings
available, a tone sounds and a message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
E308130
If your vehicle starts to slow
down, provide steering input to
the wheel and press and release
the button to regain full system
performance.
Note: The system disables until the next
key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to
driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
323
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Lane Centering Automatic
Cancellation
When an external condition cancels the
system, for example, no lane markings
available, a tone sounds and a message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
E308130
If your vehicle starts to slow
down, you must provide steering
input to the wheel and press and
release the button to regain full system
performance.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too wide or too
narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
markings.
• Lane markings cross over one another.
Note: The system disables until the next
key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to
driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
Lane Centering Indicators
E297977
Illuminates when you switch
lane centering on. The color of
the indicator changes to indicate
the system status.
Gray indicates the system is on but
inactive.
Green indicates the system is active and
applying steering torque assistance input
to keep your vehicle in the center of the
lane.
Amber with an audible tone and then gray
indicates a system automatic cancellation.
INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL (If
Equipped)
How Does Intelligent Adaptive
Cruise Control Work
Intelligent adaptive cruise control
combines speed sign recognition with
adaptive cruise control to adjust the cruise
set speed to the speed limit detected by
the speed sign recognition system. As the
system detects new speed signs, the set
speed updates.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
setting operates normally.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Requirements
Traffic sign recognition must be enabled
for intelligent adaptive cruise control to be
active.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations
The speed limit information provided by
the navigation map data could be
inaccurate or out of date.
324
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The system may not detect and read
speed limit signs with conditional
information, for example, when a sign is
flashing, during specific time ranges, or
when children are present.
Note: The system does not set the vehicle
speed to speed limits shown with a
supplementary traffic sign.
Under certain conditions, the system may
not adjust the vehicle speed until after your
vehicle passes the speed limit.
Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Off
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
4. Press Intelligent.
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
4. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
5. Press Speed Sign Recognition.
6. Press Tolerance.
7. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
Note: You cannot set the tolerance more
than 19 mph (30 km/h) above or below the
recognized speed.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Alerts
If you increase the set speed beyond the
speed limit or speed limit plus a positive
tolerance value, the set speed indicator
flashes.
The warning does not occur if:
• You override the set speed using the
accelerator pedal.
• The vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed due to being on a downhill slope.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators
E337564
The set speed limit displays next to the
detected speed limit in the instrument
cluster.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
– TROUBLESHOOTING
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages - Vehicles
With: Lane Centering
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages depending upon
which cluster type you have.
325
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Make sure you return your hands to the steering wheel and
provide steering input.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Lane centering assist conditions exist preventing the system
from being available.
Lane Centering Assist
Not Available
The system is going to cancel and you must take control.Resume Control
Press the accelerator and follow the prompts.Press Accelerator Pedal
to Resume
326
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages - Vehicles
With: Stop and Go
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages depending upon
which cluster type you have.
ActionMessage
A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due
to inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a
blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you
restart your vehicle.
You have selected normal cruise control. The system does
not brake or react to traffic.
Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel
and you must take control.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
adaptive cruise control and there is no lead vehicle in range.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
327
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE
CONTROL
Your vehicle has various drive modes that
you can select for different driving
conditions. Depending on the drive mode
that you select, the system adjusts various
vehicle settings.
HOW DOES DRIVE MODE
CONTROL WORK
Drive mode control adjusts your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select.
Changing the drive mode changes the
functionality of the steering system to
adjust the steering effort and feel.
The stability and traction control assist
your vehicle control in adverse conditions
or high-performance driving.
Throttle control enhances the powertrain
response, transmission controls become
optimized with shift schedules, and
four-wheel drive settings are optimized
and tuned to each mode.
Changing the drive mode engages or
disengages the electronic locking
differential.
Changing the drive mode changes the
four-wheel drive modes to be the default,
available or not available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system for
proper operation. If a mode is unavailable
due to a system fault, the mode defaults to
normal.
Note: The system reverts to the normal
mode each time you start your vehicle. At
startup the system also displays a prompt
on the instrument cluster display that gives
you the option to return to the previously
selected drive mode during the last ignition
cycle. If you select yes, the system returns
to the last selected drive mode and the
driveline setting associated with that mode.
If you select no, the system remains in
normal mode and the driveline setting
associated with that mode. If you do not
select yes or no, the system stays in normal
mode and the driveline stays in the last used
setting.
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE
E308146
Rotate the drive mode control on the
center console to select or change a drive
mode.
Note: Button icons vary depending on the
vehicle.
328
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
DRIVE MODES
Deep Snow/Sand - 4x4
E295420
For off-road driving on soft, dry
sand or deep snow. This mode
optimizes accelerator pedal
response, traction and stability controls to
help maintain forward momentum. If your
vehicle becomes stuck in deep conditions,
use this mode to help get unstuck.
Four-wheel drive high is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
low is selectable in deep snow/sand mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving
on pavement or packed snow. This could
cause driveline bind up and damage the
system depending on the four-wheel drive
mode selection. See Four-Wheel Drive
(page 260).
Eco - 4x4
E295413
For efficient driving. This mode
helps deliver maximum fuel
efficiency and helps to increase
driving range.
Two-wheel drive high is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
low is not available in eco mode.
Eco - 4x2
E295413
For efficient driving. This mode
helps deliver maximum fuel
efficiency and helps to increase
driving range.
Mud/Ruts - 4x4
E296606
For off-road driving. This mode
enhances vehicle performance
to traverse muddy, rutted or
uneven terrains.
Four-wheel drive high is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
low is selectable in mud/rut mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving
on pavement or packed snow. This could
cause driveline bind up and damage the
system depending on the four-wheel drive
mode selection. See Four-Wheel Drive
(page 260).
Normal - 4x4
E225310
For everyday driving. This mode
is the perfect balance of
excitement, comfort and
convenience. This is the default mode after
each ignition cycle.
Two-wheel drive high is the default
four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive
modes are selectable when in normal
mode.
Normal - 4x2
E225310
For everyday driving. This mode
is the perfect balance of
excitement, comfort and
convenience. This is the default mode after
each ignition cycle.
Rock Crawl - 4x4
E225315
For off-road driving and
optimum rock-climbing. Rock
crawl mode engages the
electronic locking differential. Rock crawl
mode optimizes the throttle and
transmission response to provide you
additional control of your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive low is the only four-wheel
drive mode available in rock crawl mode.
329
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Slippery - 4x2
E295414
For less than ideal road
conditions such as snow or ice
covered roads. This mode can
be used for crossing terrain where a firm
surface is covered with loose, wet or
slippery material. Slippery mode lowers
throttle response and optimizes shifting
for slippery surfaces.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving
on dry pavement. This could cause driveline
bind up and damage the system depending
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 260).
Slippery - 4x4, Vehicles With: 2-
Speed Torque On Demand
E295414
For less than ideal road
conditions such as snow or ice
covered roads. This mode can
be used for crossing terrain where a firm
surface is covered with loose, wet or
slippery material. Slippery mode lowers
throttle response and optimizes shifting
for slippery surfaces.
Four-wheel drive auto is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Two-wheel drive
high is not available in slippery mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving
on dry pavement. This could cause driveline
bind up and damage the system depending
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 260).
Slippery - 4x4, Vehicles With:
Electronic Shift-On-The-Fly
E295414
For less than ideal road
conditions such as snow or ice
covered roads. This mode can
be used for crossing terrain where a firm
surface is covered with loose, wet or
slippery material. Slippery mode lowers
throttle response and optimizes shifting
for slippery surfaces.
Four-wheel drive high is the default
four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive
modes are selectable in slippery mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving
on dry pavement. This could cause driveline
bind up and damage the system depending
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 260).
Sport - 4x2
E246593
For sporty driving with improved
performance handling and
response. This mode increases
accelerator pedal response and provides
a sportier steering feel. The powertrain
system holds onto lower gears longer,
helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
Sport - 4x4, Vehicles With: 2-
Speed Torque On Demand
E246593
For sporty driving with improved
performance handling and
response. This mode increases
accelerator pedal response and provides
a sportier steering feel. The powertrain
system holds onto lower gears longer,
helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
Four-wheel drive auto is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
low is not available in sport mode.
330
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Sport - 4x4, Vehicles With:
Electronic Shift-On-The-Fly
E246593
For sporty driving with improved
performance handling and
response. This mode increases
accelerator pedal response and provides
a sportier steering feel. The powertrain
system holds onto lower gears longer,
helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
Two-wheel drive high is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
low is not available in sport mode.
Tow/Haul - 4x4
E246592
For improved transmission
operation when towing a trailer
or a heavy load. This mode
moves upshifts to higher engine speeds to
reduce the frequency of transmission
shifting. This mode also provides engine
braking in all forward gears, which slows
your vehicle and assists you in controlling
your vehicle when descending a grade. The
amount of downshift braking provided
varies based on the amount you press the
brake pedal.
All four-wheel drive modes are selectable
in tow/haul mode. This mode does not
default to a certain four-wheel drive mode.
Tow/Haul - 4x2
E246592
For improved transmission
operation when towing a trailer
or a heavy load. This mode
moves upshifts to higher engine speeds to
reduce the frequency of transmission
shifting. This mode also provides engine
braking in all forward gears, which slows
your vehicle and assists you in controlling
your vehicle when descending a grade. The
amount of downshift braking provided
varies based on the amount you press the
brake pedal.
Trail - 4x2
E295419
Trail mode is for off-road driving
on muddy, rutted, soft or uneven
terrain. This mode lowers
throttle response to increase wheel spin
to keep the tires clear and to prevent
getting stuck.
DRIVE MODE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Drive Mode Control – Warning
Lamps
E130458
Some drive modes reduce
traction and stability control
performance and the indicator
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Drive Mode Control – Information Messages
ActionMessage
You have selected a four-wheel drive mode
that is not available in the current drive
mode. Select an available four-wheel drive
mode.
Selected 4x4 Mode Not Available in Current
Drive Mode
331
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Drive Mode Control – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why did the system default to normal
mode?
If a mode is unavailable due to a
system fault, it defaults to normal
mode.
332
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
WHAT IS THE LANE KEEPING
SYSTEM
The lane keeping system alerts you by
providing temporary steering assistance
or steering wheel vibration when it detects
an unintended lane departure.
HOW DOES THE LANE
KEEPING SYSTEM WORK
The lane keeping system uses a forward
looking camera mounted on the windshield
to monitor vehicle movement within the
travel lane.
When the camera detects a drift out of the
travel lane, the lane keeping system alerts
the driver by vibrating the steering wheel,
or aids the driver by providing a small
steering input to move the vehicle back
into the travel lane.
The driver can select one of three modes:
• Alert (If Equipped)
• Aid
• Alert + Aid
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
The lane keeping system only operates
when the vehicle speed is greater than
40 mph (64 km/h).
The system works when the camera can
detect at least one lane marking.
The lane keeping system may not correctly
operate in any of the following conditions:
• The lane keeping system does not
detect at least one lane marking.
• You switch the turn signal on.
• You apply direct steering, accelerate
fast or brake hard.
• The vehicle speed is less than 40 mph
(64 km/h).
333
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
• The anti-lock brake, stability control or
traction control system activates.
• The lane is too narrow.
• Something is obscuring the camera or
it is unable to detect the lane markings
due to environment, traffic or vehicle
conditions.
• Entering or exiting a tight curve when
driving at high speeds.
The lane keeping system may not correct
lane positioning in any of the following
conditions:
• High winds.
• Uneven road surfaces.
• Heavy or uneven loads.
• Incorrect tire pressure.
SWITCHING THE LANE
KEEPING SYSTEM ON AND
OFF
E334922
To activate the lane keeping
system, press the button on the
steering wheel.
To deactivate the lane keeping system,
press the button again.
Note: When switching the system on or off
a message appears in the information and
entertainment display to show the status.
Note: The system stores the on or off
setting until manually changed, unless it
detects a MyKey™. If the system detects a
MyKey™, it defaults to the last setting for
that MyKey™.
Note: If the system detects a MyKey™,
pressing the button does not affect the on
or off status of the system. You can only
change the mode and intensity settings.
SWITCHING THE LANE
KEEPING SYSTEM MODE
The lane keeping system has different
settings that you can view or adjust using
the information display.
The system stores the last known selection
for each of these settings. You do not need
to readjust your settings each time you
switch on the system.
To change the lane keeping system mode,
use the touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Lane-Keeping System.
4. Press Lane-Keeping Mode.
5. Select a mode.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle. If the
system detects a MyKey™, it defaults to the
last setting for that MyKey™.
ALERT MODE
What Is Alert Mode
Alert mode vibrates the steering wheel
when it detects an unintended lane
departure.
334
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
How Does Alert Mode Work
E165515
When in alert mode, the lane keeping
system alerts you by vibrating the steering
wheel. The intensity of the vibration is set
through the lane keeping system menu.
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Vibration Intensity
To change the steering wheel vibration
intensity, use the touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Lane-Keeping System.
4. Press Lane-Keeping Intensity.
5. Select an intensity setting.
AID MODE
What Is Aid Mode
Aid mode provides temporary steering
assistance toward the center of the lane.
How Does Aid Mode Work
E165516
The lane keeping system aids you when
an unintentional lane departure occurs.
The system provides a small steering input
to move the vehicle towards the center of
the lane.
ALERT AND AID MODE
What Is Alert and Aid Mode
Alert and aid mode uses multiple features
to keep you in your lane. The system first
provides a small steering input to bring
your vehicle back towards the center of
the lane. If your vehicle moves too far out
of the center of the lane the system alerts
you with vibration in the steering wheel.
335
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work
E165517
Alert.A
Aid.B
The lane keeping system detects a lane
departure and provides aid when the
vehicles enters B and applies the
additional alert warning if A is entered.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
INDICATORS
E335296
If you switch the lane keeping system on,
a graphic with lane markings appears in
the information display.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still display if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
While the lane keeping system is on, the
color of the lane markings change to
indicate the system status.
RedYellowGreenGray
Indicates that the
system is providing
or has just provided
a lane keeping alert
warning.
Indicates that the
system is providing
or has just provided
a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Indicates that the
system is available
or ready to provide a
warning or interven-
tion on the indicated
side.
Indicates that the
system is tempor-
arily unavailable to
provide a warning or
intervention on the
indicated side.
336
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
Lane Keeping System – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that
has caused the system to be temporarily
unavailable.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that
requires you to clean the windshield in order
for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required
The system requests that you keep your
hands on the steering wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
337
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked Questions
Why is the feature not available (lane markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings for an extended interval of time.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example, in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings, or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example, partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
You have not calibrated the camera after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight or on uneven roads.
338
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid, or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy, uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
You changed the tires or modified the suspension.
339
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
Blind spot information system detects
vehicles that may have entered the blind
spot zone.
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM WORK
Blind spot information system uses
sensors on both sides of your vehicle,
detecting rearward from the exterior
mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
beyond the rear bumper. The detection
area extends to approximately 59 ft (18 m)
beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle
speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h)
to alert you of faster approaching vehicles.
E255695
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the blind
spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
Note: Blind spot information system does
not prevent contact with other vehicles. It
does not detect parked vehicles,
pedestrians, animals or other infrastructure.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Blind spot information system does not
operate in park (P) or reverse (R).
The system may not alert you if a vehicle
quickly passes through the detection zone.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Blind spot information system turns on
when all the following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
SWITCHING BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
To switch blind spot information system
on or off, use the touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Blind Spot Information System.
4. Switch the feature on or off.
340
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
When you switch blind spot information
system off, a warning lamp illuminates and
a message displays. When you switch the
system on or off, the alert indicators flash
twice.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
LOCATING THE BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
SENSORS
E310325
The sensors are inside the brake lamp on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
See Blind Spot Information System –
Information Messages (page 343). The
alert indicators illuminate but the system
does not alert you.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM WITH TRAILER
COVERAGE (If Equipped)
What Is Blind Spot Information
System with Trailer Coverage
E225007
Blind spot information system detects
vehicles that may have entered the blind
spot zone.
Blind Spot Information System
With Trailer Coverage Limitations
Trailer coverage only supports
conventional trailers. The system turns off
if you select a fifth wheel trailer type.
Make sure the trailer width is less than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) and the length is less than
33 ft (10.1 m). If you input values higher,
the system turns off.
341
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
Some trailers could cause a slight change
in system performance:
• Large box trailers could cause false
alerts to occur when driving next to
infrastructures or near parked cars. A
false alert could also occur while
making a 90-degree turn.
• Trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a
total length greater than 20 ft (6 m)
could cause delayed alerts when a
vehicle is passing at high speeds.
• Box trailers that have a width greater
than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front could
cause early alerts when you pass a
vehicle.
• Clam shell or v-nose box trailers with
a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at
the front could cause delayed alerts
when a vehicle traveling the same
speed as your vehicle merges lanes.
Setting a Trailer Length
You can set-up a trailer to work with the
blind spot information system through the
touchscreen. When setting up a trailer, a
sequence of screens appear asking for
trailer information.
1. Select type of trailer screen -
conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.
Note: The system only supports
conventional trailers.
2. Do you want to set up blind spot with
trailer screen? If no, the system turns
off. If yes, the menu goes to the next
screen.
3. Is the width less than 9 ft (2.6 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)? If no,
the system turns off. If yes, the menu
goes to the next screen.
4. Trailer width measurement. Measure
the width at the front of the trailer. It is
not measured at the widest point of
the trailer. The maximum width at the
front of the trailer the system can
support is 9 ft (2.6 m).
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement. You only need
to confirm that the width of the trailer is 9 ft
(2.6 m) or less.
5. Trailer length measurement. The trailer
length is the distance between the
trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
trailer. The maximum length that the
system can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
6. Enter the length of trailer. The default
setting is 18 ft (5.5 m). Toggling up or
down using the menu buttons
increases or decreases the
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select a
length that is equal to or within 3 ft
(1 m) of the actual measured length.
For example, if the actual measure
length is 25 ft (7.5 m), toggle the length
in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). The
system setup saves when you enter the
length of the trailer.
Note: If the trailer is a bike rack or cargo
rack with electrical lighting, enter a length
of 3 ft (1 m). Cross traffic alert remains on
for trailers with a length of 3 ft (1 m) or less.
Note: The system requires proper
measurement and measure entry to function
properly.
Selecting a Trailer
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the trailer set up menu appears in the
touchscreen. This menu allows you to set
up a new trailer or choose from a
previously set up trailer. A warning
message appears and the system turns off
if you do not choose or add a new trailer.
342
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
Note: The warning message may not
appear until your vehicle reaches 22 mph
(35 km/h).
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM INDICATORS
E309137
E249861
E249861
When blind spot information
system detects a vehicle, an
alert indicator illuminates in the
exterior mirror on the side the approaching
vehicle is coming from. If you turn the turn
signal on for that side of your vehicle, the
alert indicator flashes.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
Blind Spot Information System – Information Messages
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Blind Spot System Fault
Something is blocking the sensors. Clean
the sensors.
Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system automatically turns off and
displays this message when you connect a
trailer to the vehicle that does not have a
trailer blind spot system or when you switch
the trailer blind spot system off through the
touchscreen.
Blind Spot Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
343
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
HOW DOES CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT WORK
Cross Traffic Alert detects vehicles that
approach at a speed between 4–37 mph
(6–60 km/h). Coverage decreases when
the sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed.
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.
Note: Slowly reversing helps increase the
coverage area and effectiveness.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The
cross traffic alert system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
LIMITATIONS
Cross Traffic Alert may not correctly
operate when any of the following occur:
• Something is blocking the sensors.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Your vehicle speed is greater than
7 mph (12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
SWITCHING CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT ON AND OFF
To switch cross traffic alert on or off use
the touchscreen.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
344
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped)
3. Switch Cross Traffic Alert on or off.
Note: The system switches on every time
you switch the ignition on. To permanently
switch the system off, contact an authorized
dealer.
LOCATING THE CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT SENSORS
E310325
The sensors are inside the brake lamp on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
If something is blocking the sensors, a
message may appear in the information
display when you shift into reverse (R).
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT WITH
TRAILER COVERAGE (If
Equipped)
What Is Cross Traffic Alert With
Trailer Coverage
Cross traffic alert with trailer coverage
allows the system to continue operating
with a trailer or trailer hitch attachment.
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage Limitations
Cross traffic alert remains on when you
attach a trailer in vehicles that come with
blind spot information system with trailer
tow under the following conditions:
• You connect a trailer.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)
in the information display.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
INDICATORS
E268294
When the cross traffic alert
detects an approaching vehicle,
a tone sounds, a warning lamp
illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
and arrows appear in the information
display to show which side the vehicle is
approaching from.
345
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped)
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
a message appears in the information
display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
appears in the information display.
Note: In some conditions, the system could
alert you, even when there is nothing in the
detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
Cross Traffic Alert – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays instead of indication arrows when
the system detects a vehicle. Check for
approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert
Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system
sensors. Clean the sensors. If the message
continues to appear, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault
Displays if you attach a trailer to your
vehicle.
Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
346
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped)
WHAT IS PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST
Pre-Collision Assist with Pedestrian
Detection
Pre-collision assist detects and warns of
approaching hazards in the roadway. If
your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the
same direction as yours, or a pedestrian
within your driving path, the system
provides multiple levels of assistance to
help avoid a collision.
HOW DOES PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST WORK
The system warns the driver of potential
hazards by providing three levels of
assistance.
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
potential hazards the system provides the
following levels of functionality:
1. Alert.
2. Brake Support.
3. Automatic Emergency Braking.
E329466
Alert: When active, a flashing
visual warning appears and an
audible warning tone sounds.
Brake Support: The system is designed
to help reduce the impact speed by
preparing the brakes for rapid braking. The
system does not automatically apply the
brakes. If you press the brake pedal, the
system could apply additional braking up
to maximum braking force, even if you
lightly press the brake pedal.
Automatic Emergency Braking:
Automatic emergency braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent.
Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
although the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Each system has various levels of
detection capabilities. See Pre-Collision
Assist Limitations (page 348).
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead
to a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during
cold and severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
adversely affect the system. Keep the
front camera and radar free of snow and
ice. Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
347
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
WARNING: Take additional care if
your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are
towing a trailer. These conditions could
result in reduced performance of this
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system cannot
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain a safe distance
and speed.
WARNING: In situations where the
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include
but are not limited to direct or low
sunlight, vehicles at night without tail
lights, unconventional vehicle types,
pedestrians with complex backgrounds,
running pedestrians, partly obscured
pedestrians, or pedestrians that the
system cannot distinguish from a group.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
Pre-collision assist depends on the
detection ability of its camera and sensors.
Any obstructions or damage to these areas
can limit detection or prevent the system
from functioning. See Locating the
Pre-Collision Assist Sensors (page 349).
The system is active at speeds above
3 mph (5 km/h)
Note: The pre-collision assist system
automatically disables when you select
four-wheel drive low, manually disable
AdvanceTrac™, or select rock crawl mode.
Note: Brake support and automatic
emergency braking are active at speeds up
to 75 mph (120 km/h). If the vehicle has a
radar sensor included with adaptive cruise
control, then brake support and automatic
emergency braking are active up to the
maximum speed of the vehicle.
Pedestrian Detection Limitations
Pedestrian detection is active at speeds
up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Pedestrian detection operates optimally
when detected hazards are clearly
identifiable. System performance may
reduce in situations where pedestrians are
running, partly obscured, have a complex
background, or cannot be distinguished
from a group.
Intersection Assist (If Equipped)
If your vehicle comes with a radar sensor
included in adaptive cruise control, the
pre-collision assist system may operate in
a scenario where you are turning across an
oncoming vehicle's path. Detection of
vehicles driving in an oncoming direction
is active if your vehicle is driving at speeds
up to 19 mph (30 km/h).
E309750
348
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
SWITCHING PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST ON AND OFF
To switch the system on or off, use the
touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
4. Switch the feature on or off.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the touchscreen controls in the
pre-collision assist menu:
• Change alert and distance alert
sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
• Switch distance indication and alert on
or off.
• If required, switch automatic
emergency braking on or off.
• If required, switch the entire
pre-collision assist feature on or off.
• If required, switch evasive steering
assist on or off.
Note: Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering turn on every time you
switch the ignition on.
Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, we
recommend that you switch the system off
if you install a snow plow or similar object
in such a way that it may block the radar
sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected
setting across key cycles.
Note: If you switch automatic emergency
braking off, evasive steering assist switches
off.
LOCATING THE PRE-
COLLISION ASSIST SENSORS
E328125
Camera.1
Radar sensor (if equipped).2
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, something is obstructing the radar
signals or camera images. The radar sensor
is behind the fascia cover in the center of
the lower grille. With a blocked sensor or
camera, the system may not function, or
performance may reduce. See
Pre-Collision Assist – Information
Messages (page 353).
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone
could change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Have your vehicle
serviced to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
349
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message could display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor recalibrates successfully.
DISTANCE INDICATION (If
Equipped)
What Is Distance Indication
Distance indication displays the gap
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you.
Note: The graphic does not display if you
switch on cruise control or adaptive cruise
control.
Time GapDistance GapDistance Indic-
ator Color
System Sensit-
ivity
Vehicle Speed
Greater than 0.9
seconds.
Greater than
82 ft (25 m).
Gray.Normal.62 mph
(100 km/h).
0.6-0.9
seconds.
56–82 ft
(17–25 m).
Yellow.
Less than 0.6
seconds.
Less than 56 ft
(17 m).
Red.
350
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Switching Distance Indication On
and Off
To switch the system on or off, use the
touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
4. Switch Distance Indication on or off.
Distance Indication Indicator
The indicator displays the time gap
between your vehicle and vehicles traveling
in the same direction ahead of you.
E254791
DISTANCE ALERT (If
Equipped)
What Is Distance Alert
The system alerts you with a warning lamp
if the distance to the vehicle ahead is
small.
Note: The warning lamp does not
illuminate if cruise control or adaptive cruise
control is active.
Adjusting the Sensitivity of
Distance Alert
To adjust the sensitivity of the system, use
the touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
4. Press Alert Sensitivity.
5. Select a setting.
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY
BRAKING
What Is Automatic Emergency
Braking
Automatic emergency braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
reduce impact damage to avoid the crash
completely.
Automatic emergency braking is only
available up to certain speeds. See
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations (page
348).
351
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Switching Automatic Emergency
Braking On and Off
To switch the system on or off, use the
touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
4. Press Auto Emergency Braking.
5. Switch the feature on or off.
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
(If Equipped)
What Is Evasive Steering Assist
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a road
user, evasive steering assist helps you steer
around the road user.
After you turn the steering wheel in an
attempt to avoid a crash with the road
user, the system applies additional steering
torque to help you steer around the road
user. After you pass the road user, the
system applies steering torque when you
turn the steering wheel to steer back into
the lane. The system deactivates after you
fully pass the road user.
Note: Road users are defined as obstacles
encountered on the road that the system is
able to detect. See Pre-Collision Assist
Precautions (page 347).
Evasive Steering Assist
Limitations
Evasive steering assist only activates when
all the following occur:
• Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering assist are on.
• The system detects a road user ahead
and starts to apply the brakes.
• You significantly turn the steering
wheel to steer around a road user.
Note: The system does not automatically
steer around a road user. If you do not turn
the steering wheel, the system does not
activate.
Note: The system does not activate if the
distance to the road user ahead is too small
and the system cannot avoid a crash.
Switching Evasive Steering Assist
On and Off
To switch the system on or off, use the
touchscreen:
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
4. Switch Evasive Steering on or off.
Note: If you switch automatic emergency
braking off, evasive steering assist turns off.
Note: Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering assist turn on every time
you switch the ignition on.
352
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Pre-Collision Assist – Warning
Lamps
E335612
A telltale illuminates in the
cluster to indicate if the system
is disabled or unavailable.
Pre-Collision Assist – Information Messages
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad
weather, ice, mud or water in front of the
radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor
Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available
353
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently
Asked Questions
Camera Troubleshooting
The windshield in front of the camera
is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the outside of the windshield in
front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera
is clean, but the message remains in
the instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the camera to detect that
there is no obstruction.
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently
Asked Questions - Vehicles With:
Intersection Assist
Camera Troubleshooting
The windshield in front of the camera
is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the outside of the windshield in
front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera
is clean, but the message remains in
the instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the camera to detect that
there is no obstruction.
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)
The surface of the radar in the grille is
dirty or obstructed.
Clean the grille surface in front of the
radar or remove the object causing the
obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is
clean, but the message remains in the
instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the radar to detect that
there is no obstruction.
Heavy rain, spray or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is
temporarily disabled. Pre-collision
assist reactivates a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the
surface of the road could interfere with
the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is
temporarily disabled. Pre-collision
assist reactivates a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front
end impact.
Have your vehicle serviced to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
354
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
WHAT IS DRIVER ALERT
Driver alert alerts you if it determines that
you are becoming drowsy or if your driving
deteriorates.
HOW DOES DRIVER ALERT
WORK
Driver Alert calculates your alertness level
based on your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings and other factors
through use of the front camera sensor
behind the interior mirror.
E309385
DRIVER ALERT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Take regular rest
breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
Note: If something is blocking the camera
or damaged the windshield, Driver Alert may
not function.
DRIVER ALERT LIMITATIONS
Driver alert may not function correctly if:
• The sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
• Your vehicle's speed is less than
approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
SWITCHING DRIVER ALERT ON
AND OFF
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
355
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driver Alert (If Equipped)
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Switch Driver Alert on or off.
Note: The system remains on or off
depending on how it was last set.
Resetting Driver Alert
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver door.
DRIVER ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
Driver Alert – Information Messages
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
356
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driver Alert (If Equipped)
WHAT IS SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION
Speed sign recognition detects speed limit
signs to inform you of the current speed
limit. Detected speed signs appear in the
information display.
HOW DOES SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION WORK
Speed sign recognition uses a sensor
behind the interior mirror to detect speed
signs.
If your vehicle has speed sign recognition
with navigation, stored speed sign data
may influence the indicated speed limit
value.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding the
sensor.
Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may not
correctly function.
Note: The system may not detect all speed
signs and may incorrectly read signs.
Note: Always fit our original parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
reduce system performance.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
LIMITATIONS
Speed sign recognition may not operate
correctly due to:
• Outdated map data.
• Incorrect recognition of speed limits by
the sensor of signs on parallel roads or
exit ramps.
• Missed recognition of faded, dirty, or
distorted signs.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
INDICATORS
E317824
When the system detects a speed limit
sign, it appears in the information display.
357
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Speed Sign Recognition (If Equipped)
SETTING THE SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION SPEED
WARNING
To set the speed warning, use the
touchscreen.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Speed Sign Recognition.
4. Switch the feature on or off.
SETTING THE SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION SPEED
TOLERANCE
To set the tolerance of the speed warning,
use the touchscreen.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Speed Sign Recognition.
4. Press Tolerance.
5. Use the + and - buttons to select the
required level.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION – TROUBLESHOOTING
Speed Sign Recognition – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The traffic sign data provided by the navig-
ation system is unavailable due to weak or
no signal. Wait for a short period of time for
the signal to improve. If the message
continues to appear, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See
Manual
358
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Speed Sign Recognition (If Equipped)
Speed Sign Recognition –
Frequently Asked Questions
Why does the speed limit change
without any sign on the road?
The speed limit changes due to the
speed limit data stored in the map
data.
Why does speed sign recognition show
a wrong speed limit?
The system shows a wrong speed limit
due to incorrect and outdated map
data or due to incorrect recognition of
the speed limits by the camera.
359
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Speed Sign Recognition (If Equipped)
LOAD CARRYING
PRECAUTIONS
Keep your loaded vehicle weight
within its design rating capability,
with or without a trailer. Properly
loading your vehicle provides
maximum return of vehicle design
performance. Before you load your
vehicle, become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: When loading
the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
360
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
USING A SLIDE-IN CAMPER
For information regarding the use of
slide-in campers, consult the Truck
Camper Loading document supplied with
your vehicle.
Note: We do not recommend using a
slide-in camper on an F-150 SuperCrew cab.
LOCATING THE SAFETY
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION
LABELS
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
The Safety Compliance Certification label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
WHAT IS THE GROSS AXLE
WEIGHT RATING
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
WHAT IS THE GROSS VEHICLE
WEIGHT RATING
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WHAT IS THE GROSS
COMBINED WEIGHT RATING
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
361
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer, or online at
the website that follows.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guidesWebsite
362
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
CALCULATING PAYLOAD
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
CALCULATING THE LOAD
LIMIT
Steps for determining the correct
load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
363
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for
calculating the available
amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
364
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
365
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
PICKUP BED PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not allow people or
animals in truck beds that have
modifications, such as bed covers or
slide-in campers, when the engine is
running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
PICKUP BED ANCHOR POINTS
Pickup Bed Anchor Point
Precautions
WARNING: Always properly secure
cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle can be
limited either by volume capacity (how
much space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Locating the Pickup Bed Anchor
Points
The pickup bed anchor points are located
at each corner of the pickup bed.
E327579
366
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
Installing and Removing the
Pickup Bed Tie-Down Cleats (If
Equipped)
Installing the Cleats
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn
clockwise to unlock.
2. Insert the cleat into the pickup bed
anchor point and slide upward.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock.
E327575
Note: Leave the key in the lock when
removing or installing the cleats. The key
cannot be removed unless it is in the locked
position.
Removing the Cleats
To remove, reverse the installation
procedure.
Pickup Bed Anchor Point Load
Capacities
E327576
BA
Maximum force
between diagonally
opposed cleats
600 lb (272 kg).
Maximum force
between directly
opposed cleats
276 lb (125 kg).
Note: You could damage the pickup bed
walls if you overload the tie downs.
Note: Make sure that you properly balance
and secure the cargo load. Failure to do this
can cause cargo instability and damage to
the box.
Note: Do not secure cargo with tie downs
connected from the tie down brackets to
the cargo box tie downs. This could cause
the tailgate to detach.
367
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
TAILGATE ANCHOR POINTS
Locating the Tailgate Anchor
Points
The tailgate anchor points are located at
each side of the tailgate.
E327594
Note: You could damage the tailgate if you
overload the tie downs.
Tailgate Anchor Point Load
Capacities
E327790
A
The maximum force between the tailgate
anchor points 400 lb (181 kg).
Note: Do not secure cargo from a pickup
bed anchor point to a tailgate anchor point.
This could cause the tailgate to detach.
PICKUP BED RAMPS
Pickup Bed Ramp Precautions
WARNING: When sliding the ramp
up or down, take care not to get your
fingers or hands caught in the
mechanism. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Make sure that you
correctly install the ramp to the tailgate
plate. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not step or sit on
the ramp when it is in the stowed
position. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Only install the ramp
within the prescribed ramp angles.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
Note: Each pickup bed ramp has a
maximum capacity of 400 lb (181.4 kg).
Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground
before usage.
Note: For loading and unloading
equipment, your ramp should be set
between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees
downward to avoid damage to the ramp
claw and tailgate plate.
368
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
Note: When using your vehicle for off-road
operation, remove the bed ramps from the
vehicle and store them in a safe location
away from your vehicle.
Installing and Removing the
Pickup Bed Ramp Holder
Installing the Ramp Holder
E194387
1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over
the mounting plate and rotate the
ramp holder into position.
E194388
2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards
into the installed position.
3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
Removing the Ramp Holder
Remove in the reverse order.
Installing and Removing the
Pickup Bed Ramps
Note: You cannot use the pickup bed ramps
with the tailgate work surface or tailgate
step.
Installing the Bed Ramp
1. Remove the front and rear cables.
E194380
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew
the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.
E211150
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the open position.
Note: You can use a smooth surface tool
to rotate the stops.
369
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
E194382
5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate
plate.
E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and
extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.
Removing the Ramp
Remove in the reverse order.
Storing the Pickup Bed Ramps
Storing the Bed Ramp
1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.
6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Note: Make sure you properly secure the
locking cable. If the locking cable is
unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise.
370
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
CONNECTING A TRAILER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper
is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may
cause unpredictable handling, and could
result in serious personal injury.
Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% of the total weight of the
trailer is on the trailer coupler.
Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation and
adjustment specifications.
Service your vehicle more frequently if you
tow a trailer. See Normal Scheduled
Maintenance (page 605).
If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
Account for the trailer coupler weight as
part of your vehicle load when calculating
the total vehicle weight.
Do not exceed the load limits. See
Calculating the Load Limit (page 363).
HITCHES
Hooking Up a Trailer Using a
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper
is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may
cause unpredictable handling, and could
result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
E328252
2. Measure the height of your vehicle's
front wheel opening from the wheel to
the fender.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
A
E328314
4. Measure the height of your vehicle's
front wheel opening from the wheel to
the fender a second time.
Note: The second measurement should be
greater than the first.
371
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening is between the first and
second measurements.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer coupler securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
CONNECTING A TRAILER
Smart Trailer Tow Connector
Recognizing a Trailer
1. Attach the trailer and wiring connector
to your vehicle.
2. Switch on your vehicle.
3. Set up a profile for the trailer using the
touchscreen.
Note: If your vehicle does not recognize the
trailer, press and hold the brake pedal for a
few seconds.
Note: Trailer profiles store trailer types,
dimensions, preferences, trailer specific
mileage and fuel economy.
Note: Disabling the trailer detection
notification makes the default trailer profile
active when a connection is detected.
E193232
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
Safety Chains
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer
hitch as recommended by the
manufacturer. Cross the chains under the
trailer coupler and allow enough slack for
turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.
372
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
E265060
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
make sure the latch is fully closed.
Trailer Brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.
Trailer Connection Checklist
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Towing.
3. Press Connection Checklist.
Trailer Light Check
WARNING: Never connect any
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
lamp wiring; this may damage the
electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Perform a trailer light illumination
sequence to confirm that all lights are
functioning by using the FordPass app.
Note: The FordPass app allows one person
to confirm that all lights are functioning.
Electronic Park Hold
E337016
Applies the electronic parking
brake when you shift to park (P).
The electronic park hold button illuminates
when activated.
The feature prevents your vehicle from
moving in any direction when you are
aligned with your trailer coupler and shift
to park (P).
Note: The feature is active for the current
key cycle.
You can also press a zoom button when
using the camera views to switch the
feature on.
Trailer Connection Alarm
The alarm is set when the following occur:
• Your vehicle detects the trailer.
• Your vehicle is locked.
• The alarm is armed.
When the trailer is disconnected in this
state, the vehicle alarm sounds and an
alert is sent to your FordPass app.
Note: For reliable trailer detection, the
trailer’s lamps must be SAE certified for
each intended purpose.
Note: If the trailer is not compatible with
the feature, the turn signals flash twice.
373
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
CONNECTING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
Connecting a Trailer – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
The system senses a trailer connection
becomes disconnected, either intentionally
or unintentionally, during a given ignition
cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
There are certain faults in your vehicle
wiring and trailer wiring or brake system.
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer battery, or
your trailer battery voltage is very low.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
One or more tires on your trailer is below
the specified tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
Displays when one or more tires on the
trailer is above the recommended temper-
ature.
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunc-
tioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, have the system
checked.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire
pressure monitoring system.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Capability Not
Detected
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
is not setup.
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not Setup
See Manual
374
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the lowest rating capacity for
your vehicle or trailer hitch.
Overloading your vehicle or
trailer hitch can impair your
vehicle stability and handling.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not cut,
drill, weld or modify the trailer
hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch
could reduce the hitch rating.
WARNING: The anti-lock
brake system does not control
the trailer brakes.
TRAILER BRAKE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not connect a
trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle's brake system. Your
vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded require separate
functioning brake systems.
TOWING A TRAILER
LIMITATIONS
The vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Note: Your vehicle could have
reduced performance when
operating at high altitudes and
when heavily loaded or towing a
trailer. When driving at elevation,
to match driving performance as
perceived at sea level, reduce gross
vehicle weight and gross
combination weight by 2% per
1,000 ft (300 m) elevation.
375
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
LOADING YOUR TRAILER
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight. The
trailer tongue weight should
never exceed 10% of the
maximum towing capacity.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
TRAILER TOWING HINTS
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Periodically
inspect these components during and after
any towing operation.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be
present due to the increased payload
weight.
Your vehicle may have a temporary or
conventional spare tire. A temporary spare
tire is different in diameter or width,
tread-type, or is from a different
manufacturer than the road tires on your
vehicle. Consult information on the tire
label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.
When towing a trailer:
• Obey country specific regulations for
towing a trailer.
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off when you are
towing on long, steep slopes.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not continuously
apply the brakes, as they may overheat
and become less effective.
• If your transmission has Grade Assist
or Tow/Haul, use this feature when
towing. This provides engine braking
and helps eliminate excessive
transmission shifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle has AdvanceTrac with
roll stability control, this system may
turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed when towing may reduce
this tendency.
376
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
• If you are frequently towing a trailer in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating or any
combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant if the axle is not already
filled with it.
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
gradually brake.
• Avoid parking on a slope. However, if
you must park on a slope, turn the
steering wheel to point your vehicle
tires away from traffic flow, set the
parking brake, place the transmission
in park (P) and place wheel chocks in
front and back of the trailer wheels.
Note: Chocks are not included with your
vehicle.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer
brakes for trailers over a specified weight.
Be sure to check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as your vehicle's electrical
system may not include the wiring
connector needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
LAUNCHING OR RETRIEVING
A BOAT OR PERSONAL
WATERCRAFT
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding 6 in (15 cm) could allow water
to enter vehicle components, causing
internal damage to the components and
affecting driveability, emissions and
reliability.
Note: Replace the rear axle lubricant
anytime the rear axle has been submerged
in water.
Note: Disconnect the trailer wiring
connector before backing the trailer into the
water.
Note: Reconnect the trailer wiring
connector after removing the trailer from
the water.
377
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
TOWING WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
Recommended Towing Weights - 2.7L EcoBoost™
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
12,200 lb
(5,533 kg)
3.15RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
12,200 lb
(5,533 kg)
3.55RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
12,500 lb
(5,669 kg)
3.554WD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,600 lb
(3,900 kg)
13,200 lb
(5,987 kg)
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,500 lb
(3,855 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
378
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
3.15RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
3.55RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,700 lb
(3,493 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.554WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,600 lb
(3,900 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,400 lb
(3,810 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- H
379
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- H
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
163 in
(4,140 mm)
- H
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.31RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
3.554WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,400 lb
(3,810 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
380
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,100 lb
(3,674 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,100 lb
(4,581 kg)
15,300 lb
(6,939 kg)
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.15RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
3.15RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
381
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,100 lb
(3,674 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,100 lb
(4,581 kg)
15,400 lb
(6,985 kg)
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,800 lb
(3,538 kg)
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
3.15RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- L
382
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
7,800 lb
(3,538 kg)
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- L
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- H
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Values shown for low, L, or
high, H, capacity trailer tow
packages.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when
towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 6,000 lb (2,721 kg) or 36
ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with
the medium duty trailer tow
package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations
could significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
383
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.0L Diesel
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,800 lb
(4,898 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,200 lb
(5,533 kg)
2
17,700 lb
(8,028 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.314WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.554WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
3.554WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,700 lb
(4,853 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
17,700 lb
(8,028 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.314WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
384
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
18,000 lb
(8,164 kg)
2
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,600 lb
(4,808 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
17,800 lb
(8,073 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.314WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
18,000 lb
(8,164 kg)
2
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
1
Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2
Max duty trailer tow package.
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when
towing with, or by, the bumper only.
385
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36
ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with
the medium duty trailer tow
package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations
could significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.3L
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
5,000 lb
(2,267 kg)
1
9,400 lb
(4,263 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
5,100 lb
(2,313 kg)
2
9,700 lb
(4,400 kg)
2
3.554WD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
2
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
5,000 lb
(2,267 kg)
1
9,500 lb
(4,309 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
386
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
5,000 lb
(2,267 kg)
1
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,100 lb
(3,674 kg)
2
13,100 lb
(5,942 kg)
2
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
5,100 lb
(2,313 kg)
1
9,900 lb
(4,491 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
2
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
1
Medium duty trailer tow package.
2
Heavy duty trailer tow package.
387
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when
towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 6,000 lb (2,721 kg) or 36
ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with
the medium duty trailer tow
package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations
could significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.5L Ecoboost™
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,100 lb
(7,302 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,400 lb
(7,438 kg)
1
3.314WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,100 lb
(7,302 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
2
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
388
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,400 lb
(7,438 kg)
1
3.554WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
2
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
3.554WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,100 lb
(5,942 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,100 lb
(5,034 kg)
1
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
3.314WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
389
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
2
17,500 lb
(7,937 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,100 lb
(5,034 kg)
1
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
3.554WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
2
17,700 lb
(8,028 kg)
2
3.554WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
3.314WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
3.554WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.554WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
390
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
3.314WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
19,300 lb
(8,754 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
391
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,900 lb
(6,304 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
3.314WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.554WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
392
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
2
19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)
2
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
1
Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2
Max duty trailer tow package.
Note: All values calculated with SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing
with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4
m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the
performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance
and fuel economy.
393
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
16,700 lb
(7,574 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
1
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,400 lb
(5,624 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,100 lb
(5,035 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.55RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
394
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
1
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,400 lb
(5,624 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
1
Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2
Max duty trailer tow package.
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when
towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36
ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with
the medium duty trailer tow
package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations
could significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
395
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Recommended Towing Weights - 5.0L
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
1
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
1
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
1
13,200 lb
(5,987 kg)
1
3.314WD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,100 lb
(4,127 kg)
1
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
1
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
14,600 lb
(6,622 kg)
1
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,900 lb
(4,490 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,900 lb
(4,490 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
396
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.314WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
15,300 lb
(6,940 kg)
1
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,000 lb
(8,164 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,800 lb
(5,806 kg)
2
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
397
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,300 lb
(8,300 kg)
2
3.734WD
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,800 lb
(4,445 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,800 lb
(4,445 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,500 lb
(4,309 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.314WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
15,500 lb
(7,030 kg)
1
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
2
17,800 lb
(8,073 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
2
17,600 lb
(7,983 kg)
2
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
398
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,400 lb
(4,263 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.314WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,200 lb
(8,255 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,300 lb
(8,300 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
399
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
2
3.734WD
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,400 lb
(4,263 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.314WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
18,100 lb
(8,210 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
400
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.15RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.31RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
9,300 lb
(4,218 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
3.314WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,200 lb
(8,255 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.73RWD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
10,300 lb
(4,672 kg)
1
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
401
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Driveline
Cab –
Wheel-
base in
(mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
18,600 lb
(8,436 kg)
2
3.734WD
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
1
Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2
Max duty trailer tow package.
Note: All values calculated with SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing
with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4
m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the
performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance
and fuel economy.
402
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
What Is the Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight
The maximum loaded trailer
weight is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow.
For additional information, visit
www.fleet.ford.com/
towing-guides.
Calculating the Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, for
example a draw bar, ball, locks
or weight distributing hardware.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
403
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
Towing a Trailer – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
The left-hand trailer turn lamp requires service.Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
The right-hand trailer turn lamp requires service.Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
The trailer battery requires service.Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
The trailer lighting module requires service.Trailer Lighting Module Fault See
Manual
The trailer stoplamps require service.Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Check
Lamps
The trailer sway control detects trailer sway. Reduce
the vehicle's speed.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
Displays when one or more tires on the trailer is
above the recommended temperature.
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
One or more tires on your trailer is below the
specified tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
A trailer tire pressure sensor requires service. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system requires
service. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not
setup.
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not
Setup See Manual
404
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
WHAT IS THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
The trailer brake controller assists in
smooth and effective trailer braking based
on the towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE
CONTROLLER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Use the integrated
trailer brake controller to properly adjust
the trailer brakes and check all
connections before towing a trailer.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
USING THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover issues with
your trailer.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
Note: Select default mode if the trailer has
surge brakes, or no brakes at all. The system
has no effect on the braking performance
of the trailer in either of these cases.
Note: If a trailer is connected by a four-pin
connector, the trailer braking function will
not be supported.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
message confirming connection
appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment to find the
desired starting point. A gain setting of
6.0 is a good starting point for heavier
loads.
Note: Use the following steps to adjust the
gain setting whenever road, weather and
trailer, or vehicle loading conditions, change
from when you initially set the gain.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
405
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Note: Only perform this procedure at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
Note: The trailer brake controller reduces
output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph
(18 km/h) so that trailer and vehicle braking
is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only
available when applying the brakes using
your vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
Note: Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work independently of
each other. Changing the gain setting on the
controller does not affect the operation of
your vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
Note: With the proper electrical connection,
pressing your vehicle brake pedal or using
the manual control lever illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Note: When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the display
and module shut down. The controller
module and display turn on when you switch
the ignition on.
Adjusting the Trailer Brake Gain
E333154
Increase or decrease the amount
of gain in set increments.
A
Slide the control to engage the
trailer brakes.
B
Note: Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
Note: The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer wheels
may lead to trailer instability.
Note: Setting adjustments are saved when
a trailer profile is selected.
ADJUSTING THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
MODE
Select the correct integrated trailer brake
controller mode option using the
touchscreen.
Note: Trailer brake gain settings are saved
to the active trailer profile.
406
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
Selecting the Trailer Brake Type
1. Press Default for trailers with
electromagnetic drum brake systems
or press Electric over Hydraulic for
trailers with electrically actuated
hydraulic brake systems.
2. Press Save.
Selecting the Trailer Brake Effort
1. Select a setting for your trailer.
Note: The default value is Low and is the
recommended setting for most trailers.
Select a different setting if your trailer's
brakes require more initial voltage, or you
prefer more aggressive trailer braking.
2. Press Save.
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller – Information Messages
ActionMessage
The system detects a correct trailer
connection during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
The system detects the trailer wiring
connection is disconnected, during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The system detects an electrical fault in
the trailer brake circuit. If this message
appears without a trailer attached, see your
authorized dealer. If a trailer is attached,
inspect and repair the trailer wiring.
Trailer Wiring Fault
Displays the current gain setting for the
trailer brake.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0}
Displays the current gain setting for the
trailer brake when you do not have a trailer
connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0}
No Trailer
407
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
– Frequently Asked Questions
How do I determine if there is an issue
with the wiring on my vehicle?
A message displays accompanied by
a single tone, when no trailer is
connected. This indicates that the
issue is between the trailer brake
controller and the 7-pin connector at
the bumper.
How do I determine if there is an issue
with the wiring on my trailer?
A message only displays with a trailer
connected. Consult your trailer dealer
for assistance.
408
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
HOW DOES TRAILER SWAY
CONTROL WORK
Trailer Sway Control
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability.
If the trailer begins to sway, the stability
control lamp flashes and the message
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed appears in
the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Check the vertical weight on the
tow ball and trailer load distribution.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Ford does not recommend disabling this
feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as
hill climbing), the driver has significant
trailer towing experience, and can control
trailer sway and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
SWITCHING TRAILER SWAY
CONTROL ON AND OFF
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Towing.
3. Switch Trailer Sway Control on or off.
The system turns on each time you start
your vehicle.
409
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Sway Control
WHAT IS THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID
The Pro Trailer Backup Assist utilizes the
control knob on the instrument panel to
help you steer a trailer. Turn the control
knob in the direction you want the trailer
to go and the system steers the vehicle.
HOW DOES THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID WORK
The trailer reversing aid uses a sensor
attached to the trailer to detect the trailer
angle relative to the towing vehicle and
provides instructions, graphics and camera
views on the touchscreen.
TRAILER REVERSING AID
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
attention and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you
fail to press the brake pedal when
necessary, you may collide with another
vehicle.
Note: The system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Always be aware of
your vehicle and trailer combination, and
the surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or
prevent your vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: The front end of your vehicle swings
out when changing the direction of the
trailer.
Note: In certain conditions, the trailer could
turn faster or the trailer angle could increase
more than anticipated. Always monitor the
clearance between the trailer and vehicle
and the surroundings.
SETTING UP THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID FOR A
CONVENTIONAL TRAILER
Configuring the Trailer
You must configure a trailer in the system
to use the trailer reversing aids. This is a
one-time setup process and the trailer
information is saved in the system for the
next time you use that trailer.
The system only works with conventional
trailers. It does not work with other types
including goose neck and fifth wheel. The
following illustration shows examples of
conventional trailers on the left-hand side.
410
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
E209766
Positioning the Trailer
Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect
the electrical wiring harness. Check to
make sure that the wiring is working. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
E209759
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. See Connecting a Trailer
(page 371).
E209760
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle
are in line with each other. You can do this
by putting the transmission in drive (D) and
pulling straight forward.
Configuring the Trailer in the
Touchscreen
E310335
1. Press the button to switch the system
on.
2. Press Add Trailer on the touchscreen.
3. Follow the directions on the
touchscreen to enter the trailer name
and trailer type, then proceed to the
sensor setup.
411
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Trailer Sensor Installation
E315959
E335221
Refer to the instructions included with your
trailer sensor for detailed information
regarding installation.
Note: Make sure the arrows on the sensor
housing are facing up. Mount the sensor to
a vertical part of the trailer that pivots when
you turn your vehicle. Do not mount to a
stationary surface such as the truck side of
the trailer hitch.
Calibrating the System
Calibrating the system requires driving
forward and turning left or right. Follow the
instructions on the touchscreen to
complete the calibration process.
Note: To calibrate the system, you need an
area where you can safely drive forward and
turn left or right. An open parking lot is an
ideal place to perform the calibration.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight
when instructed to by the touchscreen. If
the steering wheel is in a turned position
during this instruction, the calibration
pauses.
Note: During calibration, the system
determines the trailer length. The system
supports trailer lengths of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m) distance from the hitch
point to the center of the axle or axles. The
system is designed to work with drawbars
that have a license plate to hitch ball center
measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when
installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars
or trailers that have a length outside of this
range as the system performance degrades
and could cause improper system function.
Note: The touchscreen shows if you are
going too slow or fast. Calibration pauses if
the speed is outside the required range of
2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
Note: You need to turn approximately 90°
to calibrate the system. Some trailers could
require you to drive straight then turn
multiple times before calibration is
complete. The touchscreen provides
instructions and notifies you when
calibration is complete.
412
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
SWITCHING THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID ON AND OFF
E310335
Press the button and use the touchscreen
to select the connected trailer.
Note: A trailer must be configured to use
Pro Trailer Backup Assist. See Configuring
the Trailer (page 410).
Note: If you use the steering wheel when
using Pro Trailer Backup Assist, the system
turns off and a message displays in the
touchscreen.
Note: If the trailer was connected just prior
to turning the system on, you may need to
drive forward to initialize the system. Follow
the instructions on the touchscreen to
activate the system.
USING THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID CONTROLLER
Use the control knob to steer the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the control knob instead. The control
knob acts as the steering control for the
trailer.
E313025
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make
the trailer go left.
E313026
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
413
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
E313027
Release the knob when the trailer is
moving in the direction you want.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the
knob results in a jerky movement of the
vehicle.
Note: You may have to use the knob to
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
conditions.
USING THE TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE VIEWS
Up to seven camera views could be
available when using the trailer reversing
aid. Use the view that helps you the most
when reversing your vehicle and trailer.
E310996
360° camera view. Shows a
360° view on the right-hand side
of the touchscreen with a rear
camera view on the left-hand side of the
touchscreen.
E310967
Rear view camera view. Shows
your trailer hitch or what is
directly behind your vehicle.
E310974
Rear split view camera view.
Shows a 180° degree view of
what is behind your vehicle.
E310995
Bed camera view. Shows the
truck bed.
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm)
touchscreen, this view provides a
picture-in-picture view.
E311776
Trailer AUX camera view. Shows
a rear view camera image of
what is behind your trailer. You
need to separately purchase this camera
and have it installed.
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm)
touchscreen, this view provides a
picture-in-picture view.
E310965
Trailer reverse guidance view.
Shows you a view of the sides of
your truck and the trailer. In auto
mode, this view moves as the trailer moves
so that you do not have to adjust the
camera as you turn. Left and right arrows
let you see other camera views.
E315644
Auto. Press to return to auto
view.
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.
Hitch Angle Graphic
The hitch angle graphic shows a small
representation of your truck and trailer with
visual feedback to help you monitor the
trailer. The graphic shows two different
colored lines for the trailer hitch angle. A
black line shows you where your trailer is
in relation to your vehicle. The white line
represents the amount the trailer can turn
based on knob input.
The graphic shows a yellow and red zone
for the hitch angle to warn you of a high
angle condition that could require you to
pull forward to reduce the hitch angle. The
angle limits for each zone vary based on
the trailer length.
414
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
The yellow zone indicates you are
approaching the maximum controllable
trailer angle for the system. When the
trailer enters this zone, it is more difficult
to reduce the trailer turn when backing up.
It may be necessary to put your vehicle
back into drive (D) and pull forward to get
the truck and trailer back to an in-line
position.
The red zone indicates you have exceeded
the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Immediately stop reversing.
Put your vehicle into drive (D) and pull
forward until the trailer is no longer in the
red zone.
Setting the Trailer Angle Limit
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Towing.
3. Press Manage trailers.
4. Press Pro Trailer Backup Assist.
5. Press Trailer Angle Limit.
6. Press a setting.
Normal Control Angle
Default setting. This provides a balanced
limit that returns from a turn to straight
backing with minimal change to the trailer
direction.
Max Control Angle
Increases the trailer angle limit close to the
maximum controllable angle to allow
sharper turns but also causes more change
in the trailer direction when straightening
out from a turn.
415
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
TRAILER REVERSING AID - TROUBLESHOOTING
Trailer Reversing Aid – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
Displays when the system turns on and is
initializing.
Detecting Trailer Please Wait…
A condition exists that prevents the system
from turning on. If the message continues
to display, visit your authorized dealer to
have your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not
Available
Trailer Reverse Guidance System is Not
Available
The steering system needs to learn internal
parameters to fully enable the feature.
Drive your vehicle straight forward above
25 mph (40 km/h) for approximately 5
minutes.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving Required
to Initialize Steering Press Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving Required
to Initialize Steering Press OK to Exit
Displays when you reach the maximum
controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull
forward to get the truck and trailer back to
an in-line position.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop now
Maximum trailer angle Press Knob to Exit
If this message consistently displays, you
may need to repeat the trailer calibration.
Delete the trailer from the system and
repeat the setup and calibration process.
Displays when you exceed the maximum
controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull
forward to get your vehicle and trailer back
to an in-line position, then activate the
system by selecting the connected trailer
and following the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Stop now. Deactivated by trailer angle.
If this message consistently displays, you
may need to repeat the trailer setup and
calibration. Delete the trailer from the
system and repeat the setup and calibra-
tion process.
Displays when the system can no longer
steer the vehicle and you must take over
steering.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take
Control of Steering Wheel
416
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
DescriptionMessage
Displays when the system does not detect
the sensor. Check the sensor connection,
that there is no damaged wiring between
the connector and sensor and that there is
only one sensor connected.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
OK to Exit
These messages display when the system
does not detect the trailer. Check that the
sensor is correctly installed and the trailer
length is within the allowed range.
If these messages continue to display, visit
your authorized dealer to have your vehicle
checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Shift to Park Press Knob to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
OK to Exit
These messages display when your vehicle
has not moved after the trailer sensor is
connected or extended operation below
1 mph (1 km/h). Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) to initialize the system.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
OK to Exit
Displays when your vehicle is backing up
but the system is not activated. Select the
connected trailer on the touchscreen and
follow the instructions to activate the
system.
This message also displays when you back
up during the calibration process.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now
System Not Active Press Knob to Exit
Displays when the system turns on and is
available to use.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Backup Slowly
Turn Knob to Steer Press Knob to Exit
417
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Trailer Reversing Aid – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does the trailer not reverse
straight?
Verify the sensor is correctly installed.
Other factors such as the hitch
connection, road camber, road slope
and trailer suspension could influence
how straight the system can reverse
the trailer when the control knob is not
turned. You can compensate for the
trailer drifting to the right or left by
slowly turning the knob until the trailer
is following your desired path and then
holding the knob in that position.
Why does the system not detect a
sensor?
There could be an issue with the
connection, the wiring harness could
be damaged, you could have multiple
sensors connected or the sensor could
be incorrectly installed. Check that the
12-way connector is fully inserted into
the 12-way socket. The red rubber seal
is not visible when the connector is
fully inserted. Also check that the
wiring harness sensor connection is
fully inserted at the trailer sensor, and
check for damaged wiring between
the 12-way connector and the trailer
sensor. Also, check that the sensor is
installed on a vertical surface with the
arrows pointing straight up.
What does it mean if the system pauses
during calibration?
There could be steering input or trailer
movement during the straight drive
portion of the calibration process.
What does it mean if the system
remains on one message for an
extended time during calibration?
The sensor could be incorrectly
installed, the trailer length could be
outside the allowed range or the road
surface could be too rough or bumpy.
What does it mean if the system
displays that it is not available?
There could be a sub-system that the
system uses that is not correctly
operating or there could be a battery
voltage issue. If the system continues
to display it is not available, visit your
authorized dealer to have your vehicle
checked.
What does it mean if the system
displays that driving is required to
initialize steering?
The steering system needs to learn
internal parameters to fully turn on the
feature. Drive your vehicle straight
forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes. This could
also occur when your vehicle is new,
there is a battery voltage issue or if the
steering system has been serviced.
What does it mean if the system does
not detect a trailer when configured
with a sensor?
Verify that the sensor is properly
connected. See Trailer Sensor
Installation (page 412). Repeat
calibration on a different route if you
have verified sensor installation.
418
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
What does it mean if the system
requires you to pull forward to
initialize?
This occurs when the vehicle has not
moved during the current key cycle
after you connect and select the trailer
in the touchscreen or you operate the
system at speeds below 1 mph
(1 km/h) for an extended period of
time. Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) and the system indicates
when it initializes.
What does it mean if the trailer is at its
maximum angle or the system
deactivated by trailer angle?
You are at the maximum controllable
trailer angle for the system. Place your
vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to
get the truck and trailer back to an
in-line position. If this message
consistently displays, this could
indicate the sensor is incorrectly
installed, the trailer needs to be
recalibrated or the drawbar or the
trailer dimensions are outside of the
supported range. The system is
designed to work with drawbars that
have a license plate to hitch ball center
measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm)
when installed. The system is designed
to work with trailers that have a hitch
point to center of the axle or axles
measurement of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m). Do not attempt to use
drawbars or trailers that have a length
outside of this range as the system
performance degrades and could
cause improper system function.
Check that the correct trailer is
selected in the touchscreen. Verify the
sensor is installed according to the
instructions included in the sensor kit
and check that the drawbar and the
trailer dimensions are within the
allowed range. Then, delete the trailer
from the system and repeat the setup
process to calibrate the trailer.
What does it mean when the system
tells you to take control of the steering
wheel?
The system is no longer steering the
vehicle and you must take over
steering. There are four reasons the
system could display this message.
The first reason the system could
display this message is that you have
touched the steering wheel when the
system is steering. The second reason
the system could display this message
is that you have exceeded the
maximum speed for the feature. The
third reason the system could display
this message is that the trailer is not
detected. The final reason the system
could display this message is that an
internal condition for system operation
is not met that requires your vehicle to
return to manual control of the
steering.
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
you choose the trailer from the touchscreen.
When using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole on drawbars with more
than one, connecting the drawbar to your
vehicle affects the trailer position and you
may need to repeat the trailer setup and
calibration process.
419
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
WHAT IS THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID
ProTrailer Back-Up Assist with Trailer
Reverse Guidance
Trailer Reverse Guidance provides views
and graphics on the touchscreen to help
you steer your vehicle when you backup a
trailer.
HOW DOES THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID WORK
The trailer reversing aid uses a sensor
attached to the trailer to detect the trailer
angle relative to the towing vehicle and
provides instructions, graphics and camera
views on the touchscreen.
TRAILER REVERSING AID
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
attention and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you
fail to press the brake pedal when
necessary, you may collide with another
vehicle.
Note: The system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Always be aware of
your vehicle and trailer combination, and
the surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or
prevent your vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: The front end of your vehicle swings
out when changing the direction of the
trailer.
Note: In certain conditions, the trailer could
turn faster or the trailer angle could increase
more than anticipated. Always monitor the
clearance between the trailer and vehicle
and the surroundings.
SETTING UP THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID FOR A
CONVENTIONAL TRAILER
Configuring the Trailer
You must configure a trailer in the system
to use the trailer reversing aids. This is a
one-time setup process and the trailer
information is saved in the system for the
next time you use that trailer.
The system only works with conventional
trailers. It does not work with other types
including goose neck and fifth wheel. The
following illustration shows examples of
conventional trailers on the left-hand side.
420
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
Note: Trailer Reverse Guidance camera
views are available with no trailer setup.
However, complete functionality including
graphics and automatic view switching is
enabled by setup. Setup is required to
enable the Trailer Backup Assist feature.
E209766
Positioning the Trailer
Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect
the electrical wiring harness. Check to
make sure that the wiring is working. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
E209759
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. See Connecting a Trailer
(page 371).
E209760
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle
are in line with each other. You can do this
by putting the transmission in drive (D) and
pulling straight forward.
Configuring the Trailer in the
Touchscreen
1. Shift to reverse (R).
2. Press the camera view button.
3. Press the trailer view icon.
4. Press Add Trailer.
5. Follow the directions on the
touchscreen to enter the trailer name
and trailer type, then proceed to the
sensor setup.
Trailer Sensor Installation
E315959
421
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
E335221
Refer to the instructions included with your
trailer sensor for detailed information
regarding installation.
Note: Make sure the arrows on the sensor
housing are facing up. Mount the sensor to
a vertical part of the trailer that pivots when
you turn your vehicle. Do not mount to a
stationary surface such as the truck side of
the trailer hitch.
Calibrating the System
Calibrating the system requires driving
forward and turning left or right. Follow the
instructions on the touchscreen to
complete the calibration process.
Note: To calibrate the system, you need an
area where you can safely drive forward and
turn left or right. An open parking lot is an
ideal place to perform the calibration.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight
when instructed to by the touchscreen. If
the steering wheel is in a turned position
during this instruction, the calibration
pauses.
Note: During calibration, the system
determines the trailer length. The system
supports trailer lengths of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m) distance from the hitch
point to the center of the axle or axles. The
system is designed to work with drawbars
that have a license plate to hitch ball center
measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when
installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars
or trailers that have a length outside of this
range as the system performance degrades
and could cause improper system function.
Note: The touchscreen shows if you are
going too slow or fast. Calibration pauses if
the speed is outside the required range of
2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
Note: You need to turn approximately 90°
to calibrate the system. Some trailers could
require you to drive straight then turn
multiple times before calibration is
complete. The touchscreen provides
instructions and notifies you when
calibration is complete.
SWITCHING THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID ON AND OFF
Shift into reverse (R), press the rear
camera button to expand the menu, press
the trailer icon and use the touchscreen to
select the connected trailer.
Note: If the trailer was connected just prior
to turning the system on, you may need to
drive forward to initialize the system. Follow
the instructions on the touchscreen to
activate the system.
USING THE TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE VIEWS
Up to seven camera views could be
available when using the trailer reversing
aid. Use the view that helps you the most
when reversing your vehicle and trailer.
422
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
E310996
360° camera view. Shows a
360° view on the right-hand side
of the touchscreen with a rear
camera view on the left-hand side of the
touchscreen.
E310967
Rear view camera view. Shows
your trailer hitch or what is
directly behind your vehicle.
E310974
Rear split view camera view.
Shows a 180° degree view of
what is behind your vehicle.
E310995
Bed camera view. Shows the
truck bed.
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm)
touchscreen, this view provides a
picture-in-picture view.
E311776
Trailer AUX camera view. Shows
a rear view camera image of
what is behind your trailer. You
need to separately purchase this camera
and have it installed.
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm)
touchscreen, this view provides a
picture-in-picture view.
E310965
Trailer reverse guidance view.
Shows you a view of the sides of
your truck and the trailer. In auto
mode, this view moves as the trailer moves
so that you do not have to adjust the
camera as you turn. Left and right arrows
let you see other camera views.
E224484
Straight backup mode. Shows
which way to turn your steering
wheel to keep the trailer straight.
Use this view when you want to keep your
trailer completely in line with your truck.
Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle
into drive (D), pull forward and straighten
out the vehicle and trailer before engaging
straight backup mode.
E224486
This takes you back to the 360°
camera system and out of the
trailer reverse guidance feature.
E315644
Auto. Press to return to auto
view.
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.
Hitch Angle Graphic
The hitch angle graphic shows a small
representation of your truck and trailer with
visual feedback to help you monitor the
trailer. The graphic shows two different
colored lines for the trailer hitch angle. A
black line shows you where your trailer is
in relation to your vehicle. The white line
represents the amount the trailer can turn
based on steering wheel position.
The graphic shows a yellow and red zone
for the hitch angle to warn you of a high
angle condition that could require you to
pull forward to reduce the hitch angle. The
angle limits for each zone vary based on
the trailer length.
The yellow zone indicates you are
approaching the maximum controllable
trailer angle for the system. When the
trailer enters this zone, it is more difficult
to reduce the trailer turn when backing up.
It may be necessary to put your vehicle
back into drive (D) and pull forward to get
the truck and trailer back to an in-line
position.
The red zone indicates you have exceeded
the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Immediately stop reversing.
Put your vehicle into drive (D) and pull
forward until the trailer is no longer in the
red zone.
423
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
TRAILER REVERSING AID - TROUBLESHOOTING
Trailer Reversing Aid – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
Displays when the system turns on and is
initializing.
Detecting Trailer Please Wait…
A condition exists that prevents the system
from turning on. If the message continues
to display, visit your authorized dealer to
have your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not
Available
Trailer Reverse Guidance System is Not
Available
The steering system needs to learn internal
parameters to fully enable the feature.
Drive your vehicle straight forward above
25 mph (40 km/h) for approximately 5
minutes.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving Required
to Initialize Steering Press Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving Required
to Initialize Steering Press OK to Exit
Displays when you reach the maximum
controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull
forward to get the truck and trailer back to
an in-line position.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop now
Maximum trailer angle Press Knob to Exit
If this message consistently displays, you
may need to repeat the trailer calibration.
Delete the trailer from the system and
repeat the setup and calibration process.
Displays when you exceed the maximum
controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull
forward to get your vehicle and trailer back
to an in-line position, then activate the
system by selecting the connected trailer
and following the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Stop now. Deactivated by trailer angle.
If this message consistently displays, you
may need to repeat the trailer setup and
calibration. Delete the trailer from the
system and repeat the setup and calibra-
tion process.
Displays when the system can no longer
steer the vehicle and you must take over
steering.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take
Control of Steering Wheel
424
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
DescriptionMessage
Displays when the system does not detect
the sensor. Check the sensor connection,
that there is no damaged wiring between
the connector and sensor and that there is
only one sensor connected.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
OK to Exit
These messages display when the system
does not detect the trailer. Check that the
sensor is correctly installed and the trailer
length is within the allowed range.
If these messages continue to display, visit
your authorized dealer to have your vehicle
checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Shift to Park Press Knob to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
OK to Exit
These messages display when your vehicle
has not moved after the trailer sensor is
connected or extended operation below
1 mph (1 km/h). Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) to initialize the system.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
OK to Exit
Displays when your vehicle is backing up
but the system is not activated. Select the
connected trailer on the touchscreen and
follow the instructions to activate the
system.
This message also displays when you back
up during the calibration process.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now
System Not Active Press Knob to Exit
Displays when the system turns on and is
available to use.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Backup Slowly
Turn Knob to Steer Press Knob to Exit
425
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
Trailer Reversing Aid – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does the trailer not reverse
straight?
Verify the sensor is correctly installed.
Other factors such as the hitch
connection, road camber, road slope
and trailer suspension could influence
how straight the system can reverse
the trailer when the control knob is not
turned. You can compensate for the
trailer drifting to the right or left by
slowly turning the knob until the trailer
is following your desired path and then
holding the knob in that position.
Why does the system not detect a
sensor?
There could be an issue with the
connection, the wiring harness could
be damaged, you could have multiple
sensors connected or the sensor could
be incorrectly installed. Check that the
12-way connector is fully inserted into
the 12-way socket. The red rubber seal
is not visible when the connector is
fully inserted. Also check that the
wiring harness sensor connection is
fully inserted at the trailer sensor, and
check for damaged wiring between
the 12-way connector and the trailer
sensor. Also, check that the sensor is
installed on a vertical surface with the
arrows pointing straight up.
What does it mean if the system pauses
during calibration?
There could be steering input or trailer
movement during the straight drive
portion of the calibration process.
What does it mean if the system
remains on one message for an
extended time during calibration?
The sensor could be incorrectly
installed, the trailer length could be
outside the allowed range or the road
surface could be too rough or bumpy.
What does it mean if the system
displays that it is not available?
There could be a sub-system that the
system uses that is not correctly
operating or there could be a battery
voltage issue. If the system continues
to display it is not available, visit your
authorized dealer to have your vehicle
checked.
What does it mean if the system
displays that driving is required to
initialize steering?
The steering system needs to learn
internal parameters to fully turn on the
feature. Drive your vehicle straight
forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes. This could
also occur when your vehicle is new,
there is a battery voltage issue or if the
steering system has been serviced.
What does it mean if the system does
not detect a trailer when configured
with a sensor?
Verify that the sensor is properly
connected. See Trailer Sensor
Installation (page 412). Repeat
calibration on a different route if you
have verified sensor installation.
426
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
What does it mean if the system
requires you to pull forward to
initialize?
This occurs when the vehicle has not
moved during the current key cycle
after you connect and select the trailer
in the touchscreen or you operate the
system at speeds below 1 mph
(1 km/h) for an extended period of
time. Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) and the system indicates
when it initializes.
What does it mean if the trailer is at its
maximum angle or the system
deactivated by trailer angle?
You are at the maximum controllable
trailer angle for the system. Place your
vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to
get the truck and trailer back to an
in-line position. If this message
consistently displays, this could
indicate the sensor is incorrectly
installed, the trailer needs to be
recalibrated or the drawbar or the
trailer dimensions are outside of the
supported range. The system is
designed to work with drawbars that
have a license plate to hitch ball center
measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm)
when installed. The system is designed
to work with trailers that have a hitch
point to center of the axle or axles
measurement of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m). Do not attempt to use
drawbars or trailers that have a length
outside of this range as the system
performance degrades and could
cause improper system function.
Check that the correct trailer is
selected in the touchscreen. Verify the
sensor is installed according to the
instructions included in the sensor kit
and check that the drawbar and the
trailer dimensions are within the
allowed range. Then, delete the trailer
from the system and repeat the setup
process to calibrate the trailer.
What does it mean when the system
tells you to take control of the steering
wheel?
The system is no longer steering the
vehicle and you must take over
steering. There are four reasons the
system could display this message.
The first reason the system could
display this message is that you have
touched the steering wheel when the
system is steering. The second reason
the system could display this message
is that you have exceeded the
maximum speed for the feature. The
third reason the system could display
this message is that the trailer is not
detected. The final reason the system
could display this message is that an
internal condition for system operation
is not met that requires your vehicle to
return to manual control of the
steering.
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
you choose the trailer from the touchscreen.
When using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole on drawbars with more
than one, connecting the drawbar to your
vehicle affects the trailer position and you
may need to repeat the trailer setup and
calibration process.
427
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
OFF-ROAD DRIVING
What Is Off-Road Driving
Off-road driving is driving your vehicle on
unsurfaced roads or trails, made from dirt,
rocks, sand and mud.
Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques
Off-road Driving Hints
Before taking your vehicle off-roading, a
basic vehicle inspection should be done to
make sure that the vehicle is in top working
condition. It is always recommended that
at least two vehicles are used while
off-roading. The buddy system helps make
sure that help is close at hand should a
vehicle become stuck or damaged. It is also
wise to take supplies such as a first aid kit,
supply of water, tow strap, cell or satellite
phone with you any time an off-road
excursion is planned.
1. Grip the steering wheel with thumbs
on the outside of the rim. This will
reduce the risk of injury due to abrupt
steering wheel motions that occur
when negotiating rough terrain.
2. Throttle, brake and steering inputs
should be made in a smooth and
controlled manner. Sudden inputs to
the controls can cause loss of traction
or upset the vehicle, especially while
on loose terrain or while crossing
obstacles such as rocks or logs.
3. Look ahead on your route noting
upcoming obstacles, or any other
factors which may indicate a change
in available traction, and adjust the
vehicle speed and route accordingly.
4. When driving off-road, if the front or
rear suspension is bottoming out
and/or excessive contact with the
skid-plates is encountered, reduce
vehicle speed to avoid potential
damage to the vehicle.
5. When with other vehicles, it is
recommended that communication is
used, and the lead vehicle notify other
vehicles of obstacles that could cause
potential vehicle damage.
6. Always keep available ground
clearance in mind and pick a route that
minimizes the risk of catching the
underside of the vehicle on an obstacle.
7. When negotiating low speed obstacles,
applying light brake pressure in
conjunction with the throttle will help
prevent the vehicle from jerking and
will allow you to negotiate the obstacle
in a more controlled manner. Using 4L
will also help with this.
8. Off-roading requires a high degree of
concentration. Even if your local law
does not prohibit alcohol use while
driving off-road, Ford strongly
recommends against drinking if you
plan to off-road.
Crossing Obstacles
• Review the path ahead before
attempting to cross any obstacle. It is
best if the obstacle is reviewed from
outside the vehicle so that there is a
good understanding of terrain condition
both in front of and behind the
obstacle.
• Approach obstacles slowly.
428
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
• If a large obstacle such as a rock
cannot be avoided, choose a path that
places the rock directly under the tire
rather than the undercarriage of the
vehicle. This will help prevent damage
to the vehicle.
• Ditches and washouts should be
crossed at a 45° angle, allowing each
wheel to independently cross the
obstacle.
Hill Climbing
WARNING: Extreme care should
be used when steering the vehicle in
reverse down a slope so as not to cause
the vehicle to swerve out of control.
• Always attempt to climb a steep hill
along the fall line of the slope and not
diagonally.
• If the vehicle is unable to make it up
the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back
down the slope. Place the vehicle in
low range and slowly back down in
reverse.
• When descending a steep slope, select
low gear and engage hill descent
control. Use the throttle and brake
pedals to control your descent speed.
Note: Hill descent control is functional in
reverse and should be used in this situation.
Water Wading
WARNING: Do not attempt to
cross a deep, fast flowing body of water.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
As the water depth increases, you must
reduce your vehicle speed to avoid
potential vehicle damage.
E310941
• Always determine the depth before
attempting a water crossing. Never
drive through water that is higher than
the bottom of the wheel hubs.
• Slowly proceed and avoid splashing
water any more than is necessary.
• Be aware that obstacles and debris
may be beneath the water’s surface.
• Keep the doors fully closed during the
water crossing.
• After driving through water and as soon
as it is safe to do so check the brakes,
horn, lights, and steering wheel to
confirm those systems are functioning
properly.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-
Road
WARNING: After off-road use,
before returning to the road, check the
wheels and tires for damage. Off-road
use may cause damage to your wheels
and tires that can lead to tire failure, loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
429
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Driving off-road places more stress on your
vehicle than most on-road driving. After
driving off-road check for damage to your
vehicle and, if necessary, have your vehicle
fixed as soon as possible.
Inspect the underbody of your vehicle by
checking tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for
damage.
Check the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as needed.
Remove accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard or hide
damage to the fuel lines, brake hoses, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, inspect
the underbody and clean your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause vibrations
while driving and wheel imbalance.
Remove the material to resolve the
problem.
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below approximately
-13°F (-25°C).
BREAKING-IN
Tires
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Brakes and Clutch
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch
if possible for the first 100 mi (150 km) in
town and for the first 1,000 mi (1,500 km)
on freeways.
DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
The following helps to improve fuel
consumption:
• There is no need to wait for your engine
to warm up. The vehicle is ready to
drive immediately after starting.
• Your fuel consumption should improve
throughout your hybrid's break-in
period.
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Moderate braking is particularly
important since it allows you to
maximize the energy captured by the
regenerative braking system.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Driving on flat terrain.
• Drive at reasonable speeds and
observe posted speed limits.
• Shut all windows when driving at high
speeds.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Drive with the tonneau cover installed
if your vehicle comes with one.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule and carry out the
recommended checks.
• Perform all scheduled maintenance.
430
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Note: Having your engine running is not
always an indication of inefficiency. In some
cases, it is actually more efficient than
driving in electric mode.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
consumption:
• Revving the engine.
• Aggressive driving increases the
amount of energy required to move
your vehicle.
• Driving in lower temperatures during
the first 5–10 mi (12–16 km) of driving.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle like bug deflectors, rollbars,
light bars, running boards, ski racks or
luggage racks.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat
designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
431
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
SNOW PLOWING
PRECAUTIONS
Your vehicle is not approved for snow
plowing. Never snow plow with your
vehicle.
432
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles Without: Snow Plow Mode
SNOW PLOWING
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Look for an alterer’s label on your
vehicle from the snowplow installer
certifying that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Note: Federal and some local regulations
require additional exterior lamps for
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Contact an
authorized dealer for additional information.
Note: Do not remove or defeat the tripping
mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so could cause damage to your
vehicle and the snow removal equipment
as well as possible airbag deployment.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
WITH A SNOWPLOW
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book. For
additional information, visit
www.fordbbas.com.
A typical snowplow installation affects the
following:
• Front gross axle weight rating. See
What Is the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (page 361).
• Gross vehicle weight rating. See What
Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(page 361).
• Braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe. See the Ford
Workshop Manual.
• Headlight aim. See Adjusting the
Headlamps (page 473).
• Tire air pressure. See Information on
the Tire Sidewall (page 495).
Note: Do not exceed the front gross axle
weight rating or gross vehicle weight rating.
Note: Your vehicle may require rear ballast
weight for proper braking and steering.
Your vehicle has a driver and passenger
airbag supplemental restraint system. The
supplemental restraint system activates
in certain frontal and offset frontal
collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
433
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With: Snow Plow Mode
When operating your vehicle with a
snowplow:
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Your engine could run at a higher
temperature than normal.
• If you are driving more than 15 mi
(24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade
either full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
• If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you do
not need to worry about blade
position to provide maximum
airflow.
• Shift to 4L when plowing in small areas
at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift to 4H when plowing larger areas
or light snow at higher speeds above
5 mph (8 km/h). Do not exceed
15 mph (24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to reverse (R) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.
Note: Careless or high-speed driving when
snowplowing, which results in significant
vehicle decelerations, can deploy the airbag.
Such driving also increases the risk of
accidents.
Note: Drive your vehicle at least 500 mi
(800 km) before using your vehicle for
snowplowing.
Note: Follow the severe duty schedule for
engine oil and transmission fluid change
intervals. See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance (page
614).
SNOWPLOW MODE
What Is Snowplow Mode
Snowplow mode reduces vehicle electrical
load to allow the electrical system to have
sufficient power to support residential
snowplow use.
Switching Snowplow Mode On and
Off
Vehicles receive a physical button in the
instrument panel or an option in the SYNC
menu to enable snowplow mode.
Snowplow mode does not remember the
setting when you switch your vehicle off.
You must re-enable the mode every time
you wish to use it.
The following features turn off and are
disabled in snowplow mode and cannot
be turned back on until snowplow mode
is switched off:
• 120 V inverter.
• Fog lamps.
• Heated and cooled front seats.
The body module also activates the
snowplow relay that provides power to
aftermarket snowplow controls.
Note: The electrical system supports the
addition of a residential snowplow of up to
60 A continuous, and snowplow lights of
up to 20 A continuous using snowplow
mode. The system does not support
snowplow usage with additional electrical
aftermarket accessories.
Push Button (If Equipped)
Press the snowplow button on the
instrument panel to switch on snowplow
mode. The snowplow button illuminates
and a message displays.
434
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With: Snow Plow Mode
Press the snowplow button or switch off
the vehicle to switch off snowplow mode.
Using SYNC (If Equipped)
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Snow Plow Mode.
3. Switch Snow Plow Mode on or off.
435
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With: Snow Plow Mode
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period supplied with
your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
436
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
VEHICLE PRECAUTIONS -
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
In the event of damage or fire involving an
electric vehicle or hybrid-electric vehicle:
• Assume the high-voltage battery and
associated components are energized
and fully charged.
• Physical damage to the vehicle or
high-voltage battery could result in
immediate or delayed release of toxic,
flammable gases and fire.
Crashes
A crash or impact significant enough to
require an emergency response for
conventional vehicles would also require
the same response for an electric or
hybrid-electric vehicle.
If possible:
1. Move your vehicle to a safe, nearby
location and remain on the scene.
2. Roll down the windows before you
switch your vehicle off.
3. Place your vehicle in park (P), apply
the parking brake, switch off the
vehicle, turn on the hazard flashers and
move the key at least 16 ft (5 m) away
from the vehicle.
Always:
• Call emergency assistance if needed
and advise that an electric or
hybrid-electric vehicle is involved.
• Avoid contact with leaking fluids and
gases, and remain out of the way of
oncoming traffic until emergency
responders arrive.
• When emergency responders arrive,
tell them that the vehicle involved is an
electric vehicle or hybrid-electric
vehicle.
Fires
As with any vehicle, call emergency
assistance immediately if you see sparks,
smoke or flames coming from the vehicle.
Remain a safe distance from the vehicle
and try to stay clear of the smoke.
1. Exit the vehicle immediately.
2. Advise emergency assistance that an
electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is
involved.
3. As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale
smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle,
as they may be hazardous.
437
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
Post-Incident
1. Do not store a severely damaged
vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside
a structure or within 49 ft (15 m) of any
structure or vehicle.
2. Make sure that passenger and luggage
compartments remain ventilated.
3. As with any vehicle, call emergency
assistance immediately if you see
sparks, smoke or flames coming from
the vehicle.
SWITCHING THE HAZARD
FLASHERS ON AND OFF
The hazard flasher button is on
the instrument panel. Press the
button to switch the hazard
flashers on if your vehicle is creating a
safety hazard for other road users.
When you switch the hazard flashers on,
all front and rear direction indicators flash.
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. The battery loses charge
and could have insufficient power to restart
your vehicle.
Press the button again to switch them off.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
Jump Starting Precautions
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
WARNING: Make sure that the
cables are clear of any moving parts and
fuel delivery system parts.
WARNING: Connect batteries with
only the same nominal voltage.
Do not attempt to push-start an automatic
transmission vehicle. This could cause
transmission damage.
Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle. This could damage your
vehicle's electrical system.
Preparing the Vehicle
Use only a 12 volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
438
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
Jump Starting the Vehicle
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: If you are using a jump pack or
booster box, follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
E281345
1. Pull the red rubber boot backward.
Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) jumper cable to an
exposed metal part of the disabled
vehicle's engine, as shown in the
following illustration, away from the
battery and fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) jumper cable
to a ground connection point if
available.
E309115
Starting the Engine
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and moderately rev the engine, or
gently press the accelerator to keep
the engine speed between 2000 and
3000 RPM, as shown in your
tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
Note: Do not switch the headlamps on
when disconnecting the cables. The peak
voltage could blow the bulbs.
439
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
What Is the Post-Crash Alert
System
The system helps draw attention to your
vehicle in the event of a serious impact.
How Does the Post-Crash Alert
System Work
The system is designed to turn the hazard
flashers on and to intermittently sound the
horn in the event of a serious impact that
deploys an airbag or the seatbelt
pretensioners.
Post-Crash Alert System
Limitations
Depending on applicable laws in the
country your vehicle was built for, the horn
does not sound in the event of a serious
impact.
Switching the Post-Crash Alert
System Off
Press the hazard flasher switch or the
unlock button on the remote control to
switch the system off.
Note: The alert turns off when the vehicle
battery runs out of charge.
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF
What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff
The automatic crash shutoff is designed
to stop the fuel going to the engine in the
event of a moderate or severe crash.
Note: Not every impact causes a shutoff.
Automatic Crash Shutoff
Precautions
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or
death.
Re-Enabling Your Vehicle
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Attempt to start your vehicle.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Attempt to start your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle does not start after the
third attempt, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
RECOVERY TOWING
Accessing the Front Towing Point
WARNING: Using recovery hooks
is dangerous and should only be done by
a person familiar with proper vehicle
recovery safety practices. Improper use
of recovery hooks may cause hook failure
or separation from the vehicle and could
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Slowly remove the
slack from the recovery strap prior to
pulling. Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can
cause the recovery hooks to break off, or
the recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.
440
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
WARNING: Never link two straps
together with a clevis pin. These heavy
metal objects could become projectiles
if the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle has frame-mounted front
recovery hooks.
Note: Do not apply a load to the recovery
hooks that is greater than the gross vehicle
weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Do not use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet, and
place it over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle
in a straight line, within 10 degrees.
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or your
roadside assistance service provider.
Your manufacturer produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Vehicle damage could occur if
towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Front-wheel and rear-wheel drive vehicles
must have their designated drive wheels
off the ground regardless of towing
direction. Use tow dollies to prevent
damage to the transmission.
441
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
All-wheel or four-wheel drive vehicles
require that all wheels be off the ground
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission and drive system.
442
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
PRECAUTIONS
Use the following guidelines when towing
your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in vehicle damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s
configuration, contact an authorized dealer.
RECREATIONALLY TOWING
YOUR VEHICLE - 4X4
WARNING: Do not disconnect the
battery during recreational towing. It
prevents the transfer case from shifting
properly and may cause the vehicle to
roll, even if the transmission is in park
(P).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer
case to its neutral position for
recreational towing may cause the
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is
in park (P). It may injure the driver and
others. Make sure you press the foot
brake and the vehicle is in a secure, safe
position when you shift to neutral (N).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure that you do
not damage the transmission.
You can only tow your vehicle with all
wheels on the ground by placing the
transfer case in its neutral position and
engaging the recreational tow feature.
Perform the following steps after
positioning your vehicle behind the tow
vehicle and properly securing them
together.
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle.
Note: Failure to put the transfer case in its
neutral position can damage vehicle
components.
Note: You can check the towing status at
any time by opening the driver door or
turning the ignition to the accessory or on
position. A message appears in the
instrument cluster display confirming
Neutral Tow is on.
Note: If your vehicle has an anti-theft
alarm, make sure you switch perimeter
sensing on when towing. See Setting the
Alarm Security Level (page 112).
Switching Neutral Tow On
1. Start your vehicle.
2. Press the 2H button on the four-wheel
drive mode control.
3. Place your vehicle in temporary neutral
mode. See Entering Temporary
Neutral Mode (page 255).
4. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
push button ignition switch once or
turning the key as far toward the off
position as possible. A message
appears in the instrument cluster
display.
5. Switch your vehicle to accessory mode
by pressing the push button ignition
switch once without pressing the brake
pedal or by turning the key to the on
position.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
443
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing Your Vehicle
7. Using the instrument cluster controls
on the steering wheel, select Settings.
8. Select Neutral Tow.
9. Press and hold the OK button until a
confirmation message appears in the
information display.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
tow with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see a confirmation
message in the instrument cluster display,
you must perform the procedure again from
the beginning.
Note: You may hear noise as the transfer
case shifts into its neutral position. This is
normal.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
and switch your vehicle off by
pressing the push button ignition
switch once without pressing the
brake pedal or turning the key as far
toward the off position.
Note: Vehicles with keys do not turn to the
off position when the transmission is in
neutral (N). You must leave the key in the
ignition when towing. Use the keyless entry
keypad or an extra set of keys to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
Switching Neutral Tow Off
1. With your vehicle properly secured to
the tow vehicle, press the brake pedal
and start the engine.
2. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
push button ignition switch once or
turning the key as far towards the off
position.
3. Place your vehicle in accessory mode
by pressing the push button ignition
switch once without pressing the brake
pedal or by turning the ignition key to
the on position.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift into park (P).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled.
Note: You must perform the switching
neutral tow on and switching neutral tow
off procedures again from the beginning if
the indicator light and message do not
display.
Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer
case shifts out of its neutral position. This
is normal.
7. Apply the parking brake, then
disconnect your vehicle from the tow
vehicle.
8. Release the parking brake, start the
engine, and shift into drive (D) to make
sure the transfer case is out of the
neutral tow position.
9. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of its neutral
position, set the parking brake. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Resolving the Shift Delayed Drive
Forward Message
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start your vehicle.
3. Shift into neutral (N).
4. With the vehicle running, shift into drive
(D) and let the vehicle roll forward up
to 3 ft (1 m).
444
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing Your Vehicle
Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer
case shifts out of its neutral position. This
is normal.
5. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays Neutral Tow Disabled.
RECREATIONALLY TOWING
YOUR VEHICLE - 4X2
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
occur. You must recreational tow your
vehicle with all four wheels off the ground,
such as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
your vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOWING
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without
access to wheel dollies or a vehicle
transport trailer, it can be flat-towed with
all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission configuration,
under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Use the manual park release
procedure. See Using Manual Park
Release (page 257). Failure to do so
may result in damage to the
transmission.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Towing Your Vehicle – Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
The transfer case is in the neutral position and your vehicle
is safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral
There is a transfer case gear tooth blockage present. With
your vehicle on, shift the transmission into drive (D) and let
the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
Shift Delayed Drive
Forward
The transfer case is not in the neutral position and your vehicle
is not safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
445
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing Your Vehicle
FUSE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire.
UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box
E311329
Accessing the Under Hood Fuse
Box
E322941
446
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood Fuse Box
E312324
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Loca-
tion
Body control module - battery power in feed 1.40 A1
Body control module - battery power in feed 2.40 A3
Fuel pump.30 A4
Keep-alive power.5 A5
Powertrain control module (hybrid).
Powertrain control module power.25 A6
Powertrain control module power.20 A7
Powertrain control module power (hybrid).20 A8
Powertrain control module power (gas, diesel).10 A
447
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Loca-
tion
Powertrain control module power.20 A9
Powertrain control module power (diesel).20 A10
Starter motor.30 A11
Blower motor.40 A13
Horn.25 A15
Snow plow switch.20 A19
Rear heated seats (gas).
Headlamp run/start feed.10 A21
Electronic power assist steering.10 A22
Electric brake boost.10 A23
Powertrain control module (gas, hybrid).10 A24
Transmission control module (diesel).
Glow plug control module (diesel).
Center high-mounted stop lamp camera.10 A25
Trailer camera.
2 kW inverter.
24 V alternator - run/start feed.
Analog rear video camera.
Electric brake boost.50 A28
Electric brake boost.50 A29
Driver power seat.40 A30
Passenger power seat.30 A31
Auxiliary power point.20 A32
Auxiliary power point.20 A33
USB smart charger.
Auxiliary power point.20 A34
Tailgate module.30 A37
Climate controlled seat module.40 A38
Power running boards.
448
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Loca-
tion
Power sliding back window.25 A41
Trailer brake control module.30 A42
Cooling fan.50 A47
Rear heated seats (diesel, hybrid)20 A48
Cooling fan.50 A49
Heated backlight (gas, hybrid).40 A50
Trailer tow park lamps.30 A55
Trailer tow stop and turn lamps.20 A56
Trailer tow backup lamps.10 A58
Four-wheel drive.25 A64
Transmission control module (diesel).15 A65
Transmission run/start.20 A67
Left-hand windshield wiper.30 A69
Not used (spare).15 A80
Four-wheel drive.25 A82
Supplemental heater (diesel).50 A83
Supplemental heater (diesel).50 A84
Supplemental heater (diesel).50 A85
Selective catalytic reduction system.25 A86
Trailer tow light module.20 A91
Powertrain control module power (hybrid).15 A95
Powertrain control module power (hybrid).10 A98
Coolant pumps (hybrid).
Left-hand headlamps.15 A100
Right-hand headlamps.15 A101
Active front steering.50 A105
449
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Loca-
tion
Trailer tow battery charge.30 A107
Fuel filter heater (diesel).30 A121
Rain sensor module.5 A124
USB smart charger.10 A125
Multi-contour seats relay.25 A134
Tailgate release.10 A138
USB smart charger.5 A139
Traction battery control module.15 A146
DC/DC power (hybrid).5 A159
Smart data link control.10 A160
Not used (spare).7.5 A162
Traction battery control module (hybrid).20 A168
Motor electric cool pump (hybrid).10 A169
Pedestrian alert control module (hybrid).10 A170
Traction battery control module (hybrid).
Electric motor cool pump (hybrid).
Body control module B+.60 A202
Body control module start stop.30 A210
Protected ComponentRelay
Number
Electronic fan relay 1.R04
Electronic fan relay 3.R06
Supplemental heater.R35
Supplemental heater.R36
450
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
BODY CONTROL MODULE
FUSE BOX
Locating the Body Control Module
Fuse Box
E322874
Accessing the Body Control
Module Fuse Box
E322804
Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control Module Fuse Box
E145984
451
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Loca-
tion
Not used.—1
Delayed accessory feed.10 A2
Wireless charger.7.5 A3
Not used.20 A4
Not used.—5
Driver power window switch.10 A6
Gear shift module.10 A7
Cell phone passport module.5 A8
Combined sensor module.5 A9
Not used.—10
Not used.—11
Enhanced central gateway.7.5 A12
Climate control.
Instrument cluster.7.5 A13
Steering column control module.
Not used (spare).15 A14
Integrated control panel.15 A15
SYNC.
Not used.—16
Headlamp control module.7.5 A17
Not used.7.5 A18
Headlamp switch.5 A19
Passive start.5 A20
Ignition switch.
Key inhibit solenoid.
Trailer brake switch.5 A21
Not used.5 A22
452
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Loca-
tion
Driver door control module.30 A23
Moonroof.30 A24
Not used.20 A25
Passenger door control module.30 A26
Not used.30 A27
Amplifier.30 A28
12 inch display.15 A29
Adjustable pedals.
Not used.5 A30
RF receiver.10 A31
Driver monitor.
Terrain management switch.
Audio control module.20 A32
Not used.—33
Run/start relay.30 A34
400 watt inverter run/start.5 A35
Auto-dimming interior mirror.15 A36
Rear heat seat run/start.
Adaptive front steering run/start.
Heated wheel (vehicles without adaptive front steering).
Advanced driver-assistance systems.20 A37
Rear power windows.30 A circuit
breaker.
38
453
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
IDENTIFYING FUSE TYPES
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
FUSES – TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuses – Frequently Asked
Questions
When do I need to check a fuse?
If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working.
When do I need to replace a fuse?
If a fuse has blown.
How do I identify a blown fuse?
You can identify a blown fuse by a
broken wire within the fuse.
454
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Service your vehicle regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 529).
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material, such as cigarettes, away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Set the parking brake, shift the
transmission to park (P) and block the
wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
latch the hood before driving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
E337831
1. Pull the hood release handle under the
left hand side of the instrument panel.
E338104
2. Pull the secondary release lever under
the front of the hood near the center
of your vehicle.
455
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E338089
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it fully latches.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
E337516
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).C.
456
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).E.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 468).F.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).G.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.H.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.0L DIESEL
E337515
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).E.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 468).F.
457
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).G.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.H.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.3L
E337514
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).E.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 468).F.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).G.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.H.
458
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
E313722
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brakes (page 273).E.
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 469).F.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).G.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.H.
459
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
E333718
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).C.
Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 462).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).E.
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 469).F.
Secondary coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).G.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.I.
460
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L
E313297
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).D.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 469).E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).F.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.G.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).H.
461
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview -
Diesel
E249448
Minimum.A
Nominal.B
Maximum.C
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview -
Gasoline
E270482
Minimum.A
Nominal.B
Maximum.C
Checking the Engine Oil Level
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off after
warming up and wait 10 minutes for
the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth.
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it
is fully seated.
5. Remove the dipstick again to check the
oil level.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark,
immediately add oil.
7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is
fully seated.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
WARNING: Do not add engine oil
when the engine is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that the
vehicle warranty may not cover.
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
462
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 524).
4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Immediately soak up any oil spillage
with an absorbent cloth.
Resetting the Engine Oil Change
Reminder - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen
1. Press the Menu button on the steering
wheel to enter the information display
main menu.
2. Select Truck Info.
3. Select Oil Life.
4. Select Reset Oil Life.
5. Press and hold the OK button until the
system reset confirmation appears.
Resetting the Engine Oil Change
Reminder - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen
Depending on your cluster, there are two
paths to reset the engine oil change
reminder.
Path 1
1. Press the Menu button on the steering
wheel to enter the information display
main menu.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Vehicle Maintenance.
4. Select Oil Life.
5. Press and hold the OK button until the
system reset confirmation appears.
Path 2
1. Press the Menu button on the steering
wheel to enter the information display
main menu.
2. Select Truck Info.
3. Select Engine Information.
4. Press and hold the OK button until the
system reset confirmation appears.
Engine Oil Capacity and
Specification
For filling information, please refer to the
Capacities and Specifications section of
your owner's manual. See Engine Oil
Capacity and Specification (page 463).
CHECKING THE COOLANT
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 602).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the minimum and maximum marks
on the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
463
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 524). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and could
void the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 524).
Using water that has not been deionized
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
Note: We do not recommend the use of
recycled coolant.
3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
4. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, repeat step
2.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
Service your vehicle as soon as possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute, as they can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
464
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates, you
may need to increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point protection.
Coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the coolant and could
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates, you
may need to decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
Note: Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion protection
characteristics of the coolant and could
cause engine damage.
Coolant Change
Change the coolant at specific mileage
intervals. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance information. See Normal
Scheduled Maintenance (page 605).
Note: Dispose of used coolant in the
appropriate manner.
Follow your community's regulations and
standards for recycling and disposing of
automotive fluids.
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
465
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine could operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short
period of time for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
466
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after
several minutes, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
ENGINE AIR FILTER
Checking the Engine Air Filter
Restriction Gauge - Diesel
E254173
The air filter restriction gauge is in the
upper housing of the air filter assembly.
Check the air filter restriction gauge
whenever you open the hood to carry out
general engine maintenance. Change the
air filter element when the restriction
gauge reads near the change filter line and
the gauge is yellow. Allowing the restriction
gauge to reach maximum affects engine
performance and fuel economy.
467
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
After operating your vehicle during heavy
snowfall or extreme rain, do the following:
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear any snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet and
reset the air filter restriction gauge.
• Extreme rain: The air filter element
dries out after approximately 15–30
minutes of driving at highway speeds.
At the earliest opportunity, open the
hood and reset the air filter restriction
gauge.
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Diesel
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 602).
Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
531).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E254171
1. Release the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Lift and rotate the
air filter housing cover.
E254172
2. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
4. After installing a new air filter element,
reset the air filter restriction gauge by
pressing the reset button. See
Checking the Engine Air Filter
Restriction Gauge (page 467).
468
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Gasoline
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Change the air filter element at the proper
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 602).
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
524).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element could result in severe engine
damage that the vehicle Warranty may not
cover.
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not
allow foreign material to enter the air
induction system. The engine is susceptible
to damage from even small particles.
E191820
1. Release the clips that secure the air
filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
469
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Engine Air Filter - Information Messages - Diesel
ActionMessage
Indicates the engine air filter is performing as expected.Filter OK
Indicates that there is a higher than expected restriction
across the engine air filter, which could represent an air filter
at full useful life or a filter with an obstruction.
When this displays, inspect the engine air filter and replace
if necessary.
After the inspection or engine air filter replacement, you must
reset the system in order to change the status from Check
Filter to Filter OK.
Check Filter See Manual
Indicates that there is an error within the electronic air filter
maintenance minder system requiring service.
System Fault See Manual
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP - DIESEL
WARNING: Do not drain the
water-in-fuel separator while the engine
is running. Failure to follow this warning
may result in fire, serious injury, death or
property damage.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
Your vehicle's fuel system has a fuel filter
and water separator to remove water from
the fuel.
If the water in fuel indicator illuminates
when the engine is running, stop your
vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off
the engine, then drain the fuel and water
separator.
Note: Allowing water to stay in the fuel
system after the water in fuel indicator
illuminates could result in extensive damage
or failure of the fuel injection system.
The fuel water trap is above the frame rail
under the driver side of the vehicle.
Make sure the ignition is off before
performing the following steps.
E254226
Front of Vehicle.A
1. Loosen the drain plug approximately
one and a half turns.
2. Allow the water to drain.
3. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a
strong resistance.
4. Switch the ignition on for 30 seconds,
then switch the ignition off. Repeat
twice.
470
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
5. Start the engine.
6. Check for leaks.
Note: The water in fuel warning lamp turns
off after approximately two seconds with
the engine running.
Note: The in-tank pump will turn off
automatically after approximately 30
seconds.
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER
- DIESEL
Your fuel filters must be changed at the
correct service interval or when you see the
low fuel pressure message appear. Refer
to scheduled maintenance for the correct
service interval.
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER
- GASOLINE
Your vehicle has a lifetime fuel filter that
integrates with the fuel tank. It does not
need regular maintenance or replacement.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle
electrical system. Make sure you
disconnect the battery cables from all
batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious
personal injury or property damage.
The battery is in the engine compartment.
See Under Hood Overview (page 456).
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free
battery. It does not require additional
water during service.
471
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the
battery cables tightly fastened to the
battery terminals. If any corrosion is
present on the battery or terminals, remove
the cables from the terminals and clean
with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and
water.
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period.
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid unintended connection or
arcing.
To maintain correct operation of the
battery management system, if you add
any electrical devices to your vehicle, do
not connect the ground connection directly
to the negative battery terminal. A
connection at the negative battery terminal
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to your vehicle this may
adversely affect battery performance,
durability and the performance of other
electrical systems on your vehicle.
If you replace the battery make sure it
matches the electrical requirements of
your vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery
and your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, it must relearn its adaptive
strategy. Because of this, the transmission
may shift firmly when first driven. This is
normal operation while the transmission
fully updates its operation to optimum
shift feel.
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
To disconnect or remove the battery, do
the following:
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery.
Note: The engine management system has
a power hold function and remains powered
for a period of time after you switch the
ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and
adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting
the battery without waiting can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
terminal.
5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
terminal.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery.
8. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Before reconnecting the battery,
make sure the ignition remains switched off.
Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals
are fully tightened.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
battery, you must reset the following
features:
• Window bounce-back. See Windows
(page 137).
• Clock Settings.
• Pre-set radio stations.
• Steering Angle Sensor.
472
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: To calibrate the steering angle
sensor, drive the vehicle above 30 mph
(50 km/h) for a minimum of 1.2 mi (2 km).
Make sure to drive straight ahead for a
minimum of 30 seconds. Several vehicle
functions are disabled and a warning light
could appear until the sensor is calibrated.
Battery Management System
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some of the following features:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition off.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
Battery Disposal
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 m).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 m).C
Horizontal reference line.D
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp, indicated by a 3
millimeter circle on the lens, to the
ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height, a piece of
masking tape works well.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
473
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E167358
4. On the wall or screen, observe a light
pattern with a distinct horizontal edge
toward the right. If this edge is not at
the horizontal reference line, adjust the
beam so the edge is at the same height
as the horizontal reference line.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
EXTERIOR BULBS
Exterior Bulb Specification Chart
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
16912Central high mounted stop lamp.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted cargo lamp.
Vehicles with cargo box.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamp (XLT optional,
Lariat, Platinum, King Ranch, Limited).
55H11Daytime running lamp (XLT optional,
XL).
474
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront turn signal and parking lamp
(XLT optional, Lariat, Platinum, King
Ranch, Limited).
21/54257NAFront turn signal and parking lamp
(XLT optional, XL).
LEDLEDFront fog lamp (XLT optional, Lariat,
Platinum, King Ranch, Limited).
559140Front fog lamp (XL and XLT optional).
LEDLEDFront side marker lamp (Lariat
optional, Platinum, King Ranch,
Limited).
5W5WFront side marker lamp (Lariat
optional, XL, XLT).
LEDLEDHeadlamp (XLT optional, Lariat, Plat-
inum, King Ranch, Limited).
55H11
Headlamp low beam (XLT optional,
XL).
659005
Headlamp high beam (XLT optional,
XL).
5W5WLicense plate lamp.
LEDLEDPuddle lamp.
LEDLEDRear cargo box lamp.
21WTY21WRear turn signal (XL optional).
21/7WT21W/7WRear lamp, stop lamp (XL optional).
21/7WT21W/7W
Rear lamp, stop lamp, rear turn signal
and rear side marker lamp (XL
optional, XLT).
21WT21WReversing lamp (XL optional).
LEDLEDReversing lamp (XL optional, XLT).
LEDLEDSide turn signal lamp.
LEDLED
Taillamp-all functions (Lariat, Plat-
inum, King Ranch, Limited).
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
475
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Open the tailgate to access the rear
lamp assemblies.
E187288
3. Remove the two bolts from the tail
lamp assembly. Then, carefully pull the
lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar
by releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Changing a Headlamp Bulb
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs
have cooled down before removing
them. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Accessing the Halogen High Beam
and Low Beam Bulbs
1. Rotate the steering wheel to the
opposite side of the bulb needing
replacement.
E183762
2. Remove the screws and push pins from
the front of the wheel liner.
3. Pull the wheel liner back towards the
tire to gain access to the bulbs.
476
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Replacing the Halogen High Beam
and Low Beam Bulbs
E183500
Low beam headlamp bulb.A.
Turn signal lamp bulb.B.
High beam headlamp bulb.C.
E183763
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. For the high beam and low beam bulbs,
remove the rubber cap to access the
bulbs.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.
477
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before
installing it.
Changing a Front Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs
have cooled down before removing
them. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
1. Rotate the steering wheel to the
opposite side of the bulb needing
replacement.
E183762
2. Remove the screws and push pins from
the front of the wheel liner.
3. Pull the wheel liner back toward the
tire to gain access to the bulb.
E183500
Low beam headlamp bulb.A.
Turn signal lamp bulb.B.
High beam headlamp bulb.C.
478
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E183763
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Changing a Front Side Marker
Lamp Bulb
1. Rotate the steering wheel to the
opposite side of the bulb needing
replacement.
E183762
2. Remove the screws and push pins from
the front of the wheel liner.
3. Pull the wheel liner back toward the
tire to gain access to the bulb.
479
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E338050
4. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector.
6. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Changing a Front Fog Lamp Bulb
E163826
1. Make sure the fog lamps are off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it from the fog lamp.
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Changing a Rear Lamp Bulb
E187289
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal
bulb.
A.
Reversing lamp bulb.B.
1. Remove the rear lamp assembly.
2. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
480
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Changing a Stoplamp Bulb
E187289
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal
bulb.
A.
Reversing lamp bulb.B.
1. Remove the rear lamp assembly. See
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly
(page 476).
2. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Changing a Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb
E187289
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal
bulb.
A.
Reversing lamp bulb.B.
1. Remove the rear lamp assembly. See
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly
(page 476).
2. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
481
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Changing a Reversing Lamp Bulb
E187289
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal
bulb.
A.
Reversing lamp bulb.B.
1. Remove the rear lamp assembly. See
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly
(page 476).
2. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Changing a High Mounted
Stoplamp Bulb
1. Make sure the lamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and move the
lamp assembly away from the vehicle
to expose the bulb sockets.
E187290
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it
counterclockwise and pulling it out of
the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Changing a License Plate Lamp
Bulb
The license plate bulbs are behind the rear
bumper.
E187794
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise
and carefully pull to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
482
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
INTERIOR BULBS
Interior Bulb Specification Chart
Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not
serviceable items. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: DUAL GENERATORS
E312231
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: SINGLE GENERATOR
E176088
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.0L
DIESEL
E249449
483
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.3L
E167467
Note: The short drive belt is on the inner
groove closest to the engine. The long drive
belt is on the outer groove farthest from the
engine.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: SINGLE GENERATOR
E318007
Note: The long drive belt is on the inner
groove closest to the engine. The short drive
belt is on the outer groove farthest from the
engine.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: DUAL GENERATORS
E313075
Note: The short drive belt is on the inner
groove closest to the engine. The long drive
belt is on the outer groove farthest from the
engine.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.5L,
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
E312206
484
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: The generator drive belt is on the
inner groove closest to the engine. The
water pump belt is on the outer groove
farthest from the engine.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 5.0L,
VEHICLES WITH: SINGLE
GENERATOR
E249450
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 5.0L,
VEHICLES WITH: DUAL
GENERATORS
E312204
485
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions
Immediately remove fuel spillages, AdBlue
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits
and road tar. These may cause damage to
your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Cleaning Headlamps and Rear
Lamps
We recommend that you only use cold or
lukewarm water containing car shampoo
to clean the headlamps and the rear
lamps.
486
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Do not scrape the lamps.
Do not wipe lamps when they are dry.
Cleaning Windows and Wiper
Blades
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner.
Note: When cleaning the interior of the
windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner
on the instrument panel or door panels.
Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
This can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Cleaning Chrome, Aluminium or
Stainless Steel
We recommend that you only use a car
shampoo, a soft cloth and water on
bumpers and other chrome, aluminium or
stainless steel parts.
Note: For additional information and
assistance, we recommend that you contact
an authorized dealer.
Note: Rinse the area well after cleaning.
Note: Do not use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads, as they
can scratch these surfaces.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Cleaning Wheels
Only use a recommended wheel and tire
cleaner to clean the wheels weekly. For
additional information and assistance, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
1. Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust.
2. Rinse well after cleaning.
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before parking your vehicle.
This reduces the risk of corrosion of the
brake discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
Cleaning the Engine Compartment
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove debris
from the screen area below windshield.
Note: If you are not familiar with the parts
around the engine do not wash the engine
compartment. Avoid frequent engine
washes.
When washing the engine compartment:
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage.
487
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
shampoo and degreaser.
• Spray an approved engine shampoo
and degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and rinse with water.
Cleaning Stripes or Graphics
It is recommended to wash your vehicle by
hand however, pressure washing may be
used under the following conditions:
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Cleaning Camera Lenses and
Sensors
We recommend that you only use
lukewarm or cold water and a soft cloth
to clean the camera lens and sensors.
Note: Do not pressure wash camera lens
and sensors.
Cleaning the Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free from packed dirt.
Rear suspension components may require
regular cleaning with a power washer or a
thorough rinse with a strong stream of
water if the vehicle is operated in dusty or
muddy environments. Rear leaf springs or
other suspension components may emit
squeaking or popping noises while
operating the vehicle if particles, such as
dirt, rocks, or other debris, are present in
the components.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Cleaning the Instrument Panel
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or
instrument panel to avoid contamination
of the airbag system.
We recommend that you only clean the
instrument panel and cluster lens with a
damp soft cloth. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
Note: Avoid cleaners or polishes that
increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
Cleaning Plastic
We recommend that you only use a mild
soap and water solution on a soft cloth.
Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
488
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Displays and Screens
We recommend that you only use a
microfiber cloth in a circular motion to
clean off the fingerprint or dust.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Cleaning Seats and the Headliner
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
side airbag system and affect
performance of the side airbag in a crash.
Cleaning Fabric Seats and the
Headliner
We recommend that you only clean the
fabric seats and headliners in the following
way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
3. For additional information and
assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer.
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a
ring forms on the fabric, immediately clean
the entire area, but do not oversaturate or
the ring could set.
Cleaning Vinyl and Leather
We recommend that you only clean the
leather and vinyl surfaces in the following
way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
3. For additional information and
assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer.
With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in
premium, top-grain leather that is
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather.
Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
evidence of naturally occurring markings,
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.
To lessen the appearance of certain
scratches and other wear marks, apply
conditioner on the affected area.
489
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Conditioning
• Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the cleaning leather and
vinyl section.
• Make sure the leather is dry then apply
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
For additional information, visit:
www.krsaddleshop.com
Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats
We recommend that you only clean your
carpets in the following way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
3. For additional information and
assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer.
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a
ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire
area immediately, but do not oversaturate
or the ring could set.
We recommend that you only clean your
floor mats in the following way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wash rubber floor mats using mild
soap and lukewarm or cold water.
3. Completely dry the floor mat before
placing them back in your vehicle.
Cleaning Seatbelts
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
1. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
Cleaning Moonroof Tracks
1. Remove debris from the tracks with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the bulb seal and mating painted
roof metal surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
WAXING YOUR VEHICLE
Wax the high-gloss painted surface of your
prewashed vehicle once or twice a year.
490
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
We recommend that you only use an
approved quality wax that does not
contain abrasives. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions to apply and
remove the wax. For additional information
and assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight.
Note: Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss
black colored parts, they discolor over time.
491
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
PREPARING YOUR VEHICLE
FOR STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, the following maintenance
recommendations ensures your vehicle
stays in good operating condition.
Under various conditions, long-term
storage may lead to degraded engine
performance or failure unless you use
specific precautions to preserve your
vehicle.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and weather damage.
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminants which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housings
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Hybrid Battery Systems
We recommend the following actions for
your vehicle:
• When storing your vehicle for greater
than 30 days the state of charge
should be approximately 50%.
Additionally we recommend
disconnecting the 12V battery which
will reduce system loads on the HV
battery.
12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery
cables.
Brakes
Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
492
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storing Your Vehicle
Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so to
reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the
brake discs, brake pads and linings.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This reduces the risk of corrosion of the
brake discs, brake pads and linings.
REMOVING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM STORAGE
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
493
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storing Your Vehicle
LOCATING THE TIRE LABEL
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
See Locating the Safety
Compliance Certification
Labels (page 361).
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
494
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
INFORMATION ON THE TIRE
SIDEWALL
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
495
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
496
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
497
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
*Treadwear: The treadwear
grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as
well on the government course as
a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
498
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
499
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
GLOSSARY OF TIRE
TERMINOLOGY
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
500
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
TIRE REPLACEMENT
REQUIREMENTS
AGE
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare
tire when you replace the road
tires or after six years due to
aging even if it has not been
used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
501
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver's door. If this information
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed
the maximum pressure indicated
on the sidewall of the tire to set
the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures
up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
502
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair if
the worn tires still have usable
depth.
To avoid potential Four-Wheel
Drive (4WD) malfunction or
(4WD) system damage, it is
recommended to replace all four
tires rather than mixing
significantly worn tires with new
tires.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains
on snow-free roads.
WARNING: Only fit snow chains to
specified tires.
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted
with wheel trims, remove them before
fitting snow chains.
WARNING: If you choose to install
snow tires on your vehicle, they must be
the same size, construction, and load
range as the original tires listed on the
tire placard, and they must be installed
on all four wheels. Mixing tires of
different size or construction on your
vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may
lead to loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: Wheels and tires must
be the same size, load index and speed
rating as those originally fitted on the
vehicle. Use of any other tire or wheel
can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels can
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
Follow the recommended tire inflation
pressures found on the Safety
Compliance Certification label, or the
Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver door. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, or personal injury
or death.
503
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Only use snow chains on rear wheels.
Install snow chains in pairs. Do not use
self-tensioning snow chains.
Only use snow chains on the following
specified tire sizes. Only install chains that
are 15mm or less (SAE Class S chains).
• 245/70R17
• 265/70R17
• LT265/70R17
• 265/60R18
• LT265/70R18
We recommend you use steel wheels of
the same size and specification if snow
chains are required because chains may
chip aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Purchase snow chains from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
• When driving with snow chains do not
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the snow
chains rub or bang against the vehicle,
stop and tighten them. If this does not
work, remove the snow chains to
prevent vehicle damage.
• Remove the snow chains when they
are no longer needed. Do not use snow
chains on dry roads.
• If a temporary spare wheel is mounted
on your vehicle, do not use snow chains
on the axle with the temporary spare
wheel.
E292547
Use snow chains that fit against the
sidewall of the tire to prevent the chains
from touching the wheel rims or
suspension. Refer to the previous
illustration.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains, please contact your authorized
dealer.
504
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
CHECKING THE TIRE
PRESSURES
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
INFLATING THE TIRES
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
found on the tire. You will find a
Tire Label containing the
manufacturer's recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door.
The recommended tire inflation
pressure is also found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label, affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch on the B-pillar, or on
the edge of the driver door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
505
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR
WEAR
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves.
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR
DAMAGE
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
dismounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage, such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall.
If damage is observed or
suspected, have the tire inspected
by a tire professional.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires;
spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A
tire can explode in as little as
three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and
injure a passenger or bystander.
506
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you could eventually have a flat
tire on the highway. Drive slowly
to the closest safe area out of
traffic. This could further damage
the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels could be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer.
INSPECTING THE WHEEL
VALVE STEMS
Check the valve stems for holes,
cracks, or cuts that could permit
air leakage.
TIRE ROTATION
WARNING: If the tire label
shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the
vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you
need to update the settings for
the system sensors. Always
perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If
you do not reset the system, it
may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when
necessary.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Note: If your tires show any uneven
wear have the alignment checked
by an authorized dealer before
rotating tires.
507
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
Note: If you have a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Tire Rotation Diagram
Follow the diagram indicating the
correct tire locations for rotating
the tires.
E142548
508
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
WHAT IS THE TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
The tire pressure monitoring
system measures the vehicle's
tire pressures. A warning lamp
illuminates if one or more tires are
significantly underinflated or if there is a
system malfunction.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it
may not function.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the
most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal
damage to the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear,
loss of vehicle control and accidents. A
tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
and not appear to be flat!
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
509
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Note: The use of tire sealants can damage
the tire pressure monitoring system.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
When the outside temperature drops
significantly, the tire pressure could
decrease and activate the low tire pressure
warning lamp.
The warning lamp could also illuminate
when you use a spare wheel, or tire sealant
from the inflator kit.
Note: Regularly checking the vehicle tire
pressures can reduce the possibility for the
warning lamp to illuminate due to outside
air temperature changes.
Note: After you inflate the tires to the
recommended pressure it could take up to
two minutes of driving over 20 mph
(32 km/h) for the warning indicator to turn
off.
510
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
VIEWING THE TIRE
PRESSURES
E224333
Using the information display
arrow keys navigate to the truck
info section where you can view
the tire pressures.
RESETTING TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Reset Procedure
WARNING: To determine
the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle, see the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seat) or the
Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver door.
You must reset the tire pressure
monitoring system after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require
different recommended tire
pressures in the front tires as
compared to the rear tires.
Note: To reduce the chances of
interference from another vehicle,
perform the system reset
procedure at least three feet, one
meter, away from another vehicle
undergoing the system reset
procedure at the same time.
Note: Do not wait more than two
minutes between resetting each
tire sensor or the system can
time-out and you need to repeat
the entire procedure on all four
wheels.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two
minutes, then park in a safe
location where you can easily
get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Switch the ignition on but do
not start the engine.
4. Switch the hazard flashers on
then off three times.
Note: You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If you
successfully enter the reset mode,
the horn sounds once, the system
indicator flashes and a message
shows in the information display.
511
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: If the system does not enter
reset mode, try again starting at
Step 2. If after repeated attempts
to enter the reset mode, the horn
does not sound, the system
indicator does not flash and no
message shows in the information
display, contact your authorized
dealer.
5. Remove the valve cap from the
valve stem on the left front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until
the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn tone
confirms that the sensor
identification code has been
learned by the module for this
position. If the horn sounds twice,
the reset procedure was
unsuccessful, and you must repeat
it.
6. Remove the valve cap from the
valve stem on the right front
tire. Decrease the air pressure
until the horn sounds.
7. Repeat the previous step on
the right rear tire and then on
the left rear tire.
8. Switch the ignition off.
Note: If the horn sounds twice
again after switching the ignition
off, and repeating the procedure,
contact your authorized dealer and
have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
9. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure as
indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Trailer Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (If Equipped)
Note: Additional equipment may
be required for your vehicle to
support trailer tire pressure and
temperature monitoring. See your
authorized dealer for more
information.
Note: The trailer tire pressure
monitoring system is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance. It is your
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressures at all times.
Note: If a trailer tire is repaired,
replaced or broken down for
service, the screw and valve on the
trailer tire pressure sensor should
be replaced. See your authorized
dealer for details.
E235807
The trailer tire pressure monitoring
system is an added safety feature
that allows you to view your trailer
tire pressures and temperatures
through the information display.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System – Information
Messages (page 515). Tire
512
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
pressure sensors are mounted into
each tire on your trailer. The
sensors send a message to your
vehicle indicating the current
trailer tire pressure and
temperature.
If the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system detects that a
tire is low, a warning message
appears in the information display.
The trailer tire information screen
in the information display
highlights the tire with a low
pressure.
If the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system detects that a
tire temperature is over temp, a
warning message appears in the
Information display. The trailer tire
information screen in the
information display highlights the
tire with a high temperature.
The main function of the trailer tire
pressure monitoring system is to
warn you when your trailer tires
need air or if the tires are
experiencing high temperatures.
It can also warn you in the event
the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System – Information
Messages (page 515).
When a Temporary Spare or
New Tire is Installed
If you have replaced a trailer tire
with a new or spare tire, a warning
message appears and pressure
readings are no longer displayed
for that tire.
To restore the full function of the
trailer tire pressure monitoring
system:
• Have the damaged wheel and
tire assembly repaired and
remounted to your trailer.
• Install the trailer tire pressure
monitoring sensor into the new
wheel and tire assembly.
• Perform the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system reset
procedure.
Trailer Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
Note: You need to perform the tire
pressure monitoring system reset
procedure after each tire rotation,
or when a new trailer tire pressure
sensor is installed into a trailer tire.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring
system can be reset through the
menu in the information display.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System – Information
Messages (page 515). Performing
the trailer setup process also
resets the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system.
513
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
– Warning Lamps
The low tire pressure warning
lamp has combined functions,
as it warns you when your tires
need air, and when the system is no longer
capable of functioning as intended.
Action RequiredPossible CauseWarning Lamp
After inflating your tires to the manufac-
turer’s recommended pressure as shown
on the Tire Label, on the edge of driver
door or the B-Pillar, drive your vehicle for
at least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns off.
One or more tires are
significantly under
inflated
Solid warning lamp
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
Tire rotation without
sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
and refit it to your vehicle to restore
operation of the system.
Temporary spare wheel
in use
Solid warning lamp
or flashing warning
lamp
If the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended tire pressures and the temporary
spare wheel is not in use, the system
detected a fault that requires service.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
514
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Information Messages
ActionMessage
After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire Label, on the edge of the driver
door or the B-Pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes
over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Tire Pressure Low
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
The system has detected a fault that requires service or a
spare tire is in use. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified
tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
Displays when one or more tires on your trailer is above
the recommended temperature.
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 509).
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication
Not Setup See Manual
515
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it
may not function.
Note: The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system and
should only be used in roadside
emergencies.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer to prevent damage to the system
sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Precautions (page 510). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing the
flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect
the system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels.
Full-size dissimilar spare
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, four-wheel
drive functionality may be limited,
especially when driving in a mechanically
locked four-wheel drive mode. You may
experience the following:
• Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked four-wheel drive mode.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in
four-wheel drive.
• Engage four-wheel drive unless the
vehicle is stationary.
• Use four-wheel drive on dry pavement.
516
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel,
place an appropriate block or wheel
chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support
as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight,
including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is only supported by a
vehicle jack.
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in
an emergency.
WARNING: The jack should be
used on level firm ground wherever
possible.
WARNING: Check that the vehicle
jack is not damaged or deformed and
the thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your
vehicle.
WARNING: It is recommended that
the wheels of the vehicle be chocked,
and that no person should remain in a
vehicle that is being jacked.
517
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any
object under your vehicle. Never place
your hand between the extended running
board and your vehicle. A moving running
board may cause injury.
Note: Only use the spare tire carrier to stow
the tire and wheel combination provided
with your vehicle. Other tire and wheel
combinations can cause the tire carrier to
fail.
Note: Do not use impact tools or power
tools operating at over 200 RPM on the
spare tire carrier, this could cause a winch
malfunction and prevent a secure fit.
Override the winch at least three times,
there's an audible click each time, to make
sure the wheel and tire have been tightened
securely.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.
Removing the Vehicle Jack and
Tool Bag
The vehicle jack and tool bag are on the
rear passenger side of your vehicle, behind
the passenger seat.
E323384
1. Turn the wing bolt on the jack bracket
counterclockwise to release the jack
and tool bag from the jack bracket.
E327650
2. Remove the jack and tool bag from the
jack bracket.
E323386
3. Release the jack tool bag straps.
518
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
E327651
4. Slide the jack tool bag through the jack
load rest to remove for access to the
jack tools.
E323393
5. Remove the tools from the tool bag.
Note: Your jack does not require
maintenance or additional lubrication over
the service life of your vehicle.
Removing the Spare Tire
Note: Remove the hook end from the
assembled jack handle before continuing.
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper.
1. Use your key to remove the lock
cylinder from the access hole of the
bumper to allow access to the guide
tube.
E188735
2. Assemble the jack handle as shown in
the illustration.
E184020
3. Fully insert the jack handle through the
bumper hole and into the guide tube
through the access hole in the rear
bumper. Turn the handle
counterclockwise until the tire is
lowered to the ground and the cable is
slightly slack to allow the tire to be slid
rearward from under the vehicle.
4. Remove the retainer from the center
of the wheel.
519
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
E175447
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.
For example, if the left front tire is flat,
block the right rear wheel.
6. Obtain the spare tire and vehicle jack
from their storage locations.
7. Loosen each wheel nut on the affected
flat tire one-half turn counterclockwise,
but do not remove them.
Jacking the Vehicle
E166722
Front Jacking Points
E327652
Note: Use the frame rail as the front jacking
location point, not the control arm. The
frame rail is marked with an arrow.
Rear Jacking Points
E323397
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
520
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking
point next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the ground.
2. Remove the wheel nuts with the lug
wrench.
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the wheel nuts until
the wheel is snug against the hub. Do
not fully tighten the wheel nuts until
the wheel has been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. Remove the vehicle jack and fully
tighten the wheel nuts in the order
shown.
6. Stow the flat tire. See the Stowing the
Flat or Spare Tire.
7. Stow the vehicle jack and lug wrench.
Make sure the jack is securely fastened
before you drive. See Stowing the
Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag.
8. Unblock the wheels.
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow the spare tire
stowage instructions could result in failure
of the cable or loss of the spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. Pull on the cable to
align the components at the end of the
cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The effort to
turn the jack handle increases
significantly and the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips when the tire is raised
to the maximum tightness. Tighten to
the best of your ability, to the point
where the ratchet or slip occurs, if
possible. The spare tire carrier does not
allow you to overtighten. If the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips with little
effort, contact your authorized dealer.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the
frame and is properly tightened. Try to
push or pull, then turn the tire to be
sure it does not move. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to
properly stow the spare tire could
result in failure of the winch cable and
loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure
when servicing the spare tire pressure,
every six months, as per your scheduled
maintenance information, or at any
time that the spare tire is disturbed
through service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock
into the bumper drive tube with the
spare tire lock key and jack handle.
521
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag
E323394
1. Turn the lead screw eyelet to adjust
the jack up or down until the stowage
markings on the upper channel align
with the lower channel.
E323393
2. Place the tools inside of the tool bag.
E327653
3. Install the tool bag through the vehicle
jack load rest.
E323386
4. Secure the jack tool bag straps around
the vehicle jack.
E327654
5. Place the jack and tool bag back onto
the jack bracket.
E323384
522
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
6. Turn the wing bolt on the jack bracket
clockwise until the jack and tools are
secured to the jack bracket.
WHEEL NUTS
WARNING: When you install a
wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt
or foreign materials present on the
mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make
sure to secure any fasteners that attach
the rotor to the hub so they do not
interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without
correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to
come off while your vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of vehicle control,
personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)
1
Bolt Size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
1
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt
threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our
recommended replacement wheel nuts
and or wheel bolts.
Retighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any
wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation,
changing a flat tire or wheel removal.
E145950
Hub pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
523
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationEngine
10.0:1Compression ratio.
165 in³ (2,700 cm³)Displacement.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
524
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L DIESEL
SpecificationEngine
16:1Compression ratio.
183 in³ (3,000 cm³)Displacement.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Ultra Low Sulfur DieselRequired fuel.
525
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L
SpecificationEngine
12:1Compression ratio.
203.8 in³ (3,340 cm³)Displacement.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)Spark plug gap.
526
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationEngine
10.5:1Compression ratio.
213.4 in³ (3,497 cm³)Displacement.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
527
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
SpecificationEngine
10.5:1Compression ratio.
213.4 in³ (3,497 cm³)Displacement.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
528
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L
SpecificationEngine
12:1Compression ratio.
307 in³ (5,038 cm³)Displacement.
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8Firing order.
Coil on plug, coil near plugIgnition system.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
0.039 in (1 mm) - 0.043 in (1.1 mm)Spark plug gap.
529
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-2062
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-578Spark plug.
WW-2248Windshield wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
530
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.0L DIESEL
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
BAGM-49H8Battery.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-2081
Engine oil filter.
1
FD-4627Fuel filter.
ZD-22Glow plug.
WW-2248Windshield wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
531
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.3L
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-520Spark plug.
WW-2248Windshield wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
532
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery-standard.
BAGM-94RH7-800Battery-optional.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-578Spark plug.
WW-2248Windshield wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
533
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
BAGM-94RH7-800Battery-standard.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-578Spark plug.
WW-2248Windshield wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
534
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 5.0L
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery-standard.
BAGM-94RH7-800Battery-optional.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-588Spark plug.
WW-2248Windshield wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
535
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
536
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
E240523
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.0L DIESEL
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E258300
The American Petroleum Institute (API)
service symbol is used to identify the
proper engine oil for your engine. The API
service symbol will be displayed on the oil
container you purchase. The API symbol
displays the oil performance category in
the top half of symbol and the viscosity
grade in the center of the symbol.
537
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E276509
The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel
engines is important for satisfactory
operation. Determine which oil viscosity
best suits the temperature range you
expect to encounter for the next service
interval from the following SAE viscosity
grade chart.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Note: We recommend an engine block
heater at temperatures below -9°F (-23°C).
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.5 qt (6.15 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C214-B1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 F-150 Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 F-150 Diesel Motor Oil /
Huile moteur diesel F-150 SAE 5W-30 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-QFA(U.S. & Canada)
538
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-F1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-40
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel
Fuel Blends (B20 Max)
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-F1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe
Duty Service
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-F1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.3L
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
539
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C960-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-20
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W20-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W20-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
540
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C962-A1Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-Q1SP(U.S.)
E240522
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
541
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
542
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L, HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
543
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
544
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 5.0L
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
545
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
7.75 qt (7.33 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
546
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
15.1 qt (14.3 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
547
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.0L
DIESEL
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
13.7 qt (13 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.3L
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
12.7 qt (12 L)All.
548
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
14.3 qt (13.5 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
549
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.5L,
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
7.2 qt (6.8 L)Low temperature cooling circuit.
15.3 qt (14.5 L)High temperature cooling circuit.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 5.0L
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
13.2 qt (12.5 L)All.
550
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - GASOLINE, EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Regular cab.
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Super cab.
26.0 gal (98.4 L)Crew cab.
36.0 gal (136.3 L)Optional.
551
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - DIESEL
Capacities
QuantityVariant
26.0 gal (98.4 L)All.
552
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - GASOLINE, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
30.6 gal (115.8 L)All.
553
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)29 oz (0.82 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
554
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.0L DIESEL
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)29 oz (0.82 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
555
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.3L
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)29 oz (0.82 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
556
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)29 oz (0.82 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
557
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L, HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
5.41 fl oz (160 ml)23 oz (0.65 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C31-B2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil / Huile
POE pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-34(U.S. & Canada)
558
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 5.0L
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)29 oz (0.82 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
559
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F(Canada)
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION
Capacities
QuantityVariant
5.6 gal (21.3 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M99C130-AMotorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid / Fluide pour
échappement diesel Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-27-GAL,PM-27-JUG(U.S.)
CPM-27-J(Canada)
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced brake performance.
Note: We recommend you use DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. If
you use any fluid other than the
recommended fluid, it could cause reduced
brake performance and not meet our
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials could result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
560
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Four-wheel drive (Electronic shift on the
Fly).
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand).
1.9 qt (1.8 L)Two-speed automatic four-wheel drive
(Mechanical lock).
561
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
FRONT AXLE FLUID CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.8 qt (1.7 L)Four-wheel drive.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
562
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.0–2.1 qt (1.9–2 L)8.8 inch.
2.2–2.3 qt (2.1–2.2 L)9.75 inch.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
563
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E311767
Note: In the illustration, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Overview
The vehicle identification number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifier.A
Brake system, gross vehicle
weight rating, restraint devices
and their locations.
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type.
C
Engine or motor type.D
Check digit.E
Model year.F
Assembly plant.G
Production sequence number.H
564
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Identification
WHAT IS A CONNECTED
VEHICLE
A connected vehicle has technology that
allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile
network and for you to access a range of
features. When used in conjunction with
the FordPass app, it could allow you to
monitor and control your vehicle further,
for example checking the tire pressures,
the fuel level and the vehicle location. For
additional information, refer to the local
Ford website.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
REQUIREMENTS
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle
network.
Some remote features require additional
service activation. Log in to your Ford
account for details. Some restrictions, third
party terms and message or data rates
may apply.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or
regulations could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop
some features from functioning.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK
What Is the Modem
The modem allows access to a
range of features built into your
vehicle.
Enabling and Disabling the Modem
1. Press Settings.
2. Press Connectivity.
3. Press Connected Vehicle Features.
4. Switch vehicle connectivity on or off.
Connecting FordPass to the
Modem
1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
and log in.
3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
4. Select the option for vehicle details.
5. Select the option to activate your
vehicle.
6. Make sure that the name on the screen
matches the name shown in your
FordPass account.
7. Confirm that FordPass account is
connected to the modem.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A WI-FI NETWORK
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Connectivity.
2. Press Manage Wi-Fi Networks.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Press View Available Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
565
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked Questions - Vehicles With: Modem
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot confirm the
connection of my FordPass
account to the modem.
– Modem is not enabled.
• Switch vehicle connectivity on.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
566
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked Questions - Vehicles With: SYNC
4
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same network
name.
• Use a unique name for your network name. Do not
use the default name unless it contains a unique
identifier, for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door as it may
block the signal.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again, or use the
Add Network Manually option in Wi-Fi settings
menu.
– Unsupported security type.
• Some network security types are not supported,
for example WEP.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
567
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see the Wi-Fi
hotspot name when I search
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device.
– System limitation.
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
568
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI
HOTSPOT
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it
for access to the Internet.
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting
is on.
2. Press Settings.
3. Press Wi-Fi visibility.
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is
on.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
and Password
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
2. Press Settings.
Note: The network name is the hotspot
name.
3. Press View Password.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot
1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and
select the hotspot from the list of
available Wi-Fi networks.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
Purchasing a Data Plan
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device.
2. If the portal does not open on your
device, open a website and it redirects
to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
portal to purchase a plan.
Note: If you have an active plan, the system
does not redirect to the vehicle network
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
to purchase more data.
Note: If data usage information is available
in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
system does not remove your vehicle from
your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-
FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
PASSWORD
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
2. Press Settings.
3. Press Edit.
4. Press Change Network Name.
5. Enter your required network name.
6. Press Done.
7. Press Change Password.
8. Enter your required password.
9. Press Done.
569
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
AUDIO SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Listening to loud audio for long periods of
time could damage your hearing.
SWITCHING THE AUDIO UNIT
ON AND OFF
Press the button on the volume
control.
SELECTING THE AUDIO
SOURCE
Audio Unit
E308143
Press to open the media source
menu.
You can press this multiple times to
change the audio source or scroll through
the media sources.
Touchscreen
Press Sources on the touchscreen to open
the media source menu.
PLAYING OR PAUSING THE
AUDIO SOURCE
Audio Unit
Press the button to pause
playback. Press again to resume
playback.
Touchscreen
Press the button to pause
playback. Press again to resume
playback.
Note: Not all sources can be paused.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume.
Some vehicles may be able to adjust the
volume using buttons on the steering
wheel.
570
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
SWITCHING SHUFFLE MODE
ON AND OFF
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch shuffle
mode on or off.
Note: Not all sources have shuffle mode.
SWITCHING REPEAT MODE ON
AND OFF
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch repeat
mode on or off.
Note: Not all sources have repeat mode.
SETTING A MEMORY PRESET
1. Select a station or channel.
2. Press and hold a memory preset button
on the touchscreen.
Note: The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the preset and returns once it
is stored.
Note: You can save presets from multiple
sources to the memory preset bar.
MUTING THE AUDIO
Press to mute the signal. Press
again to restore the signal.
ADJUSTING THE SOUND
SETTINGS
Balance and Fade (If Equipped)
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Balance / Fade.
4. Press the arrows to adjust the settings.
Tone Settings
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Tone Settings.
4. Press the arrows or slider bar to adjust
the settings.
Speed Compensated Volume
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Speed Compensated Volume.
4. Press a setting.
Occupancy Mode (If Equipped)
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Occupancy Mode.
4. Press a setting.
Sound Mode (If Equipped)
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Sound Mode.
4. Press a setting.
SETTING THE CLOCK AND
DATE
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Clock Settings.
3. Set the time.
Note: The AM and PM options are not
available if 24-hour mode is on.
571
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Switching Automatic Time
Updates On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Clock Settings.
3. Switch Automatic time zone update
on or off.
AM/FM RADIO
AM/FM Radio Limitations
The further you travel from an AM or FM
station, the weaker the signal and the
weaker the reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking
garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the
reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the
audio system muting.
Selecting a Radio Station
Manually Selecting a Radio
Station
E270235
Turn to search through the radio frequency
band.
Using Direct Tune
1. Press Direct Tune to open the number
pad.
2. Enter the station you prefer.
Note: You can only enter a valid station for
the audio source you are currently listening
to.
Using Seek
Press either button. The system
stops at the first station it finds
in that direction.
Using the Station List
1. Press Browse.
Note: Available on FM radio only.
2. Press a station.
572
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
SWITCHING THE DISPLAY ON
AND OFF
Audio Unit
E272035
Press the button.
Touchscreen
To switch the display off:
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Display Settings.
3. Press Display Off.
Note: The display defaults to on each time
you switch your vehicle on.
To switch the display on, press anywhere
on the touchscreen.
DIGITAL RADIO (If Equipped)
What Is Digital Radio
HD Radio™ technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio.
For additional information, visit
www.HDRadio.com.
HD Radio Technology is manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio
and the HD and HD Radio logos are
proprietary trademarks of DTS. The vehicle
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
How Does Digital Radio Work
Your system has a special receiver that
allows it to receive digital broadcasts in
addition to analog broadcasts.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in both analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations are
only available digitally and could contain
new or different content.
Note: When the system first receives an
HD1 station, it plays the station in the analog
version until it verifies the station is an HD
Radio station. Then it shifts to the digital
version.
Note: There is an audio mute delay when
switching to an HD2 or HD3 station because
the system has to reacquire and decode the
digital signal.
Digital Radio Limitations
If you are outside the reception area, the
system could not work.
If you are on the fringe of the reception
area, the station could mute due to weak
signal strength.
Note: If you are listening to HD1, the system
changes back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again. If
you are listening to any other multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the
digital signal again.
Depending on the station quality, you could
hear a slight sound change when the
station changes between analog and
digital audio.
You cannot access a saved HD station if
your vehicle is outside the station’s
reception area.
Switching Digital Radio Reception
On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Radio Settings.
3. Switch AM HD Radio or FM HD Radio
on or off.
573
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Digital Radio Indicators
HD Radio Indicator
The indicator appears when HD Radio is
on and you tune to a station broadcasting
HD Radio technology.
E142616
The color of the indicator changes to
indicate the system status.
Gray indicates the system is acquiring a
digital station.
Orange indicates digital audio is playing.
Multicast Indicator
The multicast indicator appears if the
current station is broadcasting multiple
digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers indicate additional digital
channels available.
Note: For stations that have more than one
HD multicast, the HD indicator and radio
text appears as a button. Press the button
to cycle through all of the HD stations on
that specific frequency.
SATELLITE RADIO (If
Equipped)
What Is Satellite Radio
Your factory-installed SiriusXM radio
system includes a limited subscription
term, which begins on the date of sale or
lease of your vehicle. See an authorized
dealer for availability.
For additional information about extended
subscription terms, visit www.SiriusXM.com
in the United States, www.SiriusXM.ca in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
Satellite Radio Limitations
For optimal reception performance, keep
the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up
and keep luggage and other material as
far away from the antenna as possible.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking
garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.
When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger
signal may overtake a weaker one and
could result in the audio system muting.
Your display could show an error message
to indicate the interference.
Locating the Satellite Radio
Identification Number
1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.
2. Tune to channel 0.
574
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Selecting a Channel
Manually Selecting a Channel
E328569
E328570
Press the button to find the
previous or next available radio
channel.
Linear Tuner
The linear tuner is displayed when
manually selecting a channel. You can
swipe left or right on the linear tuner
carousel to navigate through the channel
list. Tap on a channel title to listen to it.
Using Direct Tune
1. Press the channel up or down button
to open the linear tuner screen.
2. Press Direct Tune to open the number
pad.
3. Enter the channel you prefer.
Using Browse
1. Press Browse.
2. Select a channel.
Satellite Radio Settings
Subscription
Your subscription status is displayed. You
can subscribe or manage your subscription
directly from the touchscreen.
Listener Add/Switch
You can create up to five listener profiles
per SiriusXM account. Each listener profile
can be personalized with a name and
profile image.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
to use.
Note: A default profile is available when no
listener profiles are created.
SiriusXM Favorites
SiriusXM Favorites are shown for the active
listener profile. While you are listening to
SiriusXM, you can save favorites by:
• Tapping the currently tuned channel
or show logo on the SiriusXM audio
screen. A favorite icon appears next to
the logo when it is saved as a favorite.
• Tuning to a channel or show you want
to save as a favorite. Navigate to the
SiriusXM Favorites screen and press
the Add Current button. The currently
tuned channel or show is saved as a
favorite.
• Saving a radio preset. This saves the
currently tuned SiriusXM channel or
show as a favorite.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
to use.
Listening History
Listening history is a list of recently listened
to SiriusXM content and is shown for the
active listener profile. You can view,
manage and reset the listening history
using the controls on the touchscreen.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
to use.
Listener Settings
Listener settings apply to the active
listener profile.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
to use.
Note: A default profile is available when no
listener profiles are created.
575
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Help and Support
You can contact SiriusXM Customer Care
directly from SYNC and view information
required to manage your SiriusXM account.
576
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
Audio System – Information Messages
Satellite Radio Troubleshooting
Recommended ActionPotential EffectsError Message
Internet connectivity is
turned off. See Connected
Vehicle (page 565).
Internet streaming and On
Demand shows are unavail-
able and some SiriusXM
features are disabled.
Connectivity Disabled
SYNC will attempt to
connect. See Satellite
Radio Limitations (page
574). Switch to a satellite
connection for the current
channel if the option is
available.
Audio system may mute.
"Switch to Satellite" button
may be displayed on the
SiriusXM audio screen if the
channel is also available via
satellite.
No Internet
Antenna may be obstructed
or satellite reception is weak
in your location. See Satel-
lite Radio Limitations
(page 574). Switch to an
internet connection for the
current channel if the option
is available.
Audio system may mute.
“Switch to Internet” button
may be displayed on the
SiriusXM audio screen if the
channel is also available via
streaming.
No Satellite Signal
Allow some time for audio
to load or tune to a different
channel.
Audio system may mute
while audio attempts to
load.
Slow Network Connection
A temporary update may be
in progress. Allow some time
before retrying to tune to the
channel. If issue persists, the
channel may no longer be
available.
Audio system may mute.
Radio may tune to a
different channel.
Channel Unavailable
A temporary update may be
in progress. Allow some time
before retrying to play the
episode. If issue persists, the
episode may no longer be
available.
Audio system may mute.
Radio may tune to a
different channel.
Episode Unavailable
577
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Retry action after some time
or tune to a different
channel.
Audio system may mute.
Radio may tune to a
different channel.
Something went wrong
Your subscription has
expired or you have not yet
subscribed for access to the
listed content. Navigate to
Subscription under the
Satellite Radio Settings
menu. If you have an active
subscription which includes
the listed channel or content
and you see this error, you
may need to refresh your
radio. To refresh your Siri-
usXM radio, visit www.siri-
usxm.com/refresh in the US,
or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh
in Canada.
You may need to provide
your SiriusXM Radio identific-
ation number. See
Locating the Satellite
Radio Identification
Number (page 574).
Cannot listen to selected
content. Content may
appear grayed out and some
features may be disabled.
Subscribe to Listen
578
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Your subscription does not
include access to the listed
content. You may need to
upgrade your subscription.
Navigate to Subscription
under the Satellite Radio
Settings menu. If you have
an active subscription which
includes the listed channel
or content and you see this
error, you may need to
refresh your radio. To refresh
your SiriusXM radio, visit
www.siriusxm.com/refresh
in the US, or www.siri-
usxm.ca/refresh in Canada.
You may need to provide
your SiriusXM Radio identific-
ation number. See
Locating the Satellite
Radio Identification
Number (page 574).
Cannot listen to selected
content. Content may
appear grayed out and some
features may be disabled.
Upgrade to Listen
Content is not available in
your location or SiriusXM is
unable to determine your
location. Tuning to a
different channel may
resolve the issue.
Audio may mute. “Not avail-
able in your location” or
“Unable to determine your
location” may be displayed.
Location Restricted Content
The Block Explicit Content
filter is turned on. Navigate
to Listener Settings under
the Satellite Radio Settings
menu to access the Block
Explicit Content filter.
Navigate to Listener
Settings. See Satellite
Radio Settings (page 575).
Audio may mute. Radio may
tune to a different channel.
Channel Blocked
If issue persists, you may
need to visit an authorized
dealer for service.
Audio may mute. Access to
SiriusXM features may be
unavailable.
Antenna Problem or Hard-
ware Problem
579
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Allow SiriusXM some time
to complete updating.
Audio may mute.SiriusXM Updating...
No action necessary. If
loading time is longer than
usual, See Satellite Radio
Limitations (page 574).
Audio may mute. Content
may be temporarily unavail-
able while loading.
Loading...
No action necessary. Allow
SiriusXM some time to finish
loading.
Audio may mute. Content
and controls may be
temporarily unavailable.
SiriusXM Loading...
IDENTIFYING THE AUDIO UNIT
E308144
Depending on your vehicle options, the
controls may look different from what you
see here.
580
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
INFORMATION AND
ENTERTAINMENT DISPLAY
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
INFORMATION AND
ENTERTAINMENT DISPLAY
LIMITATIONS
Speed-restricted Features
For your safety, some functions of the
system are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure
that you review your device's manual
before using it with the system
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use when your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Restricted Features
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
System Functionality
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
STATUS BAR
The bar is on top of the display and
indicates the status of your vehicle's
features.
Cell phone microphone muted.
Audio system muted.
System update installed.
Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
E335295
Text message received.
E335294
Automatic crash notification
system on.
Automatic crash notification
system off.
581
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information and Entertainment Display Overview
E335293
Cell phone battery status.
Wireless charger is active.
Cell phone network signal
strength.
Vehicle data sharing on.
E335292
Vehicle data sharing off.
Vehicle location sharing on.
Vehicle data and vehicle location
sharing on.
E327785
Vehicle system update
activating.
E327786
Additional consent needed.
E327787
Vehicle system activation
reminder.
E327788
Vehicle system update not
successful.
E327789
Vehicle system update reminder.
FEATURE BAR
The bar is on the bottom of the display and
allows you to access vehicle features.
E100027
Select to use the radio, a USB, a
media player or a Bluetooth
device.
E283811
Select to adjust climate settings.
Select to make calls and access
the phonebook on your cell
phone.
Select to use the navigation
system.
E329089
Select to view favorites.
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device.
E280315
Select to adjust system settings.
E282728
E335299
Select to view features.
E335300
Note: The icon may be different depending
on your vehicle.
INFORMATION ON DEMAND
SCREEN - VEHICLES WITH: 12.3
INCH SCREEN
SYNC4 Basic Interactions
E329408
Press the button to view the next
Information on Demand screen.
E329410
Press the button to view the
previous Information on Demand
screen.
E329409
Press the button to view
available cards.
582
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information and Entertainment Display Overview
WHAT IS VOICE INTERACTION
Voice Interaction allows you to control
vehicle features using conversational
requests.
SETTING THE WAKE WORD
1. Press the Settings option on the
feature bar.
2. Press the Voice Control button.
3. Switch on Listen for Wake Word.
4. Press Preferred Wake Word
5. Select a wake word.
BEGINNING A VOICE
INTERACTION
Say the selected wake word.
E142599
Press the voice interaction
button on the steering wheel.
VOICE INTERACTION
EXAMPLES
General Examples
ResultCommand
The system resets
the current voice
interaction.
Start Over.
The system ends
the current voice
interaction.
Cancel.
The system goes to
the next page.
Next Page.
The system goes to
the previous page.
Previous Page.
The system
displays a list of
available
commands you can
use on the current
screen.
Help.
Entertainment Examples
ResultCommand
The system plays
music by the
selected artist.
Play The Beatles.
The system shows
music by the
selected artist.
Show music by The
Beatles.
The system tunes
the radio to 101.9
FM.
Set the station to
101.9 FM.
The system tunes
the radio to Sirius
Channel 2.
Set the station to
Sirius Channel 2.
583
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Voice Interaction
Climate Examples
ResultCommand
The system
prompts you to
change the temper-
ature.
I am cold.
The system sets
the temperature to
72°F (22°C).
Set the temper-
ature to 72°F
(22°C).
Phone Examples
ResultCommand
The system calls
Henry using your
connected device.
Call Henry.
The system dials
the selected phone
number.
Dial (phone
number).
The system begins
a dictated text
message.
Send a text
message to Henry.
The system reads
you the most recent
message from
Henry.
Read my message
from Henry.
Apps Examples
ResultCommand
The system
prompts you to say
the name of an app
to start it on the
system.
Mobile Apps.
The system will list
all of the currently
available Mobile
Apps.
List Mobile Apps.
The system will
search and connect
to compatible app
running on your
mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
Navigation Examples
ResultCommand
The system begins
guided navigation
to the address.
Drive to 1 American
Road in Dearborn
Michigan.
The system shows
directions to the
selected POI.
Show me directions
to the Golden Gate
Bridge.
The system shows
directions to the
selected intersec-
tion.
Show me directions
to Oakwood
Boulevard and
Pelham Road.
The system ends
guided navigation
to the destination.
Cancel route.
584
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Voice Interaction
PHONE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
CONNECTING YOUR PHONE
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone
and switch Bluetooth on.
Select the phone option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Add Phone.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the PIN (personal
identification number) on your cell
phone matches the number on the
touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone.
4. Download the phonebook from your
cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting
at any time.
PHONE MENU
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls.
Contacts
Display a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to
alphabetically sort your contacts.
Favorites
Display the list of favorite contacts that
are set up on your phone.
Phone List
Display the list of paired or connected
devices that you can select.
Note: Up to 12 devices can be stored.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
585
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
MAKING AND RECEIVING A
PHONE CALL
Making Calls
To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number from your favorites,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
Favorites
To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing. The
system logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
586
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the
button on the
steering wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
Item
Mute You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to the touch-
screen.
Privacy
SENDING AND RECEIVING A TEXT MESSAGE
DescriptionMenu Item
Hear the text message.Hear It
View the text message.View
Call the sender.Call
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply
587
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
SWITCHING TEXT MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION ON AND OFF
iOS
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on or
off.
Android
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on or
off.
588
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH®
DEVICE
1. Make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your
device.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Connectivity.
4. Press Bluetooth.
5. Press Add a Bluetooth Device.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your device.
6. Select your vehicle on your device.
Note: A number appears on your device and
on the touchscreen.
7. Confirm that the number on your
device matches the number on the
touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your device.
PLAYING MEDIA USING
BLUETOOTH®
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Connect your device.
E100027
Press the audio button on the
feature bar.
Press Sources.
Press the Bluetooth option.
Press to play a track. Press again
to pause the track.
Press to skip to the next track.
Press and hold to fast forward
through the track.
Press once to return to the
beginning of a track. Repeatedly
press to return to previous
tracks.
Press and hold to fast rewind through the
track.
589
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Bluetooth®
APP PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
APP REQUIREMENTS
When you start an app through the system
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review
and change the permissions that you have
granted at any time when your vehicle is
not moving. We recommend that you
check your data plan before using your
apps through the system. Using them
could result in additional charges. We also
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and
privacy policy before using their app. Make
sure that you have an active account for
apps that you want to use through the
system. Some apps will work with no
setup. Others require you to configure
some personal settings before you can use
them.
ACCESSING APPS
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
ENABLING APPS ON AN IOS
DEVICE
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Mobile Apps Help.
2. Follow the instructions to pair and
connect your device via Bluetooth or
with a USB cable.
3. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use.
4. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Some apps may run through Apple
CarPlay if it is enabled.
Note: Closing an app on your device will
close it on the touchscreen.
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select
Mobile Apps List under Mobile Apps Help.
ENABLING APPS ON AN
ANDROID DEVICE
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Mobile Apps Help.
2. Follow the instructions to pair and
connect your device via Bluetooth or
with a USB cable.
3. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
enabled.
Note: Some apps may run through Android
Auto if it is enabled.
590
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Apps
Note: Closing an app on your device will
close it on the touchscreen.
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select
Mobile Apps List under Mobile Apps Help.
SWITCHING APPLE CARPLAY
ON AND OFF
Enabling Apple CarPlay with USB
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen.
Note: Selecting "Enable Wireless CarPlay"
on your device will prepare the device for
wireless carplay when you re-enter the
vehicle.
Enabling Apple CarPlay with
Wireless
1. Pair your device to Bluetooth.
2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen.
Disabling Apple CarPlay
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Disable.
Re-Enabling Apple CarPlay
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Connect to Apple CarPlay.
SWITCHING ANDROID AUTO
ON AND OFF
Enabling Android Auto with USB
(If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android
Auto.
Enabling Android Auto with
Wireless
1. Pair your device to Bluetooth.
2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen.
Note: Certain Android Devices do not
support Android Auto Wireless. Please
check your Android OS version for
compatibility.
Disabling Android Auto
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Disable.
Re-Enabling Android Auto
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Connect to Android Auto.
591
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Apps
HOW DO PERSONAL PROFILES
WORK
This feature allows you to create multiple
personal profiles enabling users to
personalize vehicle’s settings such as seats
and mirrors, as well as non-positional
settings like radio, navigation, driver assist
system settings. Positional settings are
saved by holding a memory seat button.
Non-positional settings are saved you
change a setting while a profile is active.
You can create one profile for each preset
memory seat button along with a guest
profile.
Recalling and Changing a Profile
You can recall a profile using the
touchscreen or the preset button you
selected when you created your profile.
You can also link a remote control and a
mobile device to your profile, which are
used to recall it.
ENABLING OR DISABLING
PERSONAL PROFILES
When you switch on the Personal Profiles
feature:
• Unlocking a door with a remote control
or mobile device that is not linked to a
driver profile does not change the
active profile, but remains in the last
known profile. It does not change the
positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile or saved to
a preset setting does not change the
active profile, but remains in the last
known profile. It does not change the
positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile but is saved
to a preset setting does not change the
active profile, but remains in the last
known profile. It recalls the positional
settings that you saved to that memory
seat button.
When you switch off a Personal Profiles
feature:
• Unlocking a door with a remote control
or mobile device does not recall any
non-positional settings but still recalls
positional settings from the driver
profile which the remote control or
mobile device is linked to.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile or saved to
a preset setting recalls non-positional
settings from the guest profile. It does
not change the positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
linked to a driver profile or has saved
to a preset setting recalls
non-positional settings from the guest
profile. It recalls the positional settings
that you saved to that memory seat
button.
592
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
CREATING A PERSONAL
PROFILE
Use the touchscreen to create a personal
profile.
1. Switch the vehicle on and leave the
vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button
under Settings.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
LINKING OR UNLINKING A
PERSONAL PROFILE TO A
REMOTE CONTROL
You can save preset memory positions for
up to three remote controls by assigning a
remote control to a personal profile using
the touchscreen.
Use the touchscreen to link a remote
control to a personal profile.
1. Switch the vehicle on and leave the
vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button
under Settings.
3. Touch the arrow for the profile you
wish to link to a remote control.
4. Select remote control.
5. Follow the instructions on the display.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control is in range, the memory function
moves to the settings of the first key to
initiate a memory recall.
Note: The guest profile consists of existing
settings when there is no driver profile
created. After you create a driver profile, the
guest profile serves as an additional driver
profile.
Note: You cannot link a remote control to
a guest profile.
593
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
ACCESSING NAVIGATION
Press the button to access
Navigation.
Note: As the driver, be aware of all local
traffic regulations and road attributes, and
operate your vehicle in a safe and legal
manner.
NAVIGATION MAP UPDATES
To update your Map data over Wi-Fi, your
vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
access point. For USB updates and other
details, contact dealers at
1-866-462-8837 in the United States and
Canada, or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico.
Note: If you find map data errors, you may
report them by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator.
ADJUSTING THE MAP
Zooming the Map In and Out
You can use pinch gestures to zoom in and
out. Place two fingers on the screen and
move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Changing the Format of the Map
E328845
Press the Menu button.
1. Press the Map Orientation tile.
2. Select a map orientation.
LIVE TRAFFIC
What Is Live Traffic
You can observe real-time road congestion
when live traffic is on.
Switching Live Traffic On and Off
E328845
Press the Menu button.
1. Press the Traffic on Map tile.
2. Press Traffic on or Traffic Off.
SETTING A DESTINATION
Setting a Destination Using the
Text Entry Screen
1. Press the search bar at the top of the
screen.
2. Enter your destination using the
keyboard.
3. Press Search.
4. Select a destination from the list.
5. Press Start to begin navigation.
Setting a Destination Using the
Map Screen
Press and hold on the map to place a pin
at that location. Information about the
location of the pin appears on the screen.
E328844
Press the button to begin
navigation to the pin.
594
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Navigation (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination Using a
Predictive Destination
Press the predicted destination card on
the screen to navigate to it. These appear
when the navigation system has learned
your driving habits.
Setting a Destination Using a
Recent Destination
E328845
Press the Menu button.
1. Press the Recents tile.
2. Select a destination from the list.
Setting a Destination Using
a Saved Destination
E328845
Press the Menu button.
1. Press Saved Places.
2. Select a saved destination.
Note: Press the star icon next when viewing
location details to save the location.
Setting a Destination Using a Point
of Interest
Press and hold on a point of interest icon
on the map. Information about the location
of the point of interest appears on the
screen.
E328844
Press the button to begin
navigation to the point of
interest.
WAYPOINTS
Adding a Waypoint
E328843
Press the Add Waypoint button
when in an active navigation
session.
1. Enter your waypoint on the keyboard.
2. Press Search.
3. Select a waypoint from the list.
4. Press Add to Trip.
Editing Waypoints
1. Press the waypoint you would like to
edit.
2. Select an option to redorder or delete
the waypoint.
ROUTE GUIDANCE
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Repeating an Instruction
Press the turn indicator to hear the last
voice instruction.
Canceling Route Guidance
E280804
Press the button to cancel route
guidance to the selected
location.
595
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Navigation (If Equipped)
TRAILER TOWING
NAVIGATION
When you have an active subscription and
Trailer Towing Navigation is switched on,
the system will calculate the best route for
trailer towing by avoiding dangerous road
conditions based on the dimensions of your
trailer.
Switching Trailer Towing
Navigation On and Off
1. Press the Navigation button on the
feature bar.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Press Trailer Routing.
4. Switch Trailer-optimized Routing on
or off.
Entering Trailer Dimensions
1. Press the Navigation button on the
feature bar.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Press Trailer Routing.
4. Press Towing Menu.
5. Press Add Trailer.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen
to enter the type and dimensions of the
trailer into the system.
Navigation Alerts
Alerts will appear on the navigation map
while driving. An orange alert triangle
indicates you should proceed with caution.
When not following active guidance to a
destination, a red alert triangle may appear
and indicates you should avoid the road
and find a detour.
596
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Navigation (If Equipped)
UPDATING THE VEHICLE
SYSTEMS WIRELESSLY
Over the Air Updates
E327789
System software updates allow
you to update your vehicle
system software wirelessly. To
make sure you receive all updates, set a
recurring schedule and connect to Wi-Fi.
Updates may take longer if not connected
to Wi-Fi, or may not download at all.
System Update Requirements
Before updating, reference this list to make
sure your vehicle is ready be updated. If
these requirements are not met during a
scheduled update, the update will be
canceled and you can reschedule.
• Your vehicle is not running.
• Your vehicle is stopped.
• Your vehicle is parked.
• The hazard indicators are switched off.
• The alarm is not sounding.
• The doors are closed.
• The parking lights are switched off.
• You are not pressing the brake pedal.
• An emergency call is not in progress.
• Your vehicle is not in limp mode.
Scheduling an Update
Make sure Vehicle Connectivity and
Automatic Updates are switched on.
Using the Settings Menu
E280315
Press the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press the System Update tile.
2. Press Schedule Update.
3. Use the controls to set the time and
day of the update.
4. Save the schedule.
Note: You can set the updates to occur
every seven days.
Using the Status Bar Icon
E327785
When an update is available, tap
the notification icon and follow
the prompts on the screen.
Applying a Vehicle System
Software Update
You can schedule a convenient time for
the update to complete. During scheduled
updates you may not be able to use your
vehicle.
Note: Updates may take up to 30 minutes
to complete.
You can see the progress of the update on
the touchscreen. An update cannot be
canceled once it has been started.
During an update you will not be able to
drive your vehicle, start the vehicle, use
remote controls to lock and unlock the
vehicle. The alarm, central locks, and door
tones are disabled. The electronic door
lock will not function during an update. You
can open the doors using the mechanical
latch if child locks are not on. Pull the
handle until it stops to use the mechanical
latch.
Note: Double locking is switched off and
central locking is switched on during and
after an update.
Note: If your vehicle is plugged in, charging
will stop during an update and resume when
the update is complete.
Viewing Update Details
If an update is successful, the touchscreen
will provide additional details about the
update. You can also access this
information under the System Update tile.
597
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle System Updates
If an update is not successful, follow the
prompt that appears on the touchscreen.
PERFORMING A MASTER
RESET
E280315
Press the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press the Reset tile.
2. Press Master Reset.
3. Follow the prompts on the screen to
complete the reset.
598
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle System Updates
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Ford Original
Accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Ford Licensed Accessories are the
accessory manufacturer's designs. The
manufacturer develops and therefore
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited
warranty details, and request a copy of the
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited
warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
599
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Accessories
WHAT IS FORD PROTECT
Protect yourself from the rising cost of
vehicle repairs with a Ford Protect
extended service plan.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans - United States Only
Ford Protect extended service plans mean
peace of mind. Extended service plans are
backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provide more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, insist on the Ford
Protect extended service plan.
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the service center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With the Ford
Protect extended service plan, you
minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it is probably easier to
list what is not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
First Day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we will give you a rental vehicle to
use for the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, warranty repairs, and field
service actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. This should
give you and your potential buyer peace of
mind.
600
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
The Ford Protect extended service plan
also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan
that covers all scheduled maintenance,
and selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) for electric
vehicles only.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment provides you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (Canada Only)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. Visit
your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect
extended service plan that is right for you.
601
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These
intervals serve two purposes: first is to
maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep the cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 528).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage not covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Our Genuine Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock our parts and our
authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and could
affect emissions compliance.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, a message
appears in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval
may be up to one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km), hybrid vehicles could exceed
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure to reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.
You can drive high performance vehicles
in such a way that may lead to higher oil
consumption including extended time at
high engine speeds, high loads, engine
braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track
and off-road usage. Under these
conditions, oil consumption of
approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter
per 800 km) is possible. Check the engine
oil level at every refueling and adjust to
maintain proper levels to avoid engine
damage.
602
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
It is important to rely upon your dealership
to properly diagnose and repair your
vehicle.
We strongly recommend only using our
genuine or our authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. Have discolored fluids that also
show signs of overheating or foreign
material contamination checked
immediately.
Make sure to change the vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using our approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections.
Check Every Month
The air filter restriction gauge.
1
The engine oil level.
Function of all interior and the exterior lights.
The tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
The windshield washer fluid level.
The fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
1
The holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
1
1
Diesel vehicles only.
603
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Six Months
The battery connections. Clean if necessary.
The body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
The cooling system fluid level and the coolant system strength.
The door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
The hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
The parking brake for proper operation.
The seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt for operation.
The washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
It is important to have the systems on your
vehicle regularly checked. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt or belts
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires including the spare for wear and
proper pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
604
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer.
2
If your vehicle has a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date
on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Oil Change Reminder
Your vehicle comes with an oil change
reminder that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and Example
Interval
1
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving.
No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing.
Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling.
Extended hot or cold operation.
605
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and Example
Interval
1
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing.
Extreme hot or cold operation.
1
Hybrid vehicles may achieve longer distances between oil changes, but do not exceed
the 1 year max oil change interval. Remaining oil life can be accessed through the
information display.
606
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level, if applicable with dipstick. Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine coolant system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate grease fittings if applicable.
3
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
4
Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
4
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary.
4
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
3
Four-wheel drive vehicles only.
4
Diesel vehicles only.
607
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every 3 Years
1
Perform this maintenance item every 3 years. Do not exceed the designated time for
the interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.
Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace the engine air filter.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
2
Replace the spark plugs.
3
Every 55,000 mi
(88,500 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
3
Every 60,000 mi
(96,600 km)
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
3
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
4
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
5
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Change the front axle fluid.
6
Change the rear axle fluid.
Change the transfer case fluid.
6
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Replace the fuel pump drive belt.
2
608
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the timing belt.
2
Change the engine coolant.
7
At 200,000 mi
(322,000 km)
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Diesel vehicles only.
3
Only for vehicles with pickup bed power outlet.
4
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
5
Non-hybrid vehicles only.
6
Four-wheel drive vehicles only.
7
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every five years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE - DIESEL
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the oil change
required message appearing in the
information display.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), for example, the oil
change reminder was reset at
25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-Top Carrier
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
See the axle maintenance
items under Exceptions.
609
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-Top Carrier
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion and freeze-point protection.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Frequent or Extended Idling - Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving or Frequent
Low-Speed Operation if you use your Vehicle for Stationary Operation
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion and freeze-point protection.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
610
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Frequent Low-Speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Long Rush-Hour Traffic
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion and freeze-point protection.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Sustained High-Speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating - Maximum Loaded Weight
for Vehicle Operation
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion and freeze-point protection.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
611
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions - Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure
the tread depth.
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km)
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary.
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km),
six months or 300 engine
hours
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), 6 months or
600 engine hours
Replace the air inlet foam filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1
Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
612
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-Road Operation
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Inspect functional holes in exhaust tip to make sure they
are clean and clear of debris or foreign materials. See
Vehicle Care (page 486). .
As required
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km),
six months or 300 engine
hours
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary.
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km)
or 300 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the air inlet foam filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1
Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
Using Biodiesel, Up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
300 engine hours
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
613
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case, four-wheel drive
vehicles, fluid changes or level checks are
not required unless a leak is suspected, or
the assembly has been submerged in
water. Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
For vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an oil
that meets our specification or has an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil, the normal oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
Diesel Particulate Filter
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
In this case, the engine control system sets
a service light, a wrench icon, to inform you
to bring your vehicle to the dealer for
service. If there are any issues with the
oxidation catalyst or particulate filter
system, the engine control system sets a
service light, a wrench or engine icon, to
inform you to bring your vehicle to the
dealer for service.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE - GASOLINE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the oil change
required message appearing in the
information display.
614
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), for example, the oil
change reminder was reset at
25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace the spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use,
such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
615
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions, such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Replace the engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the
tread depth.
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
1
Reset your oil change reminder after each engine oil and filter change. See Resetting
the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
Off-road Operation
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints and the U-joints.
Lubricate grease fittings, if applicable.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the engine air filter.
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and the measure
the tread depth.
1
Reset your oil change reminder after each engine oil and filter change. See Resetting
the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
Exclusive Use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change interval
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
616
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case, four-wheel drive
vehicles, fluid changes or level checks are
not required unless a leak is suspected or
the assembly has been submerged in
water. Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an oil
that meets our specification or has an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil, the normal oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
617
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ROLLOVER WARNING
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU AUTO LINE
PROGRAM - UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
618
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
THE MEDIATION AND
ARBITRATION PROGRAM -
CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
ORDERING A CANADIAN
FRENCH OWNER'S MANUAL
You can obtain a French owner's manual
from an authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, LLC at:
619
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
HELM, LLC
47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
For additional information, visit
www.helminc.com.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE UNITED STATES
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1-800-333-0510Phone
620
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1-800-565-3673Phone
621
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Blind Spot Information System
Argentina
E338548
South Korea
E338319
R-C-1Ap-F5TR
Ukraine
E338320
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2CF5TR
IC: 3432A-F5TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Body Control Module
Argentina
E338547
622
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
European Union EU
E310043
Taiwan
E338434
South Korea
E338433
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3NA2C766336
IC: 7812A-A2C766336
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Cruise Control Module
Argentina
E338549
623
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2CF3TR
IC: 3432A-F3TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2017-10-I-0000334
NR: 2018-07-I-000317
Pakistan
E339843
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER37535/15
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER49357/16
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: N5F-A08TAA
FCC ID: N5F-A08TDA
IC: 3248A-A08TAA
624
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Anti-Theft System
Argentina
E339818
Brazil
E339848
Djibouti
E339936
Ghana
NCA APPROVED: NCA/TA/16/22
Indonesia
E339937
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA – OUC11545917
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2013/235
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
625
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Malaysia
E339836
CIDF18000209
Mauritania
E339938
Moldova
E337971
Morocco
E339939
Pakistan
E339843
Paraguay
E339837
626
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Serbia
E269681
Singapore
E339940
South Africa
E269667
South Korea
E339675
MSIP-RRM-OAC-OUC11541917
Syria
SyTRA
REGISTERED No:
1510/4NK
Taiwan
E339847
627
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Ukraine
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER49115/16
DEALER No: DA37380/15
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: OUC11545917
IC: 850K-11545917
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vietnam
E278262
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Entry/Passive Start
Remote Control
European Union EU
E310043
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3N-A3C054338
628
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
FCC ID: M3N-A3C054339
IC: 7812A-A3C054338
IC: 7812A-A3C054339
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Key
Argentina
E339844
E339842
Brazil
E340120
Jamaica
E340215
629
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Pakistan
E337974
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2016-9-I-000223
Taiwan
E340216
E340217
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER47690/16
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER46754/16
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931423
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C931423
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
630
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Radio Transceiver Module
Argentina
E339077
Djibouti
E340642
E340643
Ghana
E340644
E340645
Morocco
E340648
South Africa
E340649
631
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E340647
E340218
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0082R
FCC ID: L2C0083TR
IC: 342A-0083TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Zambia
E340646
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC4
Argentina
E338546
632
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
European Union EU
E310043
Ghana
E338082
India
E338083
Jordan
E338084
Morocco
E338085
Oman
E338086
South Korea
E338087
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E338088
633
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4
IC: 1422A-SYNCG4
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC4 Low
Argentina
E338545
European Union EU
E310043
Ghana
E338203
India
E338083
Jordan
E338204
634
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Morocco
E338205
Oman
E338086
South Korea
E338206
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E338088
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4L
IC: 1422A-SYNCG4L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Telematics Control Unit
European Union EU
E310043
635
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: KMH-14H074-NA1
IC: 1422A-14H074NA1
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s) - FP3
Argentina
E338008
Brazil
E338010
Jamaica
E338213
Mexico
E338212
636
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Paraguay
E338214
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: MRXFP3
IC: 2546A-FP3
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s) - FP4
Argentina
E338009
China
E338011
637
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Djibouti
E338012
Ghana
E338016
Jordan
E338017
Mauritania
E337970
Moldova
E337971
Nigeria
E337972
638
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Oman
E337973
Pakistan
E337974
Paraguay
E338018
Serbia
E338019
South Korea
E338023
Ukraine
E338024
639
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates
E338025
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Garage Door Opener
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: NZLSAHL5D
IC: 4112A-SAHL5D
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Wireless Accessory Charging
Module
European Union EU
E310043
South Korea
E273475
640
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Taiwan
E338220
United States
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0066T
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
- UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
WARNING: Operating,
servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your
hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more
information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related
accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your
hands after handling.
641
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet
or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty.
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts.
For additional information, refer to the
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
642
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
643
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
644
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
645
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
646
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
647
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
648
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
649
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
650
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
651
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
652
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
653
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
654
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
655
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
656
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
657
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
658
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argen-
tina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
659
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
660
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
661
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
662
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
663
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Customer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
664
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
665
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
666
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
667
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
EMISSION LAW - UNITED
STATES OF AMERICA
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the
vehicle from the engine and exhaust
system heat and noise. On vehicles with
no original equipment floor covering
insulation, do not carry passengers in a
manner that permits prolonged skin
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
668
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
669
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
applicable local legislation and other
requirements. Installation of some
aftermarket electronic devices could
degrade the performance of vehicle
functions, which use radio frequency signals
such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
pressure monitoring system, push button
start, Bluetooth connectivity or satellite
navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following illustrations and table. We do not
provide any other special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
Car/SUV
E239120
670
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
671
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
672
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
3
360 Degree Camera...................................305
360 Degree Camera Settings.......................307
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines..........306
Keep Out Zone....................................................307
360 Degree Camera Limitations...........305
360 Degree Camera Precautions.........305
360 Degree Camera Settings.................307
Switching the 360 Degree Camera On and
Off.......................................................................307
Switching the 360 Degree Camera
View...................................................................307
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive....................................260
9
911 Assist...........................................................68
A
A/C
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
About This Publication..................................21
Features and Options..........................................21
Illustrations..............................................................21
Location of Components....................................21
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................273
Accessing Apps............................................590
Accessing Navigation.................................594
Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Position..........................................................216
Accessories....................................................599
Active Drive Assist........................................291
Active Drive Assist –
Troubleshooting............................................294
Active Drive Assist Alerts..........................292
Active Drive Assist Automatic
Cancellation...............................................293
Active Drive Assist Indicators..................293
Hands-On Driving Support Available.........293
Active Drive Assist Limitations...............292
Active Drive Assist Precautions...............291
Active Drive Assist Requirements..........292
Active Drive Assist Settings.....................292
Enabling Active Drive Assist..........................292
Active Drive Assist –
Troubleshooting........................................294
Active Drive Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................294
Active Park Assist........................................309
Active Park Assist – Troubleshooting..........311
Active Park Assist Precautions..............309
Active Park Assist –
Troubleshooting..........................................311
Active Park Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................311
Active Park Assist – Information
Messages...........................................................311
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................315
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting............................................325
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control.............324
Lane Centering....................................................322
Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic
Cancellation................................................318
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators........321
Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations...................................................316
Sensor Limitations.............................................316
Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions..................................................315
Hilly Condition Usage........................................315
When Following a Vehicle...............................315
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting........................................325
Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages.........................................................325
Adaptive Front Lighting..............................133
How Does Adaptive Front Lighting
Work....................................................................133
Switching Adaptive Front Lighting On and
Off........................................................................134
Adjustable Pedals.........................................119
Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors..................140
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................473
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................474
673
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................473
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
Brightness....................................................136
Adjusting the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller Mode.......................................406
Selecting the Trailer Brake Effort.................407
Selecting the Trailer Brake Type..................407
Adjusting the Map.......................................594
Changing the Format of the Map................594
Zooming the Map In and Out.......................594
Adjusting the Pedals....................................119
Adjusting the Seatbelt Height...................52
Adjusting the Seatbelt Length..................53
Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy......................................................52
Adjusting the Sound Settings..................571
Balance and Fade...............................................571
Occupancy Mode................................................571
Sound Mode..........................................................571
Speed Compensated Volume........................571
Tone Settings........................................................571
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................117
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................117
Adjusting the Volume.................................570
Aid Mode.........................................................335
How Does Aid Mode Work.............................335
What Is Aid Mode..............................................335
Airbag Precautions........................................60
Airbags...............................................................58
Front Passenger Sensing System..................62
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™.........554
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.0L Diesel....................555
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.3L..................................556
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................558
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™.........557
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L.................................559
Alert and Aid Mode.....................................335
How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work..........336
What Is Alert and Aid Mode...........................335
Alert Mode......................................................334
Adjusting the Steering Wheel Vibration
Intensity............................................................335
How Does Alert Mode Work..........................335
What Is Alert Mode...........................................334
AM/FM Radio.................................................572
AM/FM Radio Limitations...............................572
Selecting a Radio Station...............................572
Ambient Lighting..........................................136
Adjusting Ambient Lighting............................136
Switching Ambient Lighting On and
Off.......................................................................136
Anti-Lock Braking System........................273
Anti-Lock Braking System
Limitations.......................................................273
Anti-Theft Alarm System............................111
Arming the Anti-Theft Alarm System..........112
Disarming the Anti-Theft Alarm
System................................................................112
How Does the Anti-Theft Alarm System
Work......................................................................111
What Are the Inclination Sensors...................111
What Are the Interior Sensors..........................111
What Is the Anti-Theft Alarm System..........111
What Is the Battery Backup Alarm.................111
What Is the Perimeter Alarm............................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings.........112
Setting the Alarm Security Level...................112
Switching Ask on Exit On and Off..................112
What are the Alarm Security Levels.............112
What Is Ask on Exit..............................................112
Appendices....................................................670
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake..............................................................276
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency...................................................276
App Precautions..........................................590
App Requirements.....................................590
Apps.................................................................590
Audio System................................................570
AM/FM Radio.......................................................572
674
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Audio System – Troubleshooting.................577
Digital Radio.........................................................573
Satellite Radio.....................................................574
Audio System Precautions.......................570
Audio System – Troubleshooting...........577
Audio System – Information
Messages..........................................................577
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror..................141
What Is the Auto-Dimming Exterior
Mirror...................................................................141
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror..................139
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Limitations.......................................................139
What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior
Mirror..................................................................139
Auto Hold........................................................283
Auto Hold Indicators...................................283
Autolamps.......................................................125
Autolamp Settings.............................................125
What Are Autolamps.........................................125
Autolock............................................................85
Autolock Requirements.....................................85
Switching Autolock On and Off......................85
What Is Autolock..................................................85
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake..............................................276
Automatic Crash Shutoff.........................440
Automatic Crash Shutoff
Precautions....................................................440
Re-Enabling Your Vehicle..............................440
What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff..............440
Automatic Emergency Braking................351
Switching Automatic Emergency Braking
On and Off.......................................................352
What Is Automatic Emergency
Braking...............................................................351
Automatic Engine Stop..............................215
How Does Automatic Engine Stop
Work....................................................................215
Overriding Automatic Engine Stop..............216
Switching Automatic Engine Stop On and
Off........................................................................215
What Is Automatic Engine Stop....................215
Automatic High Beam Control................128
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators..........................................................130
Automatic High Beam Control
Limitations.......................................................129
Automatic High Beam Control
Precautions......................................................129
Automatic High Beam Control
Requirements..................................................129
How Does Automatic High Beam Control
Work....................................................................128
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control...............................................................130
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off.......................................................130
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting.........................................130
Automatic High Beam Control –
Information Messages.................................130
Automatic Locking Mode.............................51
Disengaging Automatic Locking Mode........52
Engaging Automatic Locking Mode...............51
What Is Automatic Locking Mode...................51
When to Use Automatic Locking Mode........51
Automatic Return to Park (P).................256
Automatic Return to Park (P)
Limitations......................................................256
How Does Automatic Return to Park (P)
Work..................................................................256
What Is Automatic Return to Park
(P)......................................................................256
Automatic Transmission...........................253
Automatic Return to Park (P).......................256
Automatic Transmission Positions.............253
Manually Shifting Gears..................................254
Manual Park Release........................................257
Temporary Neutral Mode...............................255
Automatic Transmission Positions.......253
Drive (D)................................................................253
Manual (M)..........................................................254
Neutral (N)...........................................................253
Park (P).................................................................253
Reverse (R) .........................................................253
Automatic Transmission
Precautions.................................................253
Auto Mode......................................................160
Auto Mode Indicators.......................................160
Switching Auto Mode On and Off...............160
Switching Dual Mode On and Off ................161
Auto-Start-Stop...........................................224
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting...........225
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators......................224
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions.................224
675
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Auto-Start-Stop –
Troubleshooting........................................225
Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................226
Auto-Start-Stop – Information
Messages.........................................................225
Autounlock.......................................................85
Autounlock Requirements................................85
Switching Autounlock On and Off................85
What Is Autounlock.............................................85
Autowipers......................................................120
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Rain
Sensor................................................................120
Autowipers Settings..........................................120
What Are Autowipers........................................120
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.......................471
Bed Extender...................................................93
Bed Extender Precautions................................93
Using the Bed Extender.....................................93
Beginning a Voice Interaction.................583
Blind Spot Information System.............340
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting............................................343
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage...........................................................341
Blind Spot Information System
Indicators.....................................................343
Blind Spot Information System
Limitations..................................................340
Blind Spot Information System
Precautions................................................340
Blind Spot Information System
Requirements............................................340
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting........................................343
Blind Spot Information System –
Information Messages................................343
Blind Spot Information System With
Trailer Coverage..........................................341
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage Limitations...................................341
Selecting a Trailer..............................................342
Setting a Trailer Length...................................342
What Is Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Coverage..............................................341
Bluetooth®....................................................589
Body Control Module Fuse Box...............451
Accessing the Body Control Module Fuse
Box......................................................................451
Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control
Module Fuse Box...........................................451
Locating the Body Control Module Fuse
Box......................................................................451
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........455
Booster Seats..................................................46
Types of Booster Seats......................................46
Brake Fluid Specification...........................274
Brake Over Accelerator..............................273
Brake Precautions........................................273
Brakes...............................................................273
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................273
Brakes – Troubleshooting...............................274
Brakes – Troubleshooting.........................274
Brakes – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................274
Brakes – Warning Lamps................................274
Breaking-In....................................................430
Brakes and Clutch.............................................430
Tires........................................................................430
C
Calculating Payload....................................363
Calculating the Load Limit.......................363
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity..................................................364
California Proposition 65 - United States
of America....................................................641
Canceling the Set Speed...........................314
Capacities and Specifications................524
Catalytic Converter......................................251
Catalytic Converter –
Troubleshooting.............................................251
Catalytic Converter Precautions.............251
Catalytic Converter –
Troubleshooting.........................................251
Catalytic Converter – Warning
Lamps................................................................251
676
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Center Console Work Surface................200
Center Console Work Surface –
Troubleshooting............................................202
Center Console Work Surface –
Troubleshooting........................................202
Center Console Work Surface – Information
Messages.........................................................202
Changing a Flat Tire....................................516
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................516
Jacking the Vehicle...........................................520
Removing the Spare Tire.................................519
Removing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag......................................................................518
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire.......................521
Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag......................................................................522
Tire Change Procedure.....................................517
Changing a Road Wheel............................516
Changing the 12V Battery..........................471
Remove and Reinstall the Battery...............472
Changing the Fuel Filter - Diesel.............471
Changing the Fuel Filter - Gasoline........471
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Flip Key...............................73
Battery Replacement Procedure....................73
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start..........72
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password..................................569
Charging a Device.........................................187
Charging a Wireless Device.....................203
Checking MyKey System Status..............80
Checking the Brake Fluid...........................273
Checking the Coolant................................463
Adding Coolant..................................................464
Coolant Change.................................................465
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management.................................................466
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................465
Severe Climates.................................................465
Checking the Seatbelts................................55
Checking the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Status.....................249
Checking the Tire Pressures....................505
Checking the Wiper Blades........................121
Children and Airbags.....................................61
Child Restraint Anchor Points...................36
Locating the Child Restraint Lower Anchor
Points...................................................................36
Locating the Child Restraint Top Tether
Anchor Points....................................................37
What Are the Child Restraint Anchor
Points...................................................................36
Child Restraints...............................................38
Child Restraint Position Information............38
Child Restraints Recommendation...............39
Child Safety......................................................35
Child Restraint Anchor Points.........................36
Child Restraints.....................................................38
Installing Child Restraints.................................39
Child Safety Locks.........................................48
Left-Hand Side.....................................................48
Right-Hand Side..................................................48
Child Safety Precautions.............................35
Cleaning Products......................................486
Materials...............................................................486
Cleaning the Exterior.................................486
Cleaning Camera Lenses and
Sensors............................................................488
Cleaning Chrome, Aluminium or Stainless
Steel...................................................................487
Cleaning Headlamps and Rear
Lamps...............................................................486
Cleaning Stripes or Graphics........................488
Cleaning the Engine Compartment............487
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions..............486
Cleaning the Underbody................................488
Cleaning Wheels................................................487
Cleaning Windows and Wiper
Blades...............................................................487
Cleaning the Interior..................................488
Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats...............490
Cleaning Displays and Screens...................489
Cleaning Moonroof Tracks............................490
Cleaning Plastic.................................................488
Cleaning Seatbelts...........................................490
Cleaning Seats and the Headliner..............489
Cleaning the Instrument Panel....................488
Clearing All MyKeys......................................80
Clearing the Garage Door Opener..........185
Climate Control.............................................158
Auto Mode............................................................160
677
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Climate Control Hints..................................161
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather..............................................................161
General Hints........................................................161
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................161
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................161
Recommended Settings for Cooling............161
Recommended Settings for Heating...........161
Closing the Tailgate......................................96
Closing the Tailgate From Inside Your
Vehicle.................................................................96
Closing the Tailgate From Outside Your
Vehicle.................................................................96
Closing the Tailgate Using the Remote
Control.................................................................97
Cold Weather Precautions.......................430
Connected Vehicle......................................565
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting...........................................566
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network............................................................565
Connected Vehicle Data..............................28
Connected Vehicle Limitations..............565
Connected Vehicle Requirements........565
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting.......................................566
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................566
Connecting a Bluetooth® Device.........589
Connecting a Trailer....................................372
Connecting a Trailer –
Troubleshooting.............................................374
Electronic Park Hold..........................................373
Hitches....................................................................371
Recognizing a Trailer.........................................372
Safety Chains.......................................................372
Trailer Brakes.......................................................373
Trailer Connection Alarm................................373
Trailer Connection Checklist..........................373
Trailer Light Check.............................................373
Connecting a Trailer Precautions............371
Connecting a Trailer –
Troubleshooting........................................374
Connecting a Trailer – Information
Messages..........................................................374
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network........................................................565
Connecting FordPass to the Modem.........565
Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........565
What Is the Modem..........................................565
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network........................................................565
Connecting Your Phone............................585
Contacting Us...................................................19
Argentina..................................................................19
Asia Pacific..............................................................19
Australia...................................................................19
Brazil..........................................................................19
Canada......................................................................19
Caribbean, Central America and Israel.........19
Europe.......................................................................19
Ford Credit - US Only..........................................20
Middle East.............................................................20
New Zealand...........................................................19
North Africa ............................................................19
Puerto Rico.............................................................20
South Korea...........................................................20
Sub-Saharan Africa ............................................19
U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico................19
United States..........................................................19
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™..........547
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.0L Diesel....................548
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.3L..................................548
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................550
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™.........549
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L.................................550
Crash and Breakdown
Information.................................................436
Automatic Crash Shutoff...............................440
Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................438
Post-Crash Alert System...............................440
Recovery Towing...............................................440
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......65
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Flip
Key....................................................................80
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start...................................................79
Creating a Personal Profile......................593
678
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........569
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot............................................................569
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Password.........................................................569
Cross Traffic Alert........................................344
Cross Traffic Alert –
Troubleshooting............................................346
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage..........................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators...................345
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations................344
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions..............344
Cross Traffic Alert –
Troubleshooting........................................346
Cross Traffic Alert – Information
Messages.........................................................346
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage......................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer Coverage
Limitations......................................................345
What Is Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage..........................................................345
Cruise Control................................................313
Cruise Control Indicators...........................314
Cup Holders...................................................205
Cup Holder Precautions..................................205
Customer Information................................618
Customizing the Instrument Cluster
Display...........................................................153
Adding Screens Using MyView......................153
Adding Screens Using Select
Screens..............................................................153
Configuring Gauges............................................153
D
Data Privacy.....................................................26
Services That Third Parties Provide..............26
Services That We Provide.................................26
Department of Transportation Uniform
Tire Quality Grades..................................494
Temperature A B C............................................495
Traction AA A B C..............................................495
Treadwear............................................................494
Deploying and Stowing the Power
Running Boards...........................................116
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification..............................................249
Diesel Particulate Filter.............................240
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration...................................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter –
Troubleshooting............................................243
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration...............................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Limitations...........................242
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Precautions..........................241
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Requirements......................241
Starting Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration..................................................242
What Is Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration ..................................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter
Precautions................................................240
Diesel Particulate Filter
Requirements..............................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter –
Troubleshooting........................................243
Diesel Particulate Filter – Information
Messages.........................................................243
Diesel Particulate Filter – Warning
Lamps...............................................................243
Digital Radio...................................................573
Digital Radio Indicators....................................574
Digital Radio Limitations.................................573
How Does Digital Radio Work.......................573
Switching Digital Radio Reception On and
Off.......................................................................573
What Is Digital Radio........................................573
Directing the Flow of Air............................160
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents..................................................................160
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air
Vents..................................................................160
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents..................................................................160
Disposing of Airbags.....................................66
Distance Alert.................................................351
Adjusting the Sensitivity of Distance
Alert.....................................................................351
What Is Distance Alert......................................351
679
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Distance Indication.....................................350
Distance Indication Indicator.........................351
Switching Distance Indication On and
Off........................................................................351
What Is Distance Indication..........................350
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings........86
Door Ajar Audible Warning...............................86
Doors and Locks.............................................84
Autolock..................................................................85
Autounlock.............................................................85
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting.............86
Mislock.....................................................................85
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle.................................................................84
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle.................................................................84
Doors and Locks –
Troubleshooting..........................................86
Doors and Locks – Information
Messages...........................................................86
Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps..............86
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap -
Diesel.............................................................470
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators..........483
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator.........483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.0L Diesel.............483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.3L...........................484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators..........484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator.........484
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Dual Generators........................................485
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Single Generator.......................................485
Drive Mode Control.....................................328
Drive Mode Control –
Troubleshooting.............................................331
Drive Modes.........................................................329
Drive Mode Control –
Troubleshooting.........................................331
Drive Mode Control – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................332
Drive Mode Control – Information
Messages..........................................................331
Drive Mode Control – Warning
Lamps................................................................331
Drive Modes...................................................329
Deep Snow/Sand..............................................329
Eco...........................................................................329
Mud/Ruts..............................................................329
Normal...................................................................329
Rock Crawl...........................................................329
Slippery.................................................................330
Sport......................................................................330
Tow/Haul...............................................................331
Trail...........................................................................331
Driver Alert......................................................355
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting.....................356
Driver Alert Limitations..............................355
Driver Alert Precautions............................355
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting...............356
Driver Alert – Information Messages.........356
Driving Economically.................................430
Driving Hints..................................................428
Off-Road Driving................................................428
E
Easy Entry and Exit.......................................90
Electric Parking Brake Audible
Warning.........................................................277
Electric Parking Brake.................................276
Electric Parking Brake –
Troubleshooting.............................................277
Electric Parking Brake –
Troubleshooting.........................................277
Electric Parking Brake – Information
Messages.........................................................278
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps................................................................277
Electric Power Steering.............................295
Electric Power Steering Adaptive
Steering............................................................295
Electric Power Steering Precautions..........295
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............670
Electronic Locking Differential...............269
Electronic Locking Differential –
Troubleshooting.............................................272
Electronic Locking Differential
Indicators......................................................272
680
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Electronic Locking Differential
Precautions.................................................269
Operating the Electronic Locking
Differential with a Spare or Mismatched
Tires...................................................................269
Electronic Locking Differential –
Troubleshooting.........................................272
Electronic Locking Differential –
Information Messages.................................272
Emergency Call Limitations.......................69
Emergency Call Requirements.................68
Emergency Call System Data....................29
Emergency Towing.....................................445
Emission Law - United States of
America.......................................................668
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and
Maintenance..................................................669
Tampering With a Noise Control
System.............................................................668
Enabling Apps on an Android
Device...........................................................590
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device...........590
Enabling or Disabling Personal
Profiles..........................................................592
Enabling Remote Start...............................155
End User License Agreement.................643
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................643
Engine Air Filter.............................................467
Changing the Engine Air Filter......................468
Checking the Engine Air Filter Restriction
Gauge................................................................467
Engine Air Filter - Information
Messages.........................................................470
Engine Block Heater.....................................213
Engine Block Heater Precautions.................213
How Does the Engine Block Heater
Work....................................................................214
Using the Engine Block Heater......................214
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
2.7L EcoBoost™........................................536
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................537
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.0L Diesel...................................................537
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel Fuel
Blends (B20 Max)........................................539
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................539
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe Duty
Service..............................................................539
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.3L................................................................539
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................540
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L, Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)............................................................543
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................544
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L Ecoboost™........................................541
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................542
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
5.0L................................................................545
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................546
Engine Oil.......................................................462
Adding Engine Oil..............................................462
Checking the Engine Oil Level......................462
Engine Oil Capacity and
Specification..................................................463
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview........................462
Resetting the Engine Oil Change
Reminder.........................................................463
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................524
Engine Specifications - 3.0L
Diesel.............................................................525
Engine Specifications - 3.3L....................526
Engine Specifications - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................528
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................527
Engine Specifications - 5.0L...................529
Entering a Parallel Parking Space........309
Entering a Perpendicular Parking
Space.............................................................310
Evasive Steering Assist..............................352
Evasive Steering Assist Limitations............352
Switching Evasive Steering Assist On and
Off.......................................................................352
What Is Evasive Steering Assist....................352
681
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Event Data.........................................................27
Active Drive Assist Driver Facing Camera
Data......................................................................28
Exiting a Parking Space.............................310
Export Unique Options.............................669
Extending the Exterior Mirrors..................141
Power Telescoping Mirrors...............................141
Extending the Remote Start
Duration........................................................156
Exterior Bulbs................................................474
Changing a Front Fog Lamp Bulb...............480
Changing a Front Side Marker Lamp
Bulb....................................................................479
Changing a Front Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb....................................................................478
Changing a Headlamp Bulb...........................476
Changing a High Mounted Stoplamp
Bulb....................................................................482
Changing a License Plate Lamp Bulb........482
Changing a Rear Lamp Bulb.........................480
Changing a Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb....................................................................481
Changing a Reversing Lamp Bulb...............482
Changing a Stoplamp Bulb............................481
Exterior Bulb Specification Chart................474
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly..............476
Exterior Lamps...............................................125
Exterior Lamp Audible Warning.....................127
Exterior Lamp Indicators..................................127
How Do Cornering Lamps Work....................125
Switching the Cargo Lamps On.....................127
Switching the Daytime Running Lamps On
and Off...............................................................126
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On and
Off........................................................................126
Switching the Spot Lamps On and
Off........................................................................127
Switching the Turn Signal Lamps On and
Off........................................................................125
Exterior Lighting Control............................124
Exterior Lighting............................................124
Adaptive Front Lighting....................................133
Autolamps.............................................................125
Automatic High Beam Control......................128
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting.............................................130
Exterior Lamps.....................................................125
Exterior Zone Lighting........................................127
Glare Free Lighting..............................................131
Glare Free Lighting –
Troubleshooting.............................................133
Headlamps............................................................124
Headlamps – Troubleshooting......................124
Exterior Mirrors..............................................140
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror.........................141
Exterior Zone Lighting..................................127
Exterior Zone Lighting Settings.....................128
Using the Exterior Zone Lighting...................127
What Is Exterior Zone Lighting.......................127
F
Fastening and Unfastening the
Seatbelts........................................................50
Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................50
Using the Seatbelt With Cinch Tongue
...............................................................................50
Feature Bar....................................................582
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank................................................247
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank in Cold Weather..................247
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank Using a Fuel Station
Pump..................................................................247
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank Using a Portable
Container.........................................................248
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Flat Tire.................................516
Floor Mats........................................................431
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Manual Folding Mirrors...............140
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Power Folding Mirrors..................140
Switching Auto-fold On and Off....................141
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals................................119
Ford Protect..................................................600
Four-Wheel Drive Driving Hints..............264
Driving In Sand....................................................265
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain................265
Driving on Snow and Ice.................................266
Driving Through Mud and Water..................265
Emergency Maneuvers....................................264
682
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Four-Wheel Drive........................................260
Four-Wheel Drive Driving Hints....................264
Four-Wheel Drive Modes................................263
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting........266
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators...................264
Four-wheel Drive Auto....................................264
Four-wheel Drive High.....................................264
Four-wheel Drive Low......................................264
Two-wheel Drive High.....................................264
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations..................261
Mechanical Shift Blocking..............................262
Operating Four-Wheel Drive with a Spare
or Mismatched tires......................................261
Four-Wheel Drive Modes..........................263
Four-Wheel Drive Auto....................................263
Four-Wheel Drive High....................................264
Four-Wheel Drive Low.....................................264
Two-Wheel Drive High.....................................263
Four-Wheel Drive Precautions...............260
Four-Wheel Drive –
Troubleshooting........................................266
Four-Wheel Drive – Information
Messages..........................................................267
Four-Wheel Drive – Warning Lamps.........266
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification..............................................562
Front Exterior...................................................33
Front Parking Aid.........................................298
Front Parking Aid Audible Warnings..........299
Front Parking Aid Limitations.......................298
Locating the Front Parking Aid
Sensors.............................................................299
What is the Front Parking Aid.......................298
Front Passenger Sensing System............62
Front Passenger Sensing System
Indicators...........................................................64
Front Passenger Sensing System
Precautions.......................................................64
How Does the Front Passenger Sensing
System Work.....................................................62
What Is the Front Passenger Sensing
System................................................................62
Front Seat Precautions...............................167
Front Seats......................................................167
Heated Seats........................................................174
Manual Seats.......................................................168
Massage Seats.....................................................173
Power Seats..........................................................170
Ventilated Seats..................................................174
Fuel and Refueling.......................................227
Fuel and Refueling –
Troubleshooting............................................239
Fuel Quality..........................................................227
Refueling...............................................................233
Running Out of Fuel..........................................232
Fuel and Refueling Precautions..............227
Fuel and Refueling –
Troubleshooting........................................239
Fuel and Refueling – Information
Messages.........................................................239
Fuel and Refueling – Warning
Lamps...............................................................239
Fuel Gauge......................................................146
Fuel Gauge Limitations.....................................147
Locating the Fuel Filler Door...........................147
What Is Distance to Empty..............................147
What Is the Fuel Gauge....................................146
What Is the Low Fuel Reminder....................147
Fuel Quality....................................................227
Selecting the Correct Fuel..............................227
Selecting the Correct Fuel for Cold
Weather............................................................229
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline............................................................232
Fuel Tank Capacity - Diesel.....................552
Fuel Tank Capacity - Excluding: Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................238
Advertised Capacity.........................................238
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)...............551
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................553
Fuel Tank Capacity - Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................239
Advertised Capacity.........................................239
Fuse Precautions.........................................446
Fuses................................................................446
Body Control Module Fuse Box.....................451
Fuses – Troubleshooting................................454
Under Hood Fuse Box.....................................446
Fuses – Troubleshooting..........................454
Fuses – Frequently Asked Questions........454
G
Garage Door Opener...................................182
683
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Garage Door Opener Limitations...........183
Garage Door Opener Precautions..........182
Garage Door Opener Radio
Frequencies.................................................185
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance.....................................................185
General Maintenance Information.......602
Multi-Point Inspection....................................604
Owner Checks and Services.........................603
Protecting Your Investment..........................602
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................602
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................602
Glare Free Lighting........................................131
Glare Free Lighting Indicators........................132
Glare Free Lighting Limitations......................132
Glare Free Lighting Precautions.....................131
Glare Free Lighting Requirements.................131
How Does Glare Free Lighting Work.............131
Overriding Glare Free Lighting........................132
Switching Glare Free Lighting On and
Off........................................................................132
Glare Free Lighting –
Troubleshooting.........................................133
Glare Free Lighting – Information
Messages..........................................................133
Glasses Holder.............................................208
Locating the Glasses Holder.........................208
Glossary of Tire Terminology..................500
Glove Compartment..................................205
Locking the Glove Compartment................205
Opening the Glove Compartment..............205
H
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................473
Headlamps......................................................124
Headlamp Indicators.........................................124
Using the High Beam Headlamps................124
Headlamps – Troubleshooting...............124
Headlamps – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................124
Heated Seats..................................................174
Heated Seat Precautions.................................174
Switching the Heated Seats On and
Off........................................................................174
Heating
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
High Voltage Battery...................................252
High Voltage Battery Precautions.........252
High Voltage Battery Vehicle
Precautions - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV).............................................................437
Crashes..................................................................437
Fires.........................................................................437
Post-Incident......................................................438
Hill Descent Control...................................289
Hill Descent Control –
Troubleshooting............................................290
Hill Descent Control Indicator................289
Hill Descent Control Precautions..........289
Hill Descent Control –
Troubleshooting.......................................290
Hill Descent Control – Information
Messages.........................................................290
Hill Start Assist.............................................282
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting.............282
Hill Start Assist Precautions....................282
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting.......282
Hill Start Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................282
Hitches..............................................................371
Hooking Up a Trailer Using a
Weight-Distributing Hitch...........................371
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........455
Horn....................................................................118
How Does 911 Assist Work.........................68
How Does Active Drive Assist
Work...............................................................291
How Does Active Park Assist
Work..............................................................309
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work.....................................315
How Does a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Work................................................................221
....................................................................................221
How Does Auto Hold Work......................283
How Does Blind Spot Information
System Work..............................................340
684
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
How Does Cross Traffic Alert
Work..............................................................344
How Does Drive Mode Control
Work..............................................................328
How Does Driver Alert Work....................355
How Does Easy Entry and Exit
Work................................................................90
How Does Four-Wheel Drive
Work..............................................................260
Using the 2-Speed Automatic Four-Wheel
Drive System..................................................260
Using the Electronic Shift On the Fly
System.............................................................260
How Does Hill Descent Control
Work..............................................................289
How Does Hill Start Assist Work...........282
How Does Pre-Collision Assist
Work...............................................................347
How Does Reverse Braking Assist
Work...............................................................279
How Does Speed Sign Recognition
Work...............................................................357
How Does Stability Control Work.........286
Electronic Stability Control............................286
How Does the 360 Degree Camera
Work..............................................................305
How Does the Diesel Particulate Filter
Work..............................................................240
Active Regeneration.........................................240
Passive Regeneration......................................240
How Does the Garage Door Opener
Work...............................................................182
How Does the Lane Keeping System
Work...............................................................333
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work..................................................................57
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
System Work...............................................179
How Does the Safety Canopy™
Work.................................................................59
How Does the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Work........................245
How Does the Trailer Reversing Aid
Work...............................................................410
How Does Traction Control Work.........284
How Does Trailer Sway Control
Work..............................................................409
How Do Personal Profiles Work.............592
Recalling and Changing a Profile.................592
How Do the Front Airbags Work...............58
How Do the Knee Airbags Work...............59
How Do the Side Airbags Work................58
Hybrid Display Information.......................154
How Does EV Coach Work..............................154
What Is EV Coach...............................................154
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Driving
Characteristics............................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information.......221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Troubleshooting.............................................222
Low Engine Use Mode.......................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information
Indicators......................................................222
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Troubleshooting........................................222
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Frequently Asked Questions.....................222
I
Identifying Fuse Types...............................454
Identifying the Audio Unit........................580
Identifying the Climate Control
Unit.................................................................158
Ignition Switch.............................................209
Starting the Engine............................................210
Switching the Ignition Off..............................209
Switching the Ignition On...............................209
Switching the Ignition to Accessory
Mode.................................................................209
Inflating the Tires........................................505
Information and Entertainment Display
Limitations...................................................581
Speed-restricted Features..............................581
Information and Entertainment Display
Overview.......................................................581
Information and Entertainment Display
Precautions..................................................581
Information On Demand Screen -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen...........582
Information on the Tire Sidewall..........495
Information on P Type Tires..........................496
Inspecting the Tire for Damage.............506
Safety Practices.................................................506
Inspecting the Tire for Wear...................506
685
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Inspecting the Wheel Valve
Stems............................................................507
Installing Child Restraints...........................39
Attaching the Front Seat Tether
Strap....................................................................44
Attaching the Rear Seat Tether Strap..........45
Combining the Seatbelt and Lower Anchors
for Attaching Child Restraints....................44
Installing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat......................................................................43
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children...............................................................43
Using Seatbelts.....................................................39
Using Tether Straps.............................................44
Instrument Cluster Display........................151
Hybrid Display Information.............................154
Personalized Settings.......................................153
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen................................................................152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen..............................153
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen............152
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch Screen...............151
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 8 Inch Screen.................152
Instrument Cluster Indicators..................149
Active Drive Assist..............................................149
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................149
Auto Hold Active.................................................149
Auto Hold Unavailable.....................................149
Automatic High Beam......................................149
Automatic Regen Control Off........................149
Auto-Start-Stop.................................................149
Blind Spot Monitor.............................................150
Cruise Control......................................................150
Electronic Locking Differential......................150
Four-Wheel Drive...............................................150
Front Airbag..........................................................150
Front Fog Lamp..................................................150
High Beam............................................................150
Hill Descent..........................................................150
Lamps On..............................................................150
Ready to Drive......................................................150
Reverse Brake Assist.........................................150
Stability Control and Traction
Control...............................................................150
Tow Haul................................................................150
Turn Signal Lamps.............................................150
Wait to Start.........................................................150
Instrument Cluster.......................................144
Fuel Gauge............................................................146
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 12.3 Inch Screen..............................146
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 4.2 Inch Screen...............................144
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 8 Inch Screen...................................145
Instrument Cluster Warning
Lamps............................................................148
Anti-Lock Brake System..................................148
Battery....................................................................148
Brake System.......................................................148
Diesel Exhaust Fluid..........................................148
Door Ajar................................................................148
Electric Parking Brake.......................................148
Engine Coolant Temperature.........................148
Fasten Seatbelt...................................................148
Hood Ajar...............................................................148
Low Fuel Level.....................................................148
Low Tire Pressure...............................................148
Low Washer Fluid Level...................................148
Oil Pressure...........................................................149
Powertrain Malfunction, Reduced Power,
Electronic Throttle Control, Check
4X4.....................................................................149
Service Engine Soon..........................................149
Stop Safely...........................................................149
Tailgate Ajar..........................................................149
Water in Fuel........................................................149
Instrument Panel.............................................31
Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller....................................................405
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting............................................407
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
Precautions................................................405
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting........................................407
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Frequently Asked Questions...................408
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Information Messages................................407
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control.......324
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance............325
686
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
How Does Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Control Work...................................................324
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Alerts..................................................................325
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators.........................................................325
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations.......................................................324
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions.....................................................324
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Requirements.................................................324
Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Off.......................................................................325
Interior Air Quality........................................166
Interior Bulbs.................................................483
Interior Bulb Specification Chart.................483
Interior Lamp Function...............................135
Switching the Interior Lamp Function On
and Off...............................................................135
What Is the Interior Lamp Function.............135
Interior Lighting.............................................135
Ambient Lighting................................................136
Interior Lamp Function.....................................135
Interior Mirror..................................................139
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror.........................139
Interior Mirror Precautions........................139
Introduction.......................................................21
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................438
Jump Starting Precautions............................438
Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................439
Preparing the Vehicle.......................................438
K
Keyless Entry....................................................87
Keyless Entry Settings........................................87
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting...................89
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Keyless Entry Keypad....................................89
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Remote Keyless Entry...................................88
Master Access Code............................................87
Keyless Entry Limitations............................87
Keyless Entry Settings..................................87
Clearing All Personal Access Codes.............88
Creating Personal Access Codes...................88
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function..............................................................87
Switching Keyless Entry On and Off.............87
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting.............89
Keyless Entry – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................89
Keys and Remote Controls.........................70
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting...............................................77
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting...........................................77
Keys and Remote Controls – Information
Messages............................................................77
L
Lane Centering..............................................322
How Does Lane Centering Work..................322
Lane Centering Alerts.......................................323
Lane Centering Automatic
Cancellation....................................................324
Lane Centering Indicators...............................324
Lane Centering Limitations............................322
Lane Centering Precautions...........................322
Lane Centering Requirements......................322
Switching Lane Centering On and
Off.......................................................................323
Lane Keeping System Indicators...........336
Lane Keeping System................................333
Aid Mode...............................................................335
Alert and Aid Mode...........................................335
Alert Mode............................................................334
Lane Keeping System –
Troubleshooting.............................................337
Lane Keeping System Limitations.........333
Lane Keeping System Precautions.......333
Lane Keeping System –
Troubleshooting........................................337
Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................338
Lane Keeping System – Information
Messages..........................................................337
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft.................................377
687
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Remote Control.....................................593
Live Traffic......................................................594
Switching Live Traffic On and Off...............594
What Is Live Traffic...........................................594
Load Carrying...............................................360
Load Carrying Precautions......................360
Loading Your Trailer....................................376
Locating the 360 Degree
Cameras......................................................305
Auxiliary Camera...............................................306
Bed Camera........................................................306
Front View Camera...........................................305
Rear View Camera............................................305
Side View Camera.............................................305
Locating the Blind Spot Information
System Sensors.........................................341
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir........273
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert
Sensors.........................................................345
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel................232
Regular Cab..........................................................232
Super Cab/Crew Cab........................................232
Locating the Keyless Entry Keypad.........87
Locating the Memory Function
Buttons...........................................................181
Locating the Power Outlet.......................190
Bed...........................................................................198
Instrument Panel................................................197
Rear of the Center Console.............................197
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist
Sensors.........................................................349
Locating the Rear View Camera............302
Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels...................................361
Locating the Tire label...............................494
Locating the USB Ports.............................186
Charge Only USB Ports....................................186
Data Transfer USB Ports.................................186
Locating the Wireless Accessory
Charger.........................................................203
Locating Your Vehicle.....................................71
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Keyless Entry Keypad................................89
Locking the Doors................................................89
Unlocking the Doors...........................................89
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Remote Keyless Entry...............................88
Locking the Doors................................................88
Unlocking the Doors...........................................88
Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate.........91
Locking the Rear Window Controls.......138
Low Engine Use Mode.................................221
How Does Low Engine Use Mode
Work....................................................................221
Low Engine Use Mode Limitations..............222
What is Low Engine Use Mode......................221
M
Maintenance.................................................455
Engine Air Filter...................................................467
Engine Oil.............................................................462
Exterior Bulbs......................................................474
Interior Bulbs.......................................................483
Maintenance Precautions........................455
Making and Receiving a Phone
Call.................................................................586
During a Phone Call..........................................586
Making Calls........................................................586
Receiving Calls...................................................586
Manually Dimming the Interior
Mirror..............................................................139
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake..............................................................276
...................................................................................276
Manually Shifting Gears............................254
Shifting Using the Buttons on the Selector
Lever..................................................................254
Manual Park Release..................................257
Manual Park Release Precautions...............257
Using Manual Park Release............................257
What Is Manual Park Release........................257
Manual Seats.................................................168
Adjusting the Head Restraint........................168
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................170
Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................169
Folding the Seats................................................176
Head Restraint Components.........................168
Installing the Head Restraint.........................169
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................169
Removing the Head Restraint.......................169
Unfolding the Seats............................................177
688
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Massage Seats...............................................173
Adjusting the Massage Seat Settings.........173
Massage Seat Limitations...............................173
Master Access Code......................................87
What Is the Master Access Code....................87
Memory Function..........................................181
Memory Function Precautions.................181
Mislock...............................................................85
Mislock Limitations.............................................85
Switching Mislock On and Off........................85
What Is Mislock.....................................................85
Mobile Communications
Equipment..................................................642
Mobile Device Data........................................29
Moonroof Bounce-Back.............................143
Overriding Moonroof Bounce-Back.............143
What Is Moonroof Bounce-Back..................143
Moonroof.........................................................142
Moonroof Bounce-Back...................................143
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................530
Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L Diesel.................531
Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L..............................532
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................534
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................533
Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L..............................535
Muting the Audio...........................................571
MyKey Settings................................................78
Configurable MyKey Settings...........................78
Non-Configurable MyKey Settings................78
MyKey – Troubleshooting............................81
MyKey – Frequently Asked Questions.........83
MyKey – Information Messages......................81
MyKey™.............................................................78
MyKey Settings......................................................78
MyKey – Troubleshooting..................................81
N
Navigation Map Updates.........................594
Navigation......................................................594
Adjusting the Map.............................................594
Live Traffic............................................................594
Route Guidance.................................................595
Setting a Destination.......................................594
Waypoints............................................................595
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........605
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................607
Oil Change Reminder......................................605
O
Off-Road Driving..........................................428
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-Road...........429
Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques...........428
Water Wading.....................................................429
What Is Off-Road Driving...............................428
Opening and Closing the Flip Key............70
Closing Your Flip Key............................................71
Opening Your Flip Key.........................................70
Opening and Closing the Hood..............455
Opening and Closing the Moonroof......142
Closing the Moonroof........................................142
Opening the Moonroof ....................................142
Opening and Closing the Sliding
Windows.......................................................138
Opening and Closing the Sun
Shade.............................................................142
Closing the Sun Shade.....................................142
Opening the Sun Shade...................................142
Opening and Closing the Windows........137
One-Touch Close................................................137
One-Touch Open.................................................137
Opening the Tailgate.....................................91
Opening the Tailgate From Inside Your
Vehicle.................................................................96
Opening the Tailgate From Outside Your
Vehicle..................................................................91
Opening the Tailgate Using the Remote
Control................................................................96
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle.............................................................84
Individually Unlocking and Locking the
Doors Using the Locking Button...............84
Opening the Doors From Inside Your Vehicle
................................................................................85
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle.............................................................84
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Key Blade...........................................................84
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Remote Control...............................................84
Operating Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow...................................................433
689
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Manual..........................................................619
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist........280
Overriding the Set Speed...........................321
P
Parking Aid Indicators...............................300
Parking Aid Precautions............................297
Parking Aids...................................................297
Front Parking Aid...............................................298
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting....................301
Rear Parking Aid.................................................297
Side Parking Aid.................................................299
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting..............301
Parking Aids – Information Messages........301
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................111
How Does the Passive Anti-Theft System
Work......................................................................111
What Is the Passive Anti-Theft
System.................................................................111
Pedestrian Alert System..............................67
Perchlorate....................................................642
Performing a Master Reset......................598
Personalized Settings.................................153
Changing the Measure Unit............................153
Changing the Temperature Unit...................153
Changing the Tire Pressure Unit...................153
Personal Profiles..........................................592
Personal Safety System
Components..................................................57
Personal Safety System™..........................57
Phone Menu..................................................585
..................................................................................585
Favorites...............................................................585
Phone List............................................................585
Phone...............................................................585
Phone Precautions.....................................585
Pickup Bed Anchor Points.......................366
Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Tie-Down Cleats............................................367
Locating the Pickup Bed Anchor
Points................................................................366
Pickup Bed Anchor Point Load
Capacities........................................................367
Pickup Bed Anchor Point
Precautions.....................................................366
Pickup Bed.....................................................366
Pickup Bed Anchor Points.............................366
Pickup Bed Ramps...........................................368
Tailgate Anchor Points....................................368
Pickup Bed Precautions...........................366
Pickup Bed Ramps.....................................368
Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Ramp Holder..................................................369
Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Ramps..............................................................369
Pickup Bed Ramp Precautions....................368
Storing the Pickup Bed Ramps....................370
Playing Media Using Bluetooth®..........589
Playing Media Using the USB Port........186
Playing or Pausing the Audio
Source...........................................................570
Audio Unit.............................................................570
Touchscreen........................................................570
Post-Crash Alert System.........................440
How Does the Post-Crash Alert System
Work..................................................................440
Post-Crash Alert System
Limitations......................................................440
Switching the Post-Crash Alert System
Off......................................................................440
What Is the Post-Crash Alert
System.............................................................440
Power Outlet Indicators.............................198
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2.4kW/7.2kW................................................191
Generator Mode Power Indicator..................191
Power Outlet Status Indicator........................191
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2kW................................................................190
Generator Mode Power Indicator.................190
Power Outlet Status Indicator......................190
Power Outlet Limitations...........................197
Power Outlet..................................................188
Power Outlet – Troubleshooting..................194
Power Outlet Precautions.........................197
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2.4kW/7.2kW...................................189
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2kW.....................................................188
Power Outlet – Troubleshooting............194
Power Outlet – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................196
690
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Power Outlet – Information
Messages..........................................................194
Power Running Board Kick Switch..........115
....................................................................................116
Power Running Board Precautions.........115
Power Running Board Settings................115
....................................................................................115
Power Running Boards................................115
Power Running Boards –
Troubleshooting..............................................116
Power Running Boards –
Troubleshooting..........................................116
Power Running Boards – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................116
Power Seats....................................................170
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................170
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................173
Adjusting the Seat Backrest.............................171
Adjusting the Seat Cushion..............................171
Adjusting the Seat Height................................172
Head Restraint Components.........................170
Installing the Head Restraint...........................171
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward...............................................................171
Removing the Head Restraint.........................171
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations.............348
Intersection Assist.............................................348
Pedestrian Detection Limitations...............348
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions............347
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................347
Automatic Emergency Braking......................351
Distance Alert.......................................................351
Distance Indication...........................................350
Evasive Steering Assist....................................352
Pre-Collision Assist –
Troubleshooting............................................353
Pre-Collision Assist –
Troubleshooting........................................353
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................354
Pre-Collision Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................353
Pre-Collision Assist – Warning
Lamps...............................................................353
Preparing Your Vehicle for
Storage.........................................................492
12 Volt Battery.....................................................492
Body........................................................................492
Brakes....................................................................492
Engine....................................................................492
General..................................................................492
Hybrid Battery Systems .................................492
Tires........................................................................493
Programming a MyKey................................80
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to Your Garage Door Opener
Motor..............................................................184
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to Your Gate Opener Motor...................184
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming..................................................184
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to Your Hand-Held Transmitter...........183
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Flip Key...............................76
General Information ...........................................76
Steps for Programming Your Spare Remote
Control ................................................................76
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start..........75
General Information............................................75
Steps for Programming Your Spare Remote
Control ................................................................75
Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats...........................................61
Puncture
See: Changing a Flat Tire.................................516
Push Button Ignition Switch.....................210
Starting the Engine............................................210
Switching the Ignition Off...............................210
Switching the Ignition to Accessory
Mode..................................................................210
R
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification..............................................562
Rear Exterior.....................................................34
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings......................................................180
Rear Occupant Alert System
Indicators.....................................................180
Rear Occupant Alert System
Limitations....................................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System
Precautions..................................................179
691
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Rear Occupant Alert System....................179
Rear Parking Aid...........................................297
Locating the Rear Parking Aid
Sensors.............................................................298
Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings............298
Rear Parking Aid Limitations.........................297
What is the Rear Parking Aid.........................297
Rear Seats.......................................................176
Heated Seats.........................................................177
Manual Seats........................................................176
Rear View Camera Guide Lines..............302
Rear View Camera Precautions.............302
Rear View Camera......................................302
Rear View Camera Settings..........................303
Rear View Camera Settings....................303
Switching Rear View Camera Delay On and
Off......................................................................303
Zooming the Rear View Camera In and
Out.....................................................................303
Recalling a Preset Position........................181
Linking a Preset Position toy Your Remote
Control or Passive Key..................................181
Recovery Towing.........................................440
Accessing the Front Towing Point..............440
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
4x2.................................................................445
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
4x4.................................................................443
Switching Off......................................................444
Switching On.......................................................443
Refueling.........................................................233
Manually Opening the Fuel Filler
Door....................................................................237
Refueling System Overview...........................233
Refueling Your Vehicle.....................................233
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Charge............................................................277
Remote Control Limitations.......................70
Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle...........................................................155
Remotely Starting the Vehicle.......................155
Remotely Stopping the Vehicle.....................155
Remote Start Limitations..........................155
Remote Start Precautions........................155
Remote Start Remote Control
Indicators......................................................156
Remote Control Feedback..............................156
Remote Start..................................................155
Remote Start Settings......................................156
Remote Start Settings................................156
Setting the Remote Start Duration..............157
Switching Climate Control Auto Mode On
and Off..............................................................156
Switching Climate Control Last Settings
On and Off.......................................................156
Switching the Heated Seat Settings On and
Off.......................................................................156
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
Settings On and Off......................................157
Removing and Installing the
Tailgate............................................................91
Removing the Key Blade...............................71
Removing Your Vehicle From
Storage.........................................................493
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............490
Replacement Parts
Recommendation....................................642
Collision Repairs................................................642
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..............................................................642
Warranty on Replacement Parts.................642
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................74
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter..................166
Replacing the Front Wiper Blades...........121
Reporting Safety Defects in
Canada.........................................................620
Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States...........................................................620
Reprogramming the Garage Door
Opener...........................................................185
Resetting Ground Fault Detection.........192
Resetting the Circuit Breaker - Vehicles
With: 7.2kW..................................................193
Resetting the Stopping Position -
Vehicles With: Power Adjustable
Steering Column.........................................118
Resetting Tire Pressure Monitoring
System............................................................511
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure...........................................................511
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
System...............................................................512
Restarting the Engine.................................224
692
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Resuming the Set Speed...........................314
Resuming the Set Speed from a Complete
Stop...................................................................320
Reverse Braking Assist Indicators.........280
Reverse Braking Assist
Precautions.................................................279
Reverse Braking Assist...............................279
Reverse Braking Assist –
Troubleshooting...........................................280
Reverse Braking Assist –
Troubleshooting.......................................280
Reverse Braking Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................281
Reverse Braking Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................280
Roadside Assistance..................................436
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................437
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................436
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................436
Rollover Warning..........................................618
Route Guidance...........................................595
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume.............................................................595
Canceling Route Guidance............................595
Repeating an Instruction................................595
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................430
Running Out of Fuel....................................232
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................232
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................232
S
Satellite Radio...............................................574
Locating the Satellite Radio Identification
Number.............................................................574
Satellite Radio Limitations.............................574
Satellite Radio Settings...................................575
Selecting a Channel..........................................575
What Is Satellite Radio....................................574
Saving a Preset Position.............................181
Scheduled Maintenance..........................602
Seatbelt Extensions......................................56
Seatbelt Precautions....................................49
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................53
How Does the Seatbelt Reminder
Work.....................................................................53
Seatbelt Reminder Audible Warnings..........55
Seatbelt Reminder Indicators.........................55
Switching the Seatbelt Reminder On and
Off.........................................................................55
Seatbelts...........................................................49
Automatic Locking Mode...................................51
Seatbelt Reminder...............................................53
Sensitive Locking Mode......................................51
Security...............................................................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System..................................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings................112
Passive Anti-Theft System...............................111
Security – Troubleshooting..............................113
Security – Troubleshooting........................113
Security – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................114
Security – Information Messages..................113
Selecting a Drive Mode..............................328
Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive
Mode..............................................................262
Shifting to or from Four-Wheel Drive Low
(4L)....................................................................263
Selecting the Audio Source.....................570
Audio Unit.............................................................570
Touchscreen........................................................570
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Guidelines....................................................246
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Precautions.................................................245
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Requirements............................................246
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System..........................................................245
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank....................................................247
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Troubleshooting............................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Troubleshooting........................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Information Messages................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Warning Lamps.............................................249
Sending and Receiving a Text
Message.......................................................587
693
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Sensitive Locking Mode................................51
How Does Sensitive Locking Mode
Work......................................................................51
What is Sensitive Locking Mode......................51
Service Data......................................................27
Setting a Destination.................................594
Setting a Destination Using a Point of
Interest.............................................................595
Setting a Destination Using a Predictive
Destination......................................................595
Setting a Destination Using a Recent
Destination......................................................595
Setting a Destination Using a Saved
Destination......................................................595
Setting a Destination Using the Map
Screen...............................................................594
Setting a Destination Using the Text Entry
Screen...............................................................594
Setting a Memory Preset...........................571
Settings Data...................................................28
Comfort and Convenience Data.....................28
Entertainment Data............................................28
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Gap..................................................................319
Following a Vehicle...........................................320
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed.............................................................318
Manually Changing the Set Speed..............319
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed from a
Complete Stop...............................................318
Setting the Blower Motor Speed............159
Setting the Clock and Date.......................571
Switching Automatic Time Updates On and
Off.......................................................................572
Setting the Cruise Control Speed...........313
Changing the Set Speed..................................313
Setting the Hill Descent Speed..............289
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Tolerance.......................................358
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Warning..........................................358
Setting the Temperature...........................159
Setting the Wake Word.............................583
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for
a Conventional Trailer.............................410
Calibrating the System.....................................412
Configuring the Trailer......................................410
Trailer Sensor Installation................................412
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear...............254
Center Console Shifter....................................254
Column Shifter...................................................254
Side Parking Aid...........................................299
Locating the Side Parking Aid
Sensors............................................................300
Side Parking Aid Audible Warnings............300
Side Parking Aid Limitations.........................299
What is the Side Parking Aid.........................299
Sitting in the Correct Position..................167
Snow Plowing Precautions......................432
Snow Plowing...............................................432
Snowplow Mode................................................434
Snowplow Mode..........................................434
Switching Snowplow Mode On and
Off......................................................................434
What Is Snowplow Mode...............................434
Sounding the Panic Alarm...........................71
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Diesel.............................609
Exceptions.............................................................613
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Gasoline..........................614
Exceptions............................................................616
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................313
Speed Sign Recognition Indicators.......357
Speed Sign Recognition
Limitations...................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition
Precautions.................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition............................357
Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting............................................358
Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting........................................358
Speed Sign Recognition – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................359
Speed Sign Recognition – Information
Messages.........................................................358
Stability Control Indicator........................288
Stability Control...........................................286
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch..........................................209
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Precautions................................................209
Starting and Stopping the Engine........209
Automatic Engine Stop....................................215
694
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Engine Block Heater...........................................213
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting.............................................216
Starting the Engine............................................210
Stopping the Engine..........................................214
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting.........................................216
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Frequently Asked Questions.....................218
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Information Messages..................................217
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Warning Lamps..............................................216
Starting the Engine......................................210
Restarting the Engine After Stopping
it............................................................................212
Starting a Diesel Engine....................................211
Starting a Gasoline Engine.............................210
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System...............................................................212
Status Bar.......................................................581
Steering...........................................................295
Electric Power Steering...................................295
Steering – Troubleshooting...........................296
Steering – Troubleshooting.....................296
Steering – Information Messages...............296
Steering – Warning Indicators......................296
Steering Wheel...............................................30
Stopping the Engine...................................224
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................214
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................214
Storage............................................................205
Cup Holders.........................................................205
Glasses Holder...................................................208
Glove Compartment........................................205
Under Seat Storage..........................................206
Storing Your Vehicle...................................492
Stowing the Selector Lever - Vehicles
With: Console Shift..................................256
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.....................................................142
Switching Active Drive Assist On and
Off...................................................................292
Switching Active Drive Assist Off................292
Switching Active Drive Assist On.................292
Switching Active Park Assist On and
Off..................................................................309
Cancelling Active Park Assist.......................309
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
and Off...........................................................317
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................318
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.........................................................................317
Switching Air Conditioning On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On
and Off...........................................................135
Switching Android Auto On and
Off...................................................................591
Disabling Android Auto....................................591
Enabling Android Auto with USB.................591
Enabling Android Auto with Wireless.........591
Re-Enabling Android Auto..............................591
Switching Apple CarPlay On and
Off...................................................................591
Disabling Apple CarPlay..................................591
Enabling Apple CarPlay with USB ..............591
Enabling Apple CarPlay with
Wireless.............................................................591
Re-Enabling Apple CarPlay............................591
Switching Auto Hold On and Off...........283
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and
Off...................................................................224
Switching Blind Spot Information
System On and Off..................................340
Switching Climate Control On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and
Off..................................................................344
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off....................................................................313
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................313
Switching Cruise Control On..........................313
Switching Defrost On and Off.................158
Switching Driver Alert On and Off.........355
Resetting Driver Alert.......................................356
Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and
Off....................................................................90
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control........................................321
695
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Switching Generator Mode On and
Off...................................................................192
Using the Bed Control.......................................192
Using the Information and Entertainment
Display Screen................................................192
Using the Instrument Panel............................192
Switching Hill Descent Control On and
Off..................................................................289
Switching Maximum Cooling On and
Off...................................................................159
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and
Off..................................................................349
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................349
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off....................................................179
Semiannual Reminder......................................179
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching Repeat Mode On and
Off....................................................................571
Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Off..................................................................280
Switching Shuffle Mode On and
Off....................................................................571
Switching Stability Control On and
Off...................................................................287
Stability Control and Traction Control with
Roll Stability Control...................................288
Switching Text Message Notification On
and Off.........................................................588
Android..................................................................588
iOS..........................................................................588
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off..................................................................570
Switching the Display On and Off.........573
Audio Unit.............................................................573
Touchscreen.........................................................573
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x2.................271
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x4...............269
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On
and Off...........................................................135
Individual Map Lamps......................................135
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and
Off..................................................................438
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and
Off...................................................................159
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off..........................................................159
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off....................................................118
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off...................................................................159
Switching the Lane Keeping System
Mode.............................................................334
Switching the Lane Keeping System On
and Off..........................................................334
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On
and Off...........................................................135
Switching the Trailer Reversing Aid On
and Off...........................................................413
Switching Traction Control On and
Off..................................................................284
Switching Trailer Sway Control On and
Off..................................................................409
Switching Utility Idle On and Off -
Vehicles With: Flip Key..............................191
Switching Utility Idle off using the
Information and Entertainment Display
Screen................................................................192
Switching Utility Idle Off using the
Key.......................................................................192
Switching Utility Idle On....................................191
Symbols Glossary..........................................23
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle.................23
T
Tailgate Anchor Points..............................368
Locating the Tailgate Anchor Points..........368
Tailgate Anchor Point Load
Capacities.......................................................368
Tailgate Step....................................................92
Accessing the Tailgate Step.............................92
Stowing the Tailgate Step................................93
Tailgate...............................................................91
Bed Extender.........................................................93
Closing the Tailgate............................................96
Opening the Tailgate...........................................91
Tailgate Step..........................................................92
Tailgate – Troubleshooting.............................102
696
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Tailgate – Troubleshooting.......................102
Tailgate – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................103
Tailgate – Information Messages.................102
Tailgate – Warning Lamps..............................102
Tailgate Work Surface..................................95
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............524
Temporary Neutral Mode.........................255
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode.............255
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode.................255
Temporary Neutral Mode
Limitations.......................................................255
What Is Temporary Neutral Mode...............255
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Program - United States of
America.........................................................618
The Mediation and Arbitration Program
- Canada.......................................................619
Tire Care.........................................................505
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Limitations...................................................510
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Overview.....................................................509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Precautions.................................................510
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting.............................................514
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting.........................................514
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Information Messages.................................515
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Warning
Lamps................................................................514
Tire Replacement Requirements...........501
AGE..........................................................................501
Tire Rotation..................................................507
Tire Rotation Diagram.....................................508
Towing a Trailer Limitations.....................375
Towing a Trailer Precautions....................375
Towing a Trailer.............................................375
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting............404
Towing Weights and Dimensions................378
Towing a Trailer –
Troubleshooting.......................................404
Towing a Trailer – Information
Messages........................................................404
Towing Weights and Dimensions..........378
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................403
Recommended Towing Weights..................378
What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight .............................................................403
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions..........443
Towing Your Vehicle...................................443
Towing Your Vehicle –
Troubleshooting............................................445
Towing Your Vehicle –
Troubleshooting........................................445
Towing Your Vehicle – Information
Messages.........................................................445
Traction Control Indicator........................284
Traction Control...........................................284
Traction Control – Troubleshooting...........285
Traction Control –
Troubleshooting........................................285
Traction Control – Information
Messages.........................................................285
Trailer Brake Precautions..........................375
Trailer Reversing Aid Precautions..........410
Trailer Reversing Aid....................................410
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for a
Conventional Trailer.....................................410
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Troubleshooting.............................................416
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Troubleshooting.........................................416
Trailer Reversing Aid – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................418
Trailer Reversing Aid – Information
Messages..........................................................416
Trailer Sway Control Precautions.........409
Trailer Sway Control..................................409
Trailer Towing Hints.....................................376
Trailer Towing Navigation.........................596
Entering Trailer Dimensions..........................596
Navigation Alerts...............................................596
Switching Trailer Towing Navigation On
and Off.............................................................596
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Specification...............................................561
Transporting the Vehicle...........................441
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen............................................................152
Accessing the Trip Computer.........................152
697
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Resetting the Trip Computer..........................152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen.........................153
Accessing the Trip Computer.........................153
Resetting the Trip Computer..........................153
Type Approvals.............................................622
Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind
Spot Information System..........................622
Radio Frequency Certifications for Body
Control Module..............................................622
Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise
Control Module..............................................623
Radio Frequency Certifications for Garage
Door Opener..................................................640
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.............624
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Anti-Theft System.......................................625
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Entry/Passive Start Remote
Control..............................................................628
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Key......................................................................629
Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio
Transceiver Module.......................................631
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC4...............................................................632
Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC4
Low....................................................................634
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Telematics Control Unit.............................635
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) -
FP3.....................................................................636
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) -
FP4.....................................................................637
Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless
Accessory Charging Module....................640
U
Under Hood Fuse Box...............................446
Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box........446
Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood
Fuse Box...........................................................447
Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box...........446
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................456
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L
Diesel.............................................................457
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L..................458
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................460
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................459
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L...................461
Under Seat Storage....................................206
Locating the Under Seat Storage
Compartment................................................206
Updating the Vehicle Systems
Wirelessly.....................................................597
Applying a Vehicle System Software
Update..............................................................597
Scheduling an Update.....................................597
System Update Requirements.....................597
Viewing Update Details...................................597
USB Ports........................................................186
Using a Slide-In Camper............................361
Using Auto Hold...........................................283
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................80
Using Progressive Range
Selection......................................................256
Using Snow Chains.....................................503
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Column Shift.............200
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Console Shift..............201
Using the Instrument Cluster Display
Controls..........................................................151
Back Button...........................................................151
Button......................................................................151
Menu Button..........................................................151
Scroll Buttons.......................................................151
Status Indicator....................................................151
Using the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller....................................................405
Adjusting the Trailer Brake Gain..................406
Using the Remote Control..........................70
Lock...........................................................................70
Panic Alarm............................................................70
Remote Start.........................................................70
Tailgate.....................................................................70
Unlock.......................................................................70
698
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Using the Trailer Reverse Guidance
Views..............................................................414
Hitch Angle Graphic...........................................414
Using the Trailer Reversing Aid
Controller......................................................413
Using This Publication..................................22
V
Vehicle Care..................................................486
Cleaning the Exterior.......................................486
Cleaning the Interior........................................488
Vehicle Identification Number...............564
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number............................................................564
Vehicle Identification Number
Overview..........................................................564
Vehicle Identification.................................564
Vehicle Identification Number.....................564
Vehicle Interior.................................................32
Vehicle System Updates...........................597
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot...............................569
Ventilated Seats............................................174
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off........................................................................174
Ventilated Seat Precautions...........................174
Ventilation
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
Venting the Moonroof.................................142
Viewing the Tire Pressures.........................511
Visual Search...................................................30
Voice Interaction Examples.....................583
Voice Interaction..........................................583
W
Washer Fluid Specification......................559
Washers............................................................122
Adding Washer Fluid..........................................122
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and
Off........................................................................122
Using the Windshield Washer........................122
Washer Fluid Specification..............................122
Washer Precautions...........................................122
Washers
See: Wipers and Washers...............................120
Waxing Your Vehicle..................................490
Waypoints......................................................595
Adding a Waypoint...........................................595
Editing Waypoints.............................................595
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Indicators......................................................149
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Warning Lamps...........................................147
What Is 911 Assist..........................................68
What Is a Connected Vehicle..................565
What Is Active Drive Assist.......................291
What Is Active Park Assist.......................309
What is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle............221
What Is Auto-Start-Stop..........................224
What Is Blind Spot Information
System.........................................................340
What Is Brake Coach...................................154
What Is Cross Traffic Alert.......................344
What Is Cruise Control................................313
Requirements.......................................................313
What Is Drive Mode Control....................328
What Is Driver Alert.....................................355
What Is Ford Protect.................................600
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(Canada Only)...............................................601
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans -
United States Only......................................600
What Is Generator Mode............................192
What Is Hill Descent Control...................289
What Is Hill Start Assist............................282
What Is MyKey.................................................78
What Is Pre-Collision Assist.....................347
What Is Remote Start.................................155
What Is Reverse Braking Assist..............279
What Is Speed Sign Recognition............357
What Is the 360 Degree Camera..........305
What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................166
What Is the Catalytic Converter..............251
What Is the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Gauge.............................................................147
What Is the Diesel Particulate
Filter...............................................................240
What Is the Electric Parking Brake........276
What Is the Electronic Locking
Differential..................................................269
699
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge.............................................................147
What Is the Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge.............................................................147
What Is the Garage Door Opener...........182
HomeLink Wireless Control System............182
What Is the Gross Axle Weight
Rating.............................................................361
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)..............361
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.............................................................361
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.............................................................361
What Is the High Voltage Battery..........252
What Is the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller....................................................405
What Is the Lane Keeping System........333
What Is the Memory Function..................181
What Is the Pedestrian Alert
System.............................................................67
What Is the Personal Safety
System.............................................................57
What Is the Power Outlet.........................188
What is the Rear Occupant Alert
System...........................................................179
What Is the Rear View Camera..............302
What Is the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System....................................245
What Is the Speedometer........................146
What Is the Tachometer............................146
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.........................................................509
What Is the Trailer Reversing Aid...........410
What Is the Transmission Fluid
Temperature Gauge..................................147
What Is the Trip Summary........................154
What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge..............147
What Is the Wireless Accessory
Charger.........................................................203
What Is Traction Control..........................284
What Is Utility Idle Mode - Vehicles With:
Flip Key...........................................................191
What is Voice Interaction.........................583
Wheel and Tire Information....................494
Wheel Nuts....................................................523
Window Bounce-Back................................137
Overriding Window Bounce-Back................137
What Is Window Bounce-Back......................137
Windows...........................................................137
Window Bounce-Back......................................137
Wipers and Washers –
Troubleshooting.........................................122
Wipers and Washers – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................123
Wipers and Washers – Warning
Lamps.................................................................122
Wipers and Washers...................................120
Autowipers............................................................120
Washers..................................................................122
Wipers.....................................................................120
Wipers and Washers –
Troubleshooting.............................................122
Wipers...............................................................120
Switching Windshield Wipers On and
Off.......................................................................120
Wiper Precautions..............................................120
Wireless Accessory Charger
Precautions.................................................203
Wireless Accessory Charger....................203
700
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
